US20210117054A1 - Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for Content Navigation and Manipulation - Google Patents
Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for Content Navigation and Manipulation Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20210117054A1 US20210117054A1 US17/138,676 US202017138676A US2021117054A1 US 20210117054 A1 US20210117054 A1 US 20210117054A1 US 202017138676 A US202017138676 A US 202017138676A US 2021117054 A1 US2021117054 A1 US 2021117054A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- contact
- intensity
- content
- touch
- movement
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
- G06F3/0481—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance
- G06F3/0482—Interaction with lists of selectable items, e.g. menus
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/03—Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
- G06F3/041—Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
- G06F3/0414—Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means using force sensing means to determine a position
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
- G06F3/0481—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance
- G06F3/0483—Interaction with page-structured environments, e.g. book metaphor
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
- G06F3/0484—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] for the control of specific functions or operations, e.g. selecting or manipulating an object, an image or a displayed text element, setting a parameter value or selecting a range
- G06F3/0485—Scrolling or panning
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
- G06F3/0484—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] for the control of specific functions or operations, e.g. selecting or manipulating an object, an image or a displayed text element, setting a parameter value or selecting a range
- G06F3/0485—Scrolling or panning
- G06F3/04855—Interaction with scrollbars
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
- G06F3/0487—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
- G06F3/0488—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
- G06F3/0487—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
- G06F3/0488—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
- G06F3/04883—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures for inputting data by handwriting, e.g. gesture or text
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F2203/00—Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/00 - G06F3/048
- G06F2203/041—Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/041 - G06F3/045
- G06F2203/04105—Pressure sensors for measuring the pressure or force exerted on the touch surface without providing the touch position
Definitions
- This relates generally to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces, including but not limited to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces used for navigating and manipulating displayed content.
- touch-sensitive surfaces as input devices for computers and other electronic computing devices has increased significantly in recent years.
- exemplary touch-sensitive surfaces include touchpads and touch-screen displays. Such surfaces are widely used to navigate and manipulate content in user interfaces on a display.
- Exemplary types of navigation and manipulation include scrolling, zooming, and adjusting the position and/or size of one or more user interface objects, as well as reordering user interface objects.
- Exemplary user interface objects include digital images, video, text, icons, control elements such as buttons, and other graphics.
- a user will, in some circumstances, need to navigate and manipulate content in a reader application (e.g., iBooks from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.), a file management program (e.g., Finder from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.), an image management application (e.g., Aperture, iPhoto, Photos from Apple Inc.
- a reader application e.g., iBooks from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.
- a file management program e.g., Finder from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.
- an image management application e.g., Aperture, iPhoto, Photos from Apple Inc.
- a digital content management application e.g., iTunes from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.
- a drawing application e.g., Keynote from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.
- a word processing application e.g., Pages from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.
- a spreadsheet application e.g., Numbers from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.
- Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods for content navigation and manipulation.
- Such methods and interfaces reduce the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface.
- Such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges.
- the device is a desktop computer.
- the device is portable (e.g., a notebook computer, tablet computer, or handheld device).
- the device is a personal electronic device (e.g., a wearable electronic device, such as a watch).
- the device has a touchpad.
- the device has a touch-sensitive display (also known as a “touch screen” or “touch-screen display”).
- GUI graphical user interface
- the user interacts with the GUI primarily through stylus and/or finger contacts and gestures on the touch-sensitive surface.
- the functions optionally include document reading, image editing, drawing, presenting, word processing, spreadsheet making, game playing, telephoning, video conferencing, e-mailing, instant messaging, workout support, digital photographing, digital videoing, web browsing, digital music playing, note taking, and/or digital video playing. Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a non-transitory computer readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors.
- a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface.
- the method includes: displaying, on the display, content of a first content item, wherein the first content item is one of a sequence of content items.
- the device detects a user input that includes movement of a contact in a respective direction on the touch-sensitive surface.
- the device In response to detecting the user input: in accordance with a determination that the user input meets item-switching criteria, the device replaces display of the first content item with display of a second content item in the sequence of content items, wherein the item-switching criteria include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact is above a first intensity threshold; and, in accordance with a determination that the user input does not meet the item-switching criteria, the device navigates through the content of the first content item in accordance with the movement of the contact.
- a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface.
- the method includes: presenting a first portion of a list of items on the display.
- the device detects a contact on the touch-sensitive surface while the first portion of the list of items is presented on the display and a first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface while a characteristic intensity of the contact remains below a first intensity threshold.
- the device In response to detecting the first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface while the characteristic intensity of the contact remains below the first intensity threshold, the device scrolls the list of items to present a second portion of the list of items on the display in accordance with the first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. While a focus selector associated with the contact is located on a first item in the second portion of the list of items presented on the display, the device detects an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold followed by a second movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
- the device In response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold followed by the second movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface, the device moves the first item relative to other items in the second portion of the list of items presented on the display in accordance with the second movement of the contact.
- a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface.
- the method includes: presenting a first portion of structured content on the display.
- the structured content includes a plurality of sections, and the first portion includes content from a first section of the plurality of sections.
- the device detects a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while the first portion of the structured content is presented on the display.
- the device detects an increase in a characteristic intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface and detects a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
- the device In response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact and detecting the first movement of the first contact: in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a first intensity threshold, the device translates the structured content to display a start of a second section adjacent to the first section of the structured content at a predefined location on the display; and in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact does not increase above the first intensity threshold, the device translates the structured content in accordance with a magnitude of the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
- a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface.
- the method includes: presenting a first portion of content on the display. While presenting the first portion of the content on the display, the device detects a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface and detects a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In response to detecting the first movement of the first contact, the device scrolls the content to present a second portion of the content on the display in accordance with the first movement of the first contact. The device detects an increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
- the device After detecting the increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, the device detects a lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, the device moves the content on the display by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic intensity of the first contact and a characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact.
- a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface.
- the method includes: presenting a first portion of content on the display. While presenting the first portion of the content, the device detects a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface and detects a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The device detects a lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
- the device In response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface: in accordance with a determination that the first contact had a characteristic intensity above a respective intensity threshold prior to the lift-off of the first contact, the device scrolls through the content to a predefined portion of the content; and in accordance with a determination that the first contact had a characteristic intensity below the respective intensity threshold prior to the lift-off of the first contact, the device scrolls through the content by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic speed of the first contact during the first movement.
- an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts, one or more sensor units to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more sensor units.
- the processing unit is configured to: enable display, on the display unit, of content of a first content item, wherein the first content item is one of a sequence of content items; detect a user input that includes movement of a contact in a respective direction on the touch-sensitive surface unit; in response to detecting the user input: in accordance with a determination that the user input meets item-switching criteria, enable the display unit to replace display of the first content item with display of a second content item in the sequence of content items, wherein the item-switching criteria include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact is above a first intensity threshold; and, in accordance with a determination that the user input does not meet the item-switching criteria, enable the display unit to navigate through the content of the first content item in accordance with the movement of the contact.
- an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts, one or more sensor units to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more sensor units.
- the processing unit is configured to: present a first portion of a list of items on the display unit; detect a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit while the first portion of the list of items is presented on the display unit; detect a first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit while a characteristic intensity of the contact remains below a first intensity threshold; in response to detecting the first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit while the characteristic intensity of the contact remains below the first intensity threshold, scroll the list of items to present a second portion of the list of items on the display unit in accordance with the first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; while a focus selector associated with the contact is located on a first item in the second portion of the list of items presented on the display unit, detect an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold followed by a second movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold followed by the second movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, move the
- an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts, one or more sensor units to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more sensor units.
- the processing unit is configured to: present a first portion of structured content on the display unit, wherein the structured content includes a plurality of sections, and the first portion includes content from a first section of the plurality of sections; detect a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit while the first portion of the structured content is presented on the display unit; detect an increase in a characteristic intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit and detecting a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact and detecting the first movement of the first contact: in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a first intensity threshold, translate the structured content to enable display of a start of a second section adjacent to the first section of the structured content at a predefined location on the display unit; and, in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact does not increase above the first intensity threshold, translate the structured content in accordance with a magnitude of the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit.
- an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts, one or more sensor units to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more sensor units.
- the processing unit is configured to: present a first portion of content on the display unit; while presenting the first portion of the content on the display unit: detect a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and detect a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; in response to detecting the first movement of the first contact, scroll the content to present a second portion of the content on the display unit in accordance with the first movement of the first contact; detect an increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; after detecting the increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, detect a lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and, in response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, move the content on the display unit by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic intensity of the first contact and
- an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts, one or more sensor units to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more sensor units.
- the processing unit is configured to: present a first portion of content on the display unit; while presenting the first portion of the content: detect a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and detect a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; detect a lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and, in response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit: in accordance with a determination that the first contact had a characteristic intensity above a respective intensity threshold prior to the lift-off of the first contact, scroll through the content to a predefined portion of the content; and in accordance with a determination that the first contact had a characteristic intensity below the respective intensity threshold prior to the lift-off of the first contact, scroll through the content by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic speed of the first contact during the first movement.
- an electronic device includes a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, one or more processors, memory, and one or more programs; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors and the one or more programs include instructions for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein.
- a computer readable storage medium has stored therein instructions which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform or cause performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein.
- a graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory includes one or more of the elements displayed in any of the methods described herein, which are updated in response to inputs, as described in any of the methods described herein.
- an electronic device includes: a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface; and means for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein.
- an information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, includes means for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein.
- electronic devices with displays, touch-sensitive surfaces and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for content navigation and manipulation, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices.
- Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace conventional methods for content navigation and manipulation.
- FIG. 1A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments.
- FIG. 1B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments.
- FIG. 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device having a touch screen in accordance with some embodiments.
- FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments.
- FIG. 4A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device in accordance with some embodiments.
- FIG. 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display in accordance with some embodiments.
- FIGS. 4C-4E illustrate exemplary dynamic intensity thresholds in accordance with some embodiments.
- FIGS. 5A-5TT illustrate exemplary user interfaces for navigating within and between content items in accordance with some embodiments.
- FIGS. 6A-6B are flow diagrams illustrating a method of navigating within and between content items in accordance with some embodiments.
- FIGS. 7A-7C are flow diagrams illustrating a method of reordering list items in accordance with some embodiments.
- FIGS. 8A-8C are flow diagrams illustrating a method of navigating structured content in accordance with some embodiments.
- FIGS. 9A-9D are flow diagrams illustrating a method of variable movement of content in accordance with some embodiments.
- FIGS. 10A-10C are flow diagrams illustrating a method of scrolling to a predefined portion of content in accordance with some embodiments.
- FIGS. 11-15 are functional block diagrams of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.
- Many electronic devices use graphical user interfaces to display user interface objects (e.g., content items). There is often a need to navigate the user interface objects, the position of one or more user interface objects with respect to the position of a different user interface object, or a component of the user interface object with respect to another component of the user interface object. Thus, there is a need to manipulate user interface objects in a fast, efficient, and convenient manner on an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface.
- user interface objects e.g., content items
- Many electronic devices have graphical user interfaces that present lists of items such as digital content, bookmarks, locations (e.g., locations for which weather information is displayed) folders and/or other items.
- a user may need to move an item in a list to a different location in a list.
- a user may reorder a playlist of digital content to change a location of a particular content item within the playlist.
- methods are disclosed that streamline list reordering by enabling a user to use the same input gesture for list scrolling and list reordering functions.
- the function resulting from a gesture depends on a characteristic intensity of a contact in the gesture. Providing different functions resulting from the same input, based on an intensity component of the input, increases the range of controls available to a user.
- Many electronic devices have graphical user interfaces with features for navigating structured content, such as graphical user interfaces for reader applications and other applications for displaying content.
- a user may need to access a start of a next section following a currently displayed section (or a prior section preceding the currently displayed section) of structured content.
- Some methods for accessing adjacent sections require a user to navigate using a menu or a slider control. With conventional scrolling using a slider control, the distance of the movement of the contact is closely correlated with the amount of content scrolling (e.g., lines, pages, etc.) that is performed.
- methods are disclosed that streamline the structured content navigation process by allowing a user to translate structured content directly to an adjacent section using a defined input (regardless of the number of pages in the current section). Additionally, the user is enabled to translate either to an adjacent section or in accordance with a magnitude of movement of a contact, depending on a characteristic intensity of a contact in the input.
- Many electronic devices have graphical user interfaces with features for scrolling through content, such as graphical user interfaces for reader applications and for other applications for displaying content.
- a user may need to scroll through content at different speeds at various times (e.g., in order to scroll through different amounts of content).
- the distance of the movement of a contact is closely correlated with the movement of the contact before and after liftoff of the contact.
- methods are disclosed that provide scrolling movement that changes in accordance with features of a contact in the input, including a characteristic intensity of the contact.
- Many electronic devices have graphical user interfaces with features for scrolling through content, such as graphical user interfaces for reader applications and for other applications for displaying content.
- a user may need to scroll to a predefined portion of content.
- Some methods for accessing a portion of content require a user to continually scroll until the portion of the content is reached.
- methods are disclosed that provide movement-based scrolling and scrolling to a predefined portion of content in accordance with a characteristic intensity of a contact in an input.
- FIGS. 1A-1B, 2, and 3 provide a description of exemplary devices.
- FIGS. 4A-4B and 5A-5TT illustrate exemplary user interfaces for content navigation and manipulation.
- FIGS. 6A-6B illustrate a flow diagram of a method of navigating within and between content items.
- FIGS. 7A-7C illustrate a flow diagram of a method of reordering list items.
- FIGS. 8A-8C illustrate a flow diagram of a method of navigating structured content.
- FIGS. 9A-9D illustrate a flow diagram of a method of variable movement of content.
- FIGS. 10A-10C illustrate a flow diagram of a method of scrolling to a predefined portion of content.
- the user interfaces in FIGS. 5A-5TT are used to illustrate the processes in FIGS. 6A-6B, 7A-7C, 8A-8C, 9A-9D, and 10A-10C .
- first, second, etc. are, in some instances, used herein to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another.
- a first contact could be termed a second contact, and, similarly, a second contact could be termed a first contact, without departing from the scope of the various described embodiments.
- the first contact and the second contact are both contacts, but they are not the same contact, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.
- the term “if” is, optionally, construed to mean “when” or “upon” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting,” depending on the context.
- the phrase “if it is determined” or “if [a stated condition or event] is detected” is, optionally, construed to mean “upon determining” or “in response to determining” or “upon detecting [the stated condition or event]” or “in response to detecting [the stated condition or event],” depending on the context.
- the device is a portable communications device, such as a mobile telephone, that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions.
- portable multifunction devices include, without limitation, the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.
- Other portable electronic devices such as laptops or tablet computers with touch-sensitive surfaces (e.g., touch-screen displays and/or touchpads), are, optionally, used.
- the device is not a portable communications device, but is a desktop computer with a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-screen display and/or a touchpad).
- an electronic device that includes a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. It should be understood, however, that the electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse and/or a joystick.
- the device typically supports a variety of applications, such as one or more of the following: a note taking application, a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a website creation application, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephone application, a video conferencing application, an e-mail application, an instant messaging application, a workout support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video camera application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application, and/or a digital video player application.
- applications such as one or more of the following: a note taking application, a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a website creation application, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephone application, a video conferencing application, an e-mail application, an instant messaging application, a workout support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video camera application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application
- the various applications that are executed on the device optionally use at least one common physical user-interface device, such as the touch-sensitive surface.
- One or more functions of the touch-sensitive surface as well as corresponding information displayed on the device are, optionally, adjusted and/or varied from one application to the next and/or within a respective application.
- a common physical architecture (such as the touch-sensitive surface) of the device optionally supports the variety of applications with user interfaces that are intuitive and transparent to the user.
- FIG. 1A is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device 100 with touch-sensitive display system 112 in accordance with some embodiments.
- Touch-sensitive display system 112 is sometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience, and is sometimes simply called a touch-sensitive display.
- Device 100 includes memory 102 (which optionally includes one or more computer readable storage mediums), memory controller 122 , one or more processing units (CPUs) 120 , peripherals interface 118 , RF circuitry 108 , audio circuitry 110 , speaker 111 , microphone 113 , input/output (I/O) subsystem 106 , other input or control devices 116 , and external port 124 .
- memory 102 which optionally includes one or more computer readable storage mediums
- memory controller 122 includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 120 , peripherals interface 118 , RF circuitry 108 , audio circuitry 110 , speaker 111 , microphone 113 , input/output (I/O) subsystem 106 , other
- Device 100 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 164 .
- Device 100 optionally includes one or more intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensity of contacts on device 100 (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100 ).
- Device 100 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs on device 100 (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100 or touchpad 355 of device 300 ). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines 103 .
- the term “tactile output” refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user's sense of touch.
- a component e.g., a touch-sensitive surface
- another component e.g., housing
- the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or the component of the device.
- a touch-sensitive surface e.g., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad
- the user is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a “down click” or “up click” of a physical actuator button.
- a user will feel a tactile sensation such as an “down click” or “up click” even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user's movements.
- movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as “roughness” of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users.
- a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an “up click,” a “down click,” “roughness”)
- the generated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that will generate the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user.
- device 100 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device 100 optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components.
- the various components shown in FIG. 1A are implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or a combination thereof, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits.
- Memory 102 optionally includes high-speed random access memory and optionally also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Access to memory 102 by other components of device 100 , such as CPU(s) 120 and the peripherals interface 118 , is, optionally, controlled by memory controller 122 .
- Peripherals interface 118 can be used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU(s) 120 and memory 102 .
- the one or more processors 120 run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored in memory 102 to perform various functions for device 100 and to process data.
- peripherals interface 118 , CPU(s) 120 , and memory controller 122 are, optionally, implemented on a single chip, such as chip 104 . In some other embodiments, they are, optionally, implemented on separate chips.
- RF (radio frequency) circuitry 108 receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals.
- RF circuitry 108 converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals.
- RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth.
- an antenna system an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth.
- SIM subscriber identity module
- RF circuitry 108 optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication.
- networks such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication.
- networks such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication.
- WLAN wireless local area network
- MAN metropolitan area network
- the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSDPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), long term evolution (LTE), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11ac, IEEE 802.11ax, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and/or IEEE 802.11n), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, a protocol for e-mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g.
- Audio circuitry 110 , speaker 111 , and microphone 113 provide an audio interface between a user and device 100 .
- Audio circuitry 110 receives audio data from peripherals interface 118 , converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker 111 .
- Speaker 111 converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves.
- Audio circuitry 110 also receives electrical signals converted by microphone 113 from sound waves.
- Audio circuitry 110 converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface 118 for processing. Audio data is, optionally, retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory 102 and/or RF circuitry 108 by peripherals interface 118 .
- audio circuitry 110 also includes a headset jack (e.g., 212 , FIG.
- the headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry 110 and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone).
- removable audio input/output peripherals such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone).
- I/O subsystem 106 couples input/output peripherals on device 100 , such as touch-sensitive display system 112 and other input or control devices 116 , with peripherals interface 118 .
- I/O subsystem 106 optionally includes display controller 156 , optical sensor controller 158 , intensity sensor controller 159 , haptic feedback controller 161 , and one or more input controllers 160 for other input or control devices.
- the one or more input controllers 160 receive/send electrical signals from/to other input or control devices 116 .
- the other input or control devices 116 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth.
- input controller(s) 160 are, optionally, coupled with any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, infrared port, USB port, stylus, and/or a pointer device such as a mouse.
- the one or more buttons optionally include an up/down button for volume control of speaker 111 and/or microphone 113 .
- the one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g., 206 , FIG. 2 ).
- Touch-sensitive display system 112 provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and a user.
- Display controller 156 receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch-sensitive display system 112 .
- Touch-sensitive display system 112 displays visual output to the user.
- the visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed “graphics”).
- graphics optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed “graphics”).
- some or all of the visual output corresponds to user interface objects.
- the term “affordance” refers to a user ⁇ interactive graphical user interface object (e.g., graphical user interface object that is configured to respond to inputs directed toward the graphical user interface object). Examples of user ⁇ interactive graphical user interface objects include, without limitation, a button, slider, icon, selectable menu item, switch, or other user interface control.
- Touch-sensitive display system 112 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact.
- Touch-sensitive display system 112 and display controller 156 (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory 102 ) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch-sensitive display system 112 and converts the detected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages or images) that are displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112 .
- user-interface objects e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages or images
- a point of contact between touch-sensitive display system 112 and the user corresponds to a finger of the user or a stylus.
- Touch-sensitive display system 112 optionally uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies are used in other embodiments.
- Touch-sensitive display system 112 and display controller 156 optionally detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch-sensitive display system 112 .
- projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.
- Touch-sensitive display system 112 optionally has a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen video resolution is in excess of 400 dpi (e.g., 500 dpi, 800 dpi, or greater).
- the user optionally makes contact with touch-sensitive display system 112 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth.
- the user interface is designed to work with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen.
- the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user.
- device 100 in addition to the touch screen, device 100 optionally includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating particular functions.
- the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output.
- the touchpad is, optionally, a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from touch-sensitive display system 112 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen.
- Power system 162 for powering the various components.
- Power system 162 optionally includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices.
- power sources e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)
- AC alternating current
- a recharging system e.g., a recharging system
- a power failure detection circuit e.g., a power failure detection circuit
- a power converter or inverter e.g., a power converter or inverter
- a power status indicator e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)
- FIG. 1A shows an optical sensor coupled with optical sensor controller 158 in I/O subsystem 106 .
- Optical sensor(s) 164 optionally include charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors.
- CMOS complementary metal-oxide semiconductor
- Optical sensor(s) 164 receive light from the environment, projected through one or more lens, and converts the light to data representing an image.
- imaging module 143 also called a camera module
- optical sensor(s) 164 optionally capture still images and/or video.
- an optical sensor is located on the back of device 100 , opposite touch-sensitive display system 112 on the front of the device, so that the touch screen is enabled for use as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition.
- another optical sensor is located on the front of the device so that the user's image is obtained (e.g., for selfies, for videoconferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen, etc.).
- FIG. 1A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled with intensity sensor controller 159 in I/O subsystem 106 .
- Contact intensity sensor(s) 165 optionally include one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface).
- Contact intensity sensor(s) 165 receive contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment.
- At least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 ). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device 100 , opposite touch-screen display system 112 which is located on the front of device 100 .
- Device 100 optionally also includes one or more proximity sensors 166 .
- FIG. 1A shows proximity sensor 166 coupled with peripherals interface 118 .
- proximity sensor 166 is coupled with input controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106 .
- the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch-sensitive display system 112 when the multifunction device is placed near the user's ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call).
- Device 100 optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators 167 .
- FIG. 1A shows a tactile output generator coupled with haptic feedback controller 161 in I/O subsystem 106 .
- Tactile output generator(s) 167 optionally include one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device).
- Tactile output generator(s) 167 receive tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback module 133 and generates tactile outputs on device 100 that are capable of being sensed by a user of device 100 .
- At least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 ) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of a surface of device 100 ) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device 100 ).
- at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device 100 , opposite touch-sensitive display system 112 , which is located on the front of device 100 .
- Device 100 optionally also includes one or more accelerometers 168 .
- FIG. 1A shows accelerometer 168 coupled with peripherals interface 118 .
- accelerometer 168 is, optionally, coupled with an input controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106 .
- information is displayed on the touch-screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers.
- Device 100 optionally includes, in addition to accelerometer(s) 168 , a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of device 100 .
- GPS or GLONASS or other global navigation system
- the software components stored in memory 102 include operating system 126 , communication module (or set of instructions) 128 , contact/motion module (or set of instructions) 130 , graphics module (or set of instructions) 132 , haptic feedback module (or set of instructions) 133 , text input module (or set of instructions) 134 , Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions) 135 , and applications (or sets of instructions) 136 .
- memory 102 stores device/global internal state 157 , as shown in FIGS. 1A and 3 .
- Device/global internal state 157 includes one or more of: active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other information occupy various regions of touch-sensitive display system 112 ; sensor state, including information obtained from the device's various sensors and other input or control devices 116 ; and location and/or positional information concerning the device's location and/or attitude.
- Operating system 126 e.g., iOS, Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks
- Operating system 126 includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components.
- Communication module 128 facilitates communication with other devices over one or more external ports 124 and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry 108 and/or external port 124 .
- External port 124 e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.
- USB Universal Serial Bus
- FIREWIRE FireWire
- the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with the 30-pin connector used in some iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.
- the external port is a Lightning connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with the Lightning connector used in some iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.
- Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects contact with touch-sensitive display system 112 (in conjunction with display controller 156 ) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel).
- Contact/motion module 130 includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact (e.g., by a finger or by a stylus), such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact).
- determining if contact has occurred e.g., detecting a finger-down event
- an intensity of the contact e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or
- Contact/motion module 130 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining movement of the point of contact, which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts or stylus contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., “multitouch”/multiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 and display controller 156 detect contact on a touchpad.
- Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects a gesture input by a user.
- Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities of detected contacts).
- a gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a particular contact pattern.
- detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon).
- detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event.
- tap, swipe, drag, and other gestures are optionally detected for a stylus by detecting a particular contact pattern for the stylus.
- Graphics module 132 includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch-sensitive display system 112 or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed.
- graphics includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including without limitation text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations and the like.
- graphics module 132 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module 132 receives, from applications etc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to display controller 156 .
- Haptic feedback module 133 includes various software components for generating instructions used by tactile output generator(s) 167 to produce tactile outputs at one or more locations on device 100 in response to user interactions with device 100 .
- Text input module 134 which is, optionally, a component of graphics module 132 , provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts 137 , e-mail 140 , IM 141 , browser 147 , and any other application that needs text input).
- applications e.g., contacts 137 , e-mail 140 , IM 141 , browser 147 , and any other application that needs text input.
- GPS module 135 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone 138 for use in location-based dialing, to camera 143 as picture/video metadata, and to applications that provide location-based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets).
- applications e.g., to telephone 138 for use in location-based dialing, to camera 143 as picture/video metadata, and to applications that provide location-based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets).
- Applications 136 optionally include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof:
- Examples of other applications 136 that are, optionally, stored in memory 102 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication.
- contacts module 137 includes executable instructions to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state 192 of contacts module 137 in memory 102 or memory 370 ), including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e-mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers and/or e-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications by telephone 138 , video conference 139 , e-mail 140 , or IM 141 ; and so forth.
- an address book or contact list e.g., stored in application internal state 192 of contacts module 137 in memory 102 or memory 370 , including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e-mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name;
- telephone module 138 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in address book 137 , modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed.
- the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols and technologies.
- videoconferencing module 139 includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions.
- e-mail client module 140 includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response to user instructions.
- e-mail client module 140 makes it very easy to create and send e-mails with still or video images taken with camera module 143 .
- the instant messaging module 141 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony-based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, Apple Push Notification Service (APNs) or IMPS for Internet-based instant messages), to receive instant messages and to view received instant messages.
- SMS Short Message Service
- MMS Multimedia Message Service
- APIs Apple Push Notification Service
- IMPS Internet Messaging Protocol
- transmitted and/or received instant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as are supported in a MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS).
- EMS Enhanced Messaging Service
- instant messaging refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, APNs, or IMPS).
- workout support module 142 includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals); communicate with workout sensors (in sports devices and smart watches); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store and transmit workout data.
- camera module 143 includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory 102 , modify characteristics of a still image or video, and/or delete a still image or video from memory 102 .
- image management module 144 includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images.
- modify e.g., edit
- present e.g., in a digital slide show or album
- browser module 147 includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages.
- calendar module 148 includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions.
- widget modules 149 are mini-applications that are, optionally, downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget 149 - 1 , stocks widget 149 - 2 , calculator widget 149 - 3 , alarm clock widget 149 - 4 , and dictionary widget 149 - 5 ) or created by the user (e.g., user-created widget 149 - 6 ).
- a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file.
- a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets).
- the widget creator module 150 includes executable instructions to create widgets (e.g., turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget).
- search module 151 includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory 102 that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions.
- search criteria e.g., one or more user-specified search terms
- video and music player module 152 includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touch-sensitive display system 112 , or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port 124 ).
- device 100 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.).
- notes module 153 includes executable instructions to create and manage notes, to do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions.
- map module 154 includes executable instructions to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions; data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location; and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions.
- maps e.g., driving directions; data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location; and other location-based data
- online video module 155 includes executable instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on the touch screen 112 , or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port 124 ), send an e-mail with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264.
- instant messaging module 141 rather than e-mail client module 140 , is used to send a link to a particular online video.
- modules and applications correspond to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein).
- modules i.e., sets of instructions
- memory 102 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above.
- memory 102 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.
- device 100 is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad.
- a touch screen and/or a touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device 100 , the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) on device 100 is, optionally, reduced.
- the predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces.
- the touchpad when touched by the user, navigates device 100 to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device 100 .
- a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad.
- the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad.
- FIG. 1B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments.
- memory 102 in FIG. 1A ) or 370 ( FIG. 3 ) includes event sorter 170 (e.g., in operating system 126 ) and a respective application 136 - 1 (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 136 , 137 - 155 , 380 - 390 ).
- event sorter 170 e.g., in operating system 126
- application 136 - 1 e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 136 , 137 - 155 , 380 - 390 .
- Event sorter 170 receives event information and determines the application 136 - 1 and application view 191 of application 136 - 1 to which to deliver the event information.
- Event sorter 170 includes event monitor 171 and event dispatcher module 174 .
- application 136 - 1 includes application internal state 192 , which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112 when the application is active or executing.
- device/global internal state 157 is used by event sorter 170 to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state 192 is used by event sorter 170 to determine application views 191 to which to deliver event information.
- application internal state 192 includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application 136 - 1 resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application 136 - 1 , a state queue for enabling the user to go back to a prior state or view of application 136 - 1 , and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user.
- Event monitor 171 receives event information from peripherals interface 118 .
- Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touch-sensitive display system 112 , as part of a multi-touch gesture).
- Peripherals interface 118 transmits information it receives from I/O subsystem 106 or a sensor, such as proximity sensor 166 , accelerometer(s) 168 , and/or microphone 113 (through audio circuitry 110 ).
- Information that peripherals interface 118 receives from I/O subsystem 106 includes information from touch-sensitive display system 112 or a touch-sensitive surface.
- event monitor 171 sends requests to the peripherals interface 118 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripheral interface 118 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration).
- event sorter 170 also includes a hit view determination module 172 and/or an active event recognizer determination module 173 .
- Hit view determination module 172 provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views, when touch-sensitive display system 112 displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display.
- the application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected optionally correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is, optionally, called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as proper inputs are, optionally, determined based, at least in part, on the hit view of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture.
- Hit view determination module 172 receives information related to sub-events of a touch-based gesture.
- hit view determination module 172 identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (i.e., the first sub-event in the sequence of sub-events that form an event or potential event).
- the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view.
- Active event recognizer determination module 173 determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touch sub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain as actively involved views.
- Event dispatcher module 174 dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer 180 ). In embodiments including active event recognizer determination module 173 , event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 173 . In some embodiments, event dispatcher module 174 stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver module 182 .
- operating system 126 includes event sorter 170 .
- application 136 - 1 includes event sorter 170 .
- event sorter 170 is a stand-alone module, or a part of another module stored in memory 102 , such as contact/motion module 130 .
- application 136 - 1 includes a plurality of event handlers 190 and one or more application views 191 , each of which includes instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of the application's user interface.
- Each application view 191 of the application 136 - 1 includes one or more event recognizers 180 .
- a respective application view 191 includes a plurality of event recognizers 180 .
- one or more of event recognizers 180 are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit (not shown) or a higher level object from which application 136 - 1 inherits methods and other properties.
- a respective event handler 190 includes one or more of: data updater 176 , object updater 177 , GUI updater 178 , and/or event data 179 received from event sorter 170 .
- Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176 , object updater 177 or GUI updater 178 to update the application internal state 192 .
- one or more of the application views 191 includes one or more respective event handlers 190 .
- one or more of data updater 176 , object updater 177 , and GUI updater 178 are included in a respective application view 191 .
- a respective event recognizer 180 receives event information (e.g., event data 179 ) from event sorter 170 , and identifies an event from the event information.
- Event recognizer 180 includes event receiver 182 and event comparator 184 .
- event recognizer 180 also includes at least a subset of: metadata 183 , and event delivery instructions 188 (which optionally include sub-event delivery instructions).
- Event receiver 182 receives event information from event sorter 170 .
- the event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a touch, the event information optionally also includes speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device.
- Event comparator 184 compares the event information to predefined event or sub-event definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub-event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event.
- event comparator 184 includes event definitions 186 .
- Event definitions 186 contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event 1 ( 187 - 1 ), event 2 ( 187 - 2 ), and others.
- sub-events in an event 187 include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching.
- the definition for event 1 ( 187 - 1 ) is a double tap on a displayed object.
- the double tap for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined phase.
- the definition for event 2 ( 187 - 2 ) is a dragging on a displayed object.
- the dragging for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch-sensitive display system 112 , and lift-off of the touch (touch end).
- the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers 190 .
- event definition 187 includes a definition of an event for a respective user-interface object.
- event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view in which three user-interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112 , when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display system 112 , event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which of the three user-interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler 190 , the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler 190 should be activated. For example, event comparator 184 selects an event handler associated with the sub-event and the object triggering the hit test.
- the definition for a respective event 187 also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer's event type.
- a respective event recognizer 180 determines that the series of sub-events do not match any of the events in event definitions 186 , the respective event recognizer 180 enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub-events of an ongoing touch-based gesture.
- a respective event recognizer 180 includes metadata 183 with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers.
- metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another.
- metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy.
- a respective event recognizer 180 activates event handler 190 associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized.
- a respective event recognizer 180 delivers event information associated with the event to event handler 190 .
- Activating an event handler 190 is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view.
- event recognizer 180 throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler 190 associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process.
- event delivery instructions 188 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process.
- data updater 176 creates and updates data used in application 136 - 1 .
- data updater 176 updates the telephone number used in contacts module 137 , or stores a video file used in video player module 145 .
- object updater 177 creates and updates objects used in application 136 - 1 .
- object updater 177 creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object.
- GUI updater 178 updates the GUI.
- GUI updater 178 prepares display information and sends it to graphics module 132 for display on a touch-sensitive display.
- event handler(s) 190 includes or has access to data updater 176 , object updater 177 , and GUI updater 178 .
- data updater 176 , object updater 177 , and GUI updater 178 are included in a single module of a respective application 136 - 1 or application view 191 . In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules.
- event handling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies to other forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices 100 with input-devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens.
- mouse movement and mouse button presses optionally coordinated with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements such as taps, drags, scrolls, etc., on touch-pads; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye movements; biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof are optionally utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to be recognized.
- FIG. 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device 100 having a touch screen (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 , FIG. 1A ) in accordance with some embodiments.
- the touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI) 200 .
- UI user interface
- a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers 202 (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses 203 (not drawn to scale in the figure).
- selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics.
- the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward and/or downward) and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward and/or downward) that has made contact with device 100 .
- inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic.
- a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap.
- Device 100 optionally also includes one or more physical buttons, such as “home” or menu button 204 .
- menu button 204 is, optionally, used to navigate to any application 136 in a set of applications that are, optionally executed on device 100 .
- the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on the touch-screen display.
- device 100 includes the touch-screen display, menu button 204 , push button 206 for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s) 208 , Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card slot 210 , head set jack 212 , and docking/charging external port 124 .
- Push button 206 is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process.
- device 100 also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone 113 .
- Device 100 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive display system 112 and/or one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 100 .
- FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments.
- Device 300 need not be portable.
- device 300 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child's learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller).
- Device 300 typically includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 310 , one or more network or other communications interfaces 360 , memory 370 , and one or more communication buses 320 for interconnecting these components.
- Communication buses 320 optionally include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components.
- Device 300 includes input/output (I/O) interface 330 comprising display 340 , which is typically a touch-screen display.
- I/O interface 330 also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 350 and touchpad 355 , tactile output generator 357 for generating tactile outputs on device 300 (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s) 167 described above with reference to FIG. 1A ), sensors 359 (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s) 165 described above with reference to FIG. 1A ).
- I/O interface 330 also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 350 and touchpad 355 , tactile output generator 357 for generating tactile outputs on device 300 (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s) 167 described above with reference to FIG. 1A ), sensors 359 (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar
- Memory 370 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM or other random access solid state memory devices; and optionally includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory 370 optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from CPU(s) 310 . In some embodiments, memory 370 stores programs, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs, modules, and data structures stored in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 ( FIG. 1A ), or a subset thereof. Furthermore, memory 370 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 .
- memory 370 of device 300 optionally stores drawing module 380 , presentation module 382 , word processing module 384 , web site creation module 386 , disk authoring module 388 , and/or spreadsheet module 390 , while memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 ( FIG. 1A ) optionally does not store these modules.
- Each of the above identified elements in FIG. 3 are, optionally, stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices.
- Each of the above identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above.
- the above identified modules or programs i.e., sets of instructions
- memory 370 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above.
- memory 370 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.
- UI user interfaces
- FIG. 4A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device 100 in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are, optionally, implemented on device 300 .
- user interface 400 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:
- icon labels illustrated in FIG. 4A are merely exemplary.
- icon 422 for video and music player module 152 is labeled “Music” or “Music Player.”
- Other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons.
- a label for a respective application icon includes a name of an application corresponding to the respective application icon.
- a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon.
- FIG. 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device 300 , FIG. 3 ) with a touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., a tablet or touchpad 355 , FIG. 3 ) that is separate from the display 450 .
- Device 300 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors 357 ) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 451 and/or one or more tactile output generators 359 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 300 .
- contact intensity sensors e.g., one or more of sensors 357
- tactile output generators 359 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 300 .
- FIG. 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device 300 , FIG. 3 ) with a touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., a tablet or touchpad 355 , FIG. 3 ) that is separate from the display 450 .
- a touch-sensitive surface 451 e.g., a tablet or touchpad 355 , FIG. 3
- the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in FIG. 4B .
- the touch-sensitive surface e.g., 451 in FIG. 4B
- has a primary axis e.g., 452 in FIG.
- the device detects contacts (e.g., 460 and 462 in FIG. 4B ) with the touch-sensitive surface 451 at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display (e.g., in FIG. 4B, 460 corresponds to 468 and 462 corresponds to 470 ).
- contacts e.g., 460 and 462 in FIG. 4B
- the touch-sensitive surface 451 at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display (e.g., in FIG. 4B, 460 corresponds to 468 and 462 corresponds to 470 ).
- user inputs e.g., contacts 460 and 462 , and movements thereof
- finger inputs e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures, etc.
- one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse based input or a stylus input).
- a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact).
- a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact).
- a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact).
- multiple user inputs it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously.
- the term “focus selector” refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting.
- the cursor acts as a “focus selector,” so that when an input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad 355 in FIG. 3 or touch-sensitive surface 451 in FIG. 4B ) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input.
- a touch-screen display e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 in FIG.
- a detected contact on the touch-screen acts as a “focus selector,” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch-screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input.
- an input e.g., a press input by the contact
- a particular user interface element e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element
- focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch-screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); in these implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions of the user interface.
- the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch-screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user's intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interface with which the user is intending to interact).
- a focus selector e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box
- a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of the device).
- the term “intensity” of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact or a stylus contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
- the intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors.
- one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface.
- force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average or a sum) to determine an estimated force of a contact.
- a pressure-sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface.
- the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
- the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements).
- the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure).
- the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure.
- contact/motion module 130 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has “clicked” on an icon).
- at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device 100 ).
- a mouse “click” threshold of a trackpad or touch-screen display can be set to any of a large range of predefined thresholds values without changing the trackpad or touch-screen display hardware.
- a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click “intensity” parameter).
- the term “characteristic intensity” of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact).
- a predefined time period e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds
- a characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally based on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent maximum of the intensities of the contact, or the like.
- the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time).
- the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user.
- the set of one or more intensity thresholds may include a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold.
- a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation
- a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results in a second operation
- a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second intensity threshold results in a third operation.
- a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more intensity thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective option or forgo performing the respective operation) rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation.
- a portion of a gesture is identified for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity.
- a touch-sensitive surface may receive a continuous swipe contact transitioning from a start location and reaching an end location (e.g., a drag gesture), at which point the intensity of the contact increases.
- the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end location may be based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact, and not the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location).
- a smoothing algorithm may be applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact.
- the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of: an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm.
- these smoothing algorithms eliminate narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity.
- the user interface figures described herein optionally include various intensity diagrams that show the current intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface relative to one or more intensity thresholds (e.g., a contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 , a light press intensity threshold IT L , a deep press intensity threshold IT D (e.g., that is at least initially higher than I L ), and/or one or more other intensity thresholds (e.g., an intensity threshold I H that is lower than I L )).
- intensity thresholds e.g., a contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 , a light press intensity threshold IT L , a deep press intensity threshold IT D (e.g., that is at least initially higher than I L ), and/or one or more other intensity thresholds (e.g., an intensity threshold I H that is lower than I L )).
- This intensity diagram is typically not part of the displayed user interface, but is provided to aid in the interpretation of the figures.
- the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations typically associated
- the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations that are different from operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad.
- the device when a contact is detected with a characteristic intensity below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0 below which the contact is no longer detected), the device will move a focus selector in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an operation associated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep press intensity threshold.
- these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interface figures.
- the response of the device to inputs detected by the device depends on criteria based on the contact intensity during the input. For example, for some “light press” inputs, the intensity of a contact exceeding a first intensity threshold during the input triggers a first response. In some embodiments, the response of the device to inputs detected by the device depends on criteria that include both the contact intensity during the input and time-based criteria. For example, for some “deep press” inputs, the intensity of a contact exceeding a second intensity threshold during the input, greater than the first intensity threshold for a light press, triggers a second response only if a delay time has elapsed between meeting the first intensity threshold and meeting the second intensity threshold.
- This delay time is typically less than 200 ms in duration (e.g., 40, 100, or 120 ms, depending on the magnitude of the second intensity threshold, with the delay time increasing as the second intensity threshold increases). This delay time helps to avoid accidental deep press inputs. As another example, for some “deep press” inputs, there is a reduced-sensitivity time period that occurs after the time at which the first intensity threshold is met. During the reduced-sensitivity time period, the second intensity threshold is increased. This temporary increase in the second intensity threshold also helps to avoid accidental deep press inputs. For other deep press inputs, the response to detection of a deep press input does not depend on time-based criteria.
- one or more of the input intensity thresholds and/or the corresponding outputs vary based on one or more factors, such as user settings, contact motion, input timing, application running, rate at which the intensity is applied, number of concurrent inputs, user history, environmental factors (e.g., ambient noise), focus selector position, and the like. Exemplary factors are described in U.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 14/399,606 and 14/624,296, which are incorporated by reference herein in their entireties.
- FIG. 4C illustrates a dynamic intensity threshold 480 that changes over time based in part on the intensity of touch input 476 over time.
- Dynamic intensity threshold 480 is a sum of two components, first component 474 that decays over time after a predefined delay time p 1 from when touch input 476 is initially detected, and second component 478 that trails the intensity of touch input 476 over time.
- the initial high intensity threshold of first component 474 reduces accidental triggering of a “deep press” response, while still allowing an immediate “deep press” response if touch input 476 provides sufficient intensity.
- Second component 478 reduces unintentional triggering of a “deep press” response by gradual intensity fluctuations of in a touch input.
- touch input 476 satisfies dynamic intensity threshold 480 (e.g., at point 481 in FIG. 4C )
- the “deep press” response is triggered.
- FIG. 4D illustrates another dynamic intensity threshold 486 (e.g., intensity threshold I D ).
- FIG. 4D also illustrates two other intensity thresholds: a first intensity threshold I H and a second intensity threshold I L .
- touch input 484 satisfies the first intensity threshold I H and the second intensity threshold I L prior to time p 2
- no response is provided until delay time p 2 has elapsed at time 482 .
- dynamic intensity threshold 486 decays over time, with the decay starting at time 488 after a predefined delay time p 1 has elapsed from time 482 (when the response associated with the second intensity threshold I L was triggered).
- This type of dynamic intensity threshold reduces accidental triggering of a response associated with the dynamic intensity threshold I D immediately after, or concurrently with, triggering a response associated with a lower intensity threshold, such as the first intensity threshold I H or the second intensity threshold I L .
- FIG. 4E illustrate yet another dynamic intensity threshold 492 (e.g., intensity threshold I D ).
- intensity threshold I L e.g., intensity threshold I L
- dynamic intensity threshold 492 decays after the predefined delay time p 1 has elapsed from when touch input 490 is initially detected.
- a decrease in intensity of touch input 490 after triggering the response associated with the intensity threshold I L , followed by an increase in the intensity of touch input 490 , without releasing touch input 490 can trigger a response associated with the intensity threshold I D (e.g., at time 494 ) even when the intensity of touch input 490 is below another intensity threshold, for example, the intensity threshold I L .
- An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold IT L to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold IT L and the deep press intensity threshold IT D is sometimes referred to as a “light press” input.
- An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold IT D to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold IT D is sometimes referred to as a “deep press” input.
- An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0 to an intensity between the contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0 and the light press intensity threshold IT L is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on the touch-surface.
- a decrease of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity above the contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0 to an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0 is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-surface.
- IT 0 is zero. In some embodiments, IT 0 is greater than zero.
- a shaded circle or oval is used to represent intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some illustrations, a circle or oval without shading is used represent a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface without specifying the intensity of the respective contact.
- one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respective press input or in response to detecting the respective press input performed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), where the respective press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press-input intensity threshold.
- the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on a “down stroke” of the respective press input).
- the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the press-input threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on an “up stroke” of the respective press input).
- the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs sometimes termed “jitter,” where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationship to the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold).
- the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold.
- the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on an “up stroke” of the respective press input).
- the press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the press-input intensity threshold and, optionally, a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., the increase in intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity of the contact, depending on the circumstances).
- the description of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press-input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are, optionally, triggered in response to detecting: an increase in intensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase in intensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-input intensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, or a decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press-input intensity threshold.
- the operation is, optionally, performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to, and lower than, the press-input intensity threshold.
- the triggering of these responses also depends on time-based criteria being met (e.g., a delay time has elapsed between a first intensity threshold being met and a second intensity threshold being met).
- UI user interfaces
- portable multifunction device 100 or device 300 with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface.
- FIGS. 5A-5TT illustrate exemplary user interfaces for content navigation and manipulation in accordance with some embodiments.
- the user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIGS. 6A-6B, 7A-7C, 8A-8C, 9A-9D, and 10A-10C .
- FIGS. 6A-6B, 7A-7C, 8A-8C, 9A-9D, and 10A-10C For convenience of explanation, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system 112 .
- the focus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with a respective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system 112 .
- analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with a display 450 and a separate touch-sensitive surface 451 in response to detecting the contacts on the touch-sensitive surface 451 while displaying the user interfaces shown in the figures on the display 450 , along with a focus selector.
- FIGS. 5A-5TT illustrate exemplary user interfaces for manipulating content items depending on the intensity (e.g., pressure) applied by a contact during a user gesture in accordance with some embodiments.
- the user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes described below with reference to FIGS. 6A-6B .
- FIGS. 5A-5K illustrate exemplary user interfaces that perform certain actions based on intensity characteristics of a user input (e.g., contact) in accordance with some embodiments.
- FIGS. 5A-5C illustrate an exemplary user interface of a device 100 that performs certain actions (e.g., scrolls through a content item) when a contact intensity of a user input does not exceed a predetermined threshold, in accordance with some embodiments.
- FIGS. 5D-5H illustrate an exemplary user interface that performs alternate actions (e.g., replaces a content item with another content item) when the contact intensity exceeds a predetermined threshold, in accordance with some embodiments.
- FIG. 5K illustrates an exemplary user interface that displays a preview of a selectable affordance when certain criteria of the user input are met.
- FIG. 5A illustrates a user interface of device 100 before device 100 performs certain actions (e.g., scrolls through a content item) based on characteristics of the user input.
- the device 100 displays a content item (e.g., content item 502 ) on a display.
- content item 502 is an email message in an email application including an email content section 502 a , an email title section 502 b , and an email header section 502 c . While the examples shown in FIGS. 5A-5K illustrate content item 502 as an email message, in some embodiments, content item 502 may be other content items, including web pages, books, images, text, among other types.
- content item 502 is associated with a sequence of content items, such as plurality of electronic messages in an electronic messaging application, a plurality of web browser windows (or tabbed windows) in a web browser, a plurality of applications, a plurality of digital images in a set of images (e.g., a single album or collection in a photo or camera application), or a plurality of sets of digital images (e.g., a plurality of albums or collections of photos in a photo or camera application).
- a sequence of content items such as plurality of electronic messages in an electronic messaging application, a plurality of web browser windows (or tabbed windows) in a web browser, a plurality of applications, a plurality of digital images in a set of images (e.g., a single album or collection in a photo or camera application), or a plurality of sets of digital images (e.g., a plurality of albums or collections of photos in a photo or camera application).
- the sequence of content items corresponds to a plurality of content sections, such as a plurality of conversations in a messaging or email application, a plurality of weeks (or months or years) in a calendar application, a plurality of chapters in a book, a plurality of scenes in a video, or a plurality of events in a digital image library.
- a plurality of content sections such as a plurality of conversations in a messaging or email application, a plurality of weeks (or months or years) in a calendar application, a plurality of chapters in a book, a plurality of scenes in a video, or a plurality of events in a digital image library.
- the device 100 In addition to the email message, the device 100 also displays other components of the email application, including an email tool bar 503 .
- the email tool bar 503 includes selectable affordances (e.g., a left-arrow 504 , an up-arrow 506 , and a down-arrow 508 ).
- a section label e.g., “inbox” is associated with the left-arrow.
- a selectable affordance e.g., the left arrow 504
- the device 100 displays a plurality of content items (e.g., email messages 502 , 518 , 520 a , 520 b , and 520 c , associated with a user's inbox) on the display (e.g., touch screen 112 ), as shown in FIG. 5J .
- the email application displays a content item preceding the currently-displayed content item 502 (e.g., a preceding email message in the user's inbox).
- the device 100 displays a content item following the currently-displayed content item 502 (e.g., a successive email message in the user's inbox).
- FIG. 5B illustrates a user interface, subsequent to FIG. 5A , after the device 100 detects a user input 510 (e.g., a contact) on the content item 502 and before the device 100 performs certain actions (e.g., scrolls through a content item) based on characteristics of the user input, in accordance with some embodiments.
- the device 100 detects movement (e.g., press, flick, swipe) and/or intensity (e.g., contact, light, deep) of user input 510 .
- movement e.g., press, flick, swipe
- intensity e.g., contact, light, deep
- user inputs are represented as a circle on device 100 , where the density of the dots speckled within the circle represents the intensity exerted by the user.
- FIG. 5B illustrates a user interface, subsequent to FIG. 5A , after the device 100 detects a user input 510 (e.g., a contact) on the content item 502 and before the device 100 performs certain actions
- FIGS. 5B-5K include an intensity diagram 501 indicating the intensity of a user input determined by the device 100 .
- the intensity diagram 501 includes a plurality of exemplary thresholds (e.g., contact detection threshold IT 0 , “hint” threshold IT H , light press threshold IT L , and deep press threshold IT D ).
- the intensity diagram includes shading that rises to a level between these two thresholds.
- the amount of shading in the intensity diagram indicates the intensity exerted by a user at a user input.
- user input movement e.g., movement of the contact of the user input on the touch-sensitive surface
- the direction of the vector represents the direction of the user input movement
- the magnitude of the vector represents the amount of movement of the user input (e.g., user input 510 , FIG. 5B ).
- the device 100 is configured to navigate a content item or replace a content item with another content item based on the received user input. In response to detecting a user input, the device 100 determines whether the user input meets item-switching criteria.
- the item-switching criteria includes a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of a contact in the user input is above a first intensity threshold (e.g., “hint” threshold IT H , light press threshold IT L , or deep press threshold IT D ). In some embodiments, if the characteristic intensity of the user input is below the first intensity threshold, the device 100 navigates or scrolls through the content of the content item 502 in accordance with the movement of the user input.
- the characteristic intensity of the user input 510 is below a first intensity threshold associated with item-switching criteria (e.g., light press threshold IT L ).
- the device 100 detects movement 512 of the user input in a respective direction on touch screen 112 and navigates or scrolls through the content of the content item 502 in accordance with the movement of the user input 510 .
- the user input 510 is a swipe/drag gesture that is made with a contact.
- the swipe/drag gesture includes movement of the contact from a first position (e.g., position 510 - 1 ) on the touch-sensitive surface to a second position (e.g., position 510 - 2 ) on the touch-sensitive surface.
- the swipe/drag gesture is a vertical swipe gesture (as shown in FIG. 5B ).
- the swipe gesture is a horizontal swipe gesture.
- the device 100 when the device 100 detects the user input 510 and the characteristic intensity of the user input 510 is below the first intensity threshold (e.g., light press threshold IT L ), the device 100 displays a scroll bar 514 indicating the location of the portion of content displayed to the user relative to the entire content item 502 . As the device 100 navigates through the content of the content item 502 and displays different content portions of the content item, the device 100 moves the scroll bar 514 to different positions relative to the content portion of the content item displayed to the user.
- the first intensity threshold e.g., light press threshold IT L
- FIG. 5C illustrates a user interface, subsequent to FIG. 5B , of a device 100 after the device 100 performs certain actions (e.g., scrolls through a content item) based on characteristics of the user input, in accordance with some embodiments.
- the user input 510 moved to second position 510 - 2 from first position 510 - 1 .
- the device 100 navigates through the content of the content item 502 and displays a second content portion of the content item 502 , where the second content portion is different from the first content portion.
- the device 100 moves the scroll bar 514 to a second position that is different from the position of the scroll bar 514 in FIG. 5B .
- the device 100 scrolls the content in a direction on the display in an opposite direction relative to the movement of the user input 510 . In some embodiments, the device 100 scrolls the content in a direction on the display in a same direction relative to the movement of the user input 510 . In some embodiments, navigating through the content of the first content item includes directly manipulating the displayed content of the first content item in accordance with the movement of the contact. For example, the movement (e.g., speed, direction, and/or distance) of the content, when scrolled, tracks the movement of the contact.
- the device 100 maintains display of a first portion of the first content item in a first user interface region on the display; and navigates (e.g., scrolls) through a second portion of the first content item in a second user interface region on the display.
- a portion of the content item e.g., email tool bar 503
- the content e.g., the body 502 a of content item 502 and the email title section 502 b of content item 502 ).
- FIG. 5D-5I illustrate certain actions (e.g., replacing content item 502 with another content item), performed by the device 100 when the user input meets item-switching criteria, in accordance with some embodiments.
- a first intensity threshold e.g., “hint” threshold IT H , light press threshold IT L , or deep press threshold IT D
- the device 100 replaces display of the content item 502 with display of a second content item 518 (e.g., a different content item distinct from the content item 502 ).
- the device 100 replaces display of the content item 502 with display of second content item 518 in accordance with other criteria being met as well.
- the device initiates replacing display of the first content item with a second content item when a user input is detected with an increase in contact intensity in conjunction with at least a minimum amount of movement of the contact.
- FIG. 5D is analogous to FIG. 5A .
- FIGS. 5E-5I illustrate operations performed by device 100 in response to detecting a user input 513 .
- FIG. 5E shows user input 513 , which is analogous to user input 510 ( FIGS. 5B-5C ) except that user input 513 has an intensity that exceeds a “hint” threshold IT H .
- the device 100 reduces (e.g., decreases) the size of content item 502 (e.g., zooms-out on content item 502 in a z-direction).
- the zooming out of content item 502 provides a hint to the user that user input 513 will result in different functionality by virtue of being a deeper press (e.g., as compared to user input 510 , FIGS. 5B-5C ).
- the size reduction of content item 502 is directly controllable by the user, e.g., via the intensity of the user input 513 . So, for example, as the user increases the contact intensity of a user input 513 toward the light press intensity threshold IT L (as shown in intensity diagram 501 ), the content item 502 zooms-out (e.g., reduces in size). If the user subsequently slightly reduces the intensity of the contact of the user input 513 , the content item 502 zooms back in.
- a plurality of intensity levels within the vicinity of the light press intensity threshold IT L map to a plurality of corresponding zoom levels (e.g., sizes) of content item 502 .
- the user feels as though she is pushing the first content item back in the z-direction by pushing harder on the contact.
- a region 516 beyond an edge of the content item 502 is displayed (e.g., a background area that is a different color or pattern than a color or pattern of the background of the content item 502 ), illustrating to the user that the content item 502 has been pushed back in the z-direction.
- the device 100 transitions to replacing display of the first content item with a second content item in response to a user input (e.g., replacing content item 502 with another content item) when the characteristic intensity exceeds the light press intensity threshold IT L (e.g., an intensity threshold that is greater than the “hint” threshold IT H ).
- the user can zoom-in to or zoom-out from the content item 502 if the characteristic intensity exceeds the “hint” threshold IT H and does not exceed the light press threshold IT L .
- the device 100 does not transition to another content item until the characteristic intensity exceeds the light press threshold IT L .
- FIG. 5F illustrates a user interface, subsequent to FIG. 5E .
- device 100 is replacing content item 502 with second content item 518 , in accordance with some embodiments (e.g., device 100 is displaying a transition between content item 502 and second content item 518 ).
- device 100 determines whether to replace content item 502 with second content item 518 based at least in part on the intensity of the user input 513 .
- FIG. 5F illustrates movement of the user input 513 (e.g., represented by vector 515 ).
- movement of the user input 513 begins at a first position (e.g., position 513 - 1 ) on the touch-sensitive surface and ends at a second position (e.g., position 513 - 2 ) on the touch-sensitive surface.
- a first position e.g., position 513 - 1
- a second position e.g., position 513 - 2
- the device 100 transitions from the content item 502 to the second content item 518 when certain item-switching criteria are met. In some embodiments, the device 100 transitions from the content item 502 to second content item 518 when the intensity of the user input 513 exceeds a predetermined threshold (e.g., a light press threshold IT L ). In some embodiments, the device 100 transitions from the content item 502 to second content item 518 when the movement of user input 513 also exceeds a predetermined movement threshold (e.g., when the device detects a predetermined amount or distance of movement of the contact that exceeds a predetermined movement threshold).
- a predetermined threshold e.g., a light press threshold IT L
- the device 100 transitions from the content item 502 to second content item 518 when the movement of user input 513 also exceeds a predetermined movement threshold (e.g., when the device detects a predetermined amount or distance of movement of the contact that exceeds a predetermined movement threshold).
- FIG. 5G illustrates the user interface subsequent to FIG. 5F .
- device 100 has progressed further in replacing content item 502 with second content item 518 (as compared to FIG. 5F ).
- the user input 513 moved to second position 513 - 2 from first position 513 - 1 .
- the device 100 replaces display of the content item 502 with the display of the second content item 518 .
- device 100 either replaces display of the content item 502 or scrolls through content item 502 based on other characteristics (e.g., timing of intensity or movement) of a user input. For example, in some embodiments, if an initial intensity of the contact does not exceed an intensity threshold (e.g., “hint” threshold IT H in FIGS. 5B-5C ), device 100 scrolls the content item 502 in response to the beginning of the user input (e.g., an initial portion of a swipe gesture). If later, during the user input, the contact of the user input exceeds the intensity threshold, device 100 transitions to displaying a second content item (as in FIGS. 5E-5H ).
- an intensity threshold e.g., “hint” threshold IT H in FIGS. 5B-5C
- the item-switching criteria are met when the initial intensity of the contact exceeds the first intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the item-switching criteria are met when the initial intensity of the contact exceeds the first intensity threshold while the contact is moving (e.g., moving above a predetermined velocity threshold). In some embodiments, the item-switching criteria are not met if the contact is stationary or is moving below a predetermined velocity threshold, even if the characteristic intensity of the contact exceeds the first intensity threshold.
- the device 100 automatically completes replacing content item 502 with second content item 518 when the user has dragged the second content item 518 sufficiently onto touch screen 112 .
- the user input 513 has moved the midpoint 520 between content item 502 and second content item 518 past a predetermined positional threshold 517 (e.g., half-way, or a third of the way up touch screen 112 ).
- a predetermined positional threshold 517 e.g., half-way, or a third of the way up touch screen 112 .
- the user terminates user input 513 (e.g., lifts off of touch screen 112 ), but the device 100 continues to animate a transition to the second content item 518 ( FIGS. 5H-5I ).
- the predetermined positional threshold may be positioned at alternative locations on touch screen 112 .
- replacing display of the content item 502 with the second content item 518 includes displaying a transition between the content item 502 and the second content item 518 (e.g., in which content item 502 zooms-out, slides upward off of touch screen 112 while second content 518 slides upward onto touch screen 112 , and second content item 518 zooms-in to complete the animated transition).
- the transition includes concurrently displaying at least a portion of the content item 502 and at least a portion of the second content item 518 (as shown in FIGS. 5E-5G , for example).
- the transition is dynamically controlled by the user input 513 (e.g., the user can directly manipulate the progress of the transition via user input 513 ).
- FIG. 5I also illustrates user input 511 corresponding to selection of affordance 504 .
- FIG. 5J illustrates the result of user input 511 , namely that the device 100 navigates back to a user interface showing a list view of the user's emails (including content item 502 , content item 518 , and additional emails 520 a through 520 c ).
- FIG. 5J illustrates that, in some embodiments, the second content item 518 is sequentially adjacent to the content item 502 (e.g. in the sequence of content items, as shown in FIG. 5J ) and is selected based on the respective direction of the movement of the user input 513 . That is, in some embodiments, a deep swipe transitions to the next email or previous email depending on the swipe direction, while a normal swipe (e.g., a swipe with a characteristic intensity below a predefined threshold) scrolls the currently displayed email.
- a normal swipe e.g., a swipe with a characteristic intensity below a predefined threshold
- FIG. 5K illustrates an exemplary user interface that displays a preview of a selectable affordance when certain intensity criteria of the user input are met.
- device 100 detects a user input 519 that is stationary (e.g., includes movement of a contact that is less than a predefined threshold) and over a selectable affordance but is otherwise analogous to user input 513 (e.g., the contact intensity of user input 519 is above the first intensity threshold associated with item-switching criteria, such as light press threshold IT L ).
- the device 100 displays a preview area 521 of content that corresponds to the selectable affordance overlaid on the content item 502 .
- a press input over a selectable affordance within content item 502 triggers different functionality than a swipe/drag over content item 502 , where the swipe/drag has an intensity above IT L .
- FIGS. 5L-5U illustrate exemplary user interfaces for reordering list items in accordance with some embodiments.
- the user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes described below with reference to FIGS. 7A-7C .
- FIG. 5L illustrates a portion of a list of items, in accordance with some embodiments.
- a list of items 532 includes items 534 , 536 , 538 , 540 , 542 , 544 , 546 , and 548 , as indicated at FIGS. 5L-5U .
- a portion of the list of items including items 534 , 536 , 538 , 540 , 542 , and 544 is presented on touch screen 112 .
- FIGS. 5M-5N illustrate scrolling of list of items 532 when movement is detected while a characteristic intensity of the contact remains below a first intensity threshold.
- a contact is received at touch screen 112 at a location indicated by focus selector 550 .
- the contact moves across touch screen 112 along a path indicated by arrow 552 .
- a portion of list 532 including items 534 , 536 , 538 , 540 , 542 , and 544 , is presented on touch screen 112 .
- list 532 is scrolled in the direction of movement of the contact.
- a currently viewed position within list 532 (e.g., relative to the overall length of list 532 ) is indicated by scroll position indicator 554 .
- the characteristic intensity of the contact is between a contact detecting intensity threshold IT 0 and a hint intensity threshold IT H , as indicated by intensity meter 530 .
- list 532 has been scrolled in accordance with the movement of the contact from an initial position as indicated by focus selector 550 a (e.g., focus selector 550 at a first point in time) to a subsequent position as indicated by focus selector 550 b (e.g., focus selector 550 at a second point in time that is later than the first point in time) along the path indicated by arrow 552 .
- focus selector 550 a e.g., focus selector 550 at a first point in time
- focus selector 550 b e.g., focus selector 550 at a second point in time that is later than the first point in time
- Scroll position indicator 554 is shown at a higher position in the user interface of 5 N than the position of scroll position indicator 554 in the user interface of 5 M.
- FIG. 5O illustrates a changed appearance of an item, in accordance with some embodiments.
- the contact is at the location of item 534 , as indicated by focus selector 550 .
- the contact moves across touch screen 112 along a path indicated by arrow 556 .
- the characteristic intensity of the contact is above a hint intensity threshold IT H , as indicated by intensity meter 530 .
- the appearance of item 534 is changed (e.g., a rectangular outline is shown around item 534 to highlight the item).
- the appearance of item 534 has changed (e.g., to indicate to the user that item 534 is detachable from list 532 and/or on the verge of detachment).
- FIGS. 5P-5U illustrate moving an item relative to other items, in accordance with some embodiments.
- the contact moves across touch screen 112 from the location indicated by focus selector 550 along a path indicated by arrow 556 .
- the characteristic intensity of the contact is above a hint intensity threshold IT L , as indicated by intensity meter 530 .
- item 534 has moved (from the position of item 534 as shown in FIGS. 5N-5O ) relative to the other items 536 , 538 , 540 , 546 , and 548 .
- FIGS. 5P-5R illustrate movement of item 534 that lags movement of the contact as the focus selector 550 moves across touch screen 112 along the path indicated by arrow 556 .
- item 534 has detached from list 532 .
- the detachment of item 534 from list 532 is indicated by, e.g., changes in the appearance of item 534 (such as a reduced size of item 534 relative to the other items in list 532 ) and changes in the position of item 532 (such as a vertical and/or z-axis shifting of item 534 relative to the previous location of item 534 shown in FIGS. 5L-5O ).
- a first item slot 558 is partially revealed as a result of the movement of item 534 .
- FIGS. 5P-5Q as the contact moves along a first portion of the path indicated by arrow 556 (as indicated by the movement of focus selector 550 from the location shown in FIG. 5P to the location of focus selector 550 shown in FIG. 5Q ), item 534 remains static (or moves more slowly than focus selector 550 ). In FIG. 5Q , focus selector 550 extends below the lower edge of item 534 . In FIG. 5R , as focus selector 550 has continued the movement along a second portion of the path indicated by arrow 556 , item 534 has accelerated (e.g., to “catch up” with focus selector 550 ) and focus selector 550 is again shown in the center of item 534 .
- the characteristic intensity of the contact is above a light press intensity threshold IT L , as indicated by intensity meter 530 .
- item 534 has moved (from the position of item 534 as shown in FIGS. 5N-5O ) relative to the other items 536 , 538 , 540 , 546 , and 548 .
- item 534 is shown inserted into second item slot 560 .
- Item 534 is inserted into second item slot 560 , e.g., as a result of lift off of the contact from touch screen 112 while second item slot 560 is revealed (e.g., as shown in FIG. 5S ).
- FIGS. 5 T 2 - 5 U illustrate scrolling of list 532 that occurs in response to item 534 moving within a threshold distance of the end of the displayed portion of list 532 .
- the contact moves (e.g., continuing from the movement of the contact as indicated in FIG. 5S ) from the location indicated by focus selector 550 along a path indicated by arrow 564 toward a lower end 566 of the displayed portion of list 532 .
- FIG. 5U as a result of movement of the contact to a location that is within a threshold distance of the lower end 566 of the displayed portion of the list 532 , the list 532 is scrolled toward upper end 568 of the displayed portion of the list 532 , revealing items 542 and 544 that were not visible in FIG. 5 T 2 .
- Scroll position indicator 554 is shown at a lower position in the user interface of 5 U than the position of scroll position indicator 554 in the user interface of 5 T 2 .
- tactile feedback (as indicated at 562 ) is generated.
- FIGS. 5V-5CC illustrate exemplary user interfaces for navigating structured content in accordance with some embodiments.
- the user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes described below with reference to FIGS. 8A-8C .
- FIG. 5V illustrates a first portion (e.g., Chapter 3) of structured content 572 (e.g., the book The Jungle Book by Rudyard Kipling) displayed by touch screen 112 .
- structured content 572 e.g., the book The Jungle Book by Rudyard Kipling
- FIG. 5W-5X illustrate translation of structured content 572 in accordance with movement of a contact, in accordance with some embodiments.
- a contact with touch screen 112 is detected at a location indicated by focus selector 574 .
- the contact moves across touch screen 112 along a path indicated by arrow 578 .
- a characteristic intensity of the contact is between a contact detecting intensity threshold IT 0 and a hint intensity threshold IT H , as indicated by intensity meter 530 .
- a currently viewed position within structured content 572 is indicated by scroll position indicator 576 .
- structured content 572 has been scrolled in accordance with the movement of the contact from an initial position as indicated by focus selector 574 a (e.g., focus selector 574 at a first point in time) to a subsequent position as indicated by focus selector 574 b (e.g., focus selector 574 at a second point in time that is later than the first point in time) along the path indicated by arrow 578 .
- focus selector 574 a e.g., focus selector 574 at a first point in time
- focus selector 574 b e.g., focus selector 574 at a second point in time that is later than the first point in time
- Scroll position indicator 576 is shown at a lower position in the user interface of 5 X than the position of scroll position indicator 576 in the user interface of 5 W (e.g., to indicate the advanced position of the currently viewed position within structured content 572 as a result of the translation).
- FIGS. 5Y-5Z illustrate applying a visual effect to structured content 572 and presenting a scroll bar including a scroll position indicator 576 , in accordance with some embodiments.
- a contact is received on touch screen 112 at a location indicated by focus selector 574 .
- the characteristic intensity of the contact is below intensity threshold IT H , as indicated by intensity meter 530 .
- Scroll position indicator 576 is shown (e.g., in response to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to above IT 0 ) to indicate a position of the displayed portion of structured content 572 within structured content 572 .
- the intensity of the contact has increased from below hint intensity threshold level IT H , as indicated by intensity meter 530 of FIG. 5Y , to above intensity threshold IT H , as indicated by intensity meter 530 of FIG. 5Z .
- the contact moves across touch screen 112 along a path indicated by arrow 580 .
- a visual effect is applied to the displayed section of structured content 572 .
- the applied visual effect includes shrinking the displayed portion of structured content 572 and pushing the displayed portion of structured content 572 to a lower z-level on touch screen display 112 .
- section indicators 582 , 584 , 586 , and 588 are presented along with scroll position indicator 576 .
- Section indicator 586 (which is the closest of the section indicators to scroll position indicator 576 ), corresponds to the displayed portion (“Chapter 3”) of structured content 572 .
- Section indicators 582 and 584 correspond to portions (e.g., Chapters 1 and 2, respectively) of structured content 573 prior to the displayed portion.
- Section indicator 588 corresponds to a portion (e.g., Chapter 4) of structured content 573 following the displayed portion.
- FIGS. 5AA-5BB illustrate translating structured content 572 to show a start of a next section, in accordance with some embodiments.
- a characteristic intensity of the contact has increased from below hint intensity threshold level IT L , as indicated by intensity meter 530 of FIG. 5Z , to above light press intensity threshold IT L , as indicated by intensity meter 530 of FIG. 5AA .
- structured content 572 is translated to display a start of an adjacent section. For example, as described with regard to FIG. 5BB , a next section (“Chapter 4”) is displayed, e.g., in accordance with the direction of the movement of the contact indicated by arrow 580 .
- Section indicators 582 , 584 , 586 , and 588 are spread from initial positions, as shown in FIG. 5Z , to adjusted positions, as shown in FIG. 5AA . In FIG. 5AA , that distances between adjacent section indicators are greater than the distances between the initial positions of section indicators as shown in FIG. 5Z .
- FIG. 5BB the contact has moved from a position indicated by focus selector 574 c (focus selector 574 at a position in time) to a position indicated by focus selector 574 d (focus selector 574 at a position in time that is later than the time of 574 c ).
- a next section (“Chapter 4”) of structured content 572 is displayed.
- Scroll position indicator 576 has moved from a position adjacent to section indicator 586 , as indicated in FIG. 5AA , to a position adjacent to section indicator 588 (e.g., the scroll position indicator has “hopped” over section indicator 588 ), as indicated in FIG. 5BB , to indicate the occurrence of the translation to the adjacent section.
- FIG. 5CC illustrates a displayed next section of structured content 572 after liftoff of the contact has occurred, in accordance with some embodiments.
- scroll position indicator 576 and section indicators 582 , 584 , 586 , and 588 are no longer displayed.
- Structured content 572 is returned to its initial size (e.g., the adjacent section is displayed at the same size of the section of structured content 572 displayed in FIG. 5Y ).
- FIGS. 5DD-5TT illustrate exemplary user interfaces for moving content on a display in accordance with some embodiments.
- the user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in FIGS. 9A-9D and 10A-10C .
- FIGS. 5DD-5GG illustrate content scrolling ( FIGS. 5DD and 5EE ) and movement of content occurring in response to lift-off of a contact ( FIGS. 5FF and 5GG ) when a detected characteristic intensity of a contact has a first intensity prior to lift-off, in accordance with some embodiments.
- a contact is detected at touch on touch screen 112 at a location indicated by focus selector 594 .
- the contact moves along a path indicated by arrow 598 .
- a first portion of content 592 (the poem “The Raven” by Edgar Allan Poe) is presented on touch screen display 112 .
- content 592 is scrolled (e.g., in the direction of movement of the contact).
- a currently viewed position within content 592 (e.g., relative to the overall length of content 592 ) is indicated by scroll position indicator 596 .
- the intensity of the contact is between a contact-detection intensity threshold IT 0 and a hint intensity threshold IT H , as indicated by intensity meter 530 .
- FIG. 5EE content 592 has been scrolled in accordance with the movement of the contact from an initial position as indicated by focus selector 594 a (e.g., focus selector 594 at a first point in time) to a subsequent position as indicated by focus selector 594 b (e.g., focus selector 594 at a second point in time that is later than the first point in time) along the path indicated by arrow 598 .
- scroll position indicator 596 is shown at a lower position in 5 EE than the position of scroll position indicator 596 in 5 DD.
- the movement of content 592 continues at a reduced velocity v2, as indicated by dotted arrow 5100 .
- the velocity of the movement is reduced from velocity v1, as indicated in FIG. 5FF , to velocity v2, as indicated in 5 GG, (e.g., to indicate a friction effect).
- the movement of the content slows due to virtual friction between content 592 and the virtual surface over which content 592 is moving.
- FIGS. 5HH-5KK illustrate content scrolling ( FIGS. 5HH and 5II ) and movement of content occurring in response to lift-off of a contact ( FIGS. 5JJ and 5KK ) when a detected characteristic intensity of a contact has a second intensity prior to lift-off, in accordance with some embodiments.
- a contact is detected at touch on touch screen 112 at a location indicated by focus selector 594 .
- the contact moves along a path indicated by arrow 5102 .
- a first portion of content 592 is presented on touch screen display 112 .
- content 592 is scrolled (e.g., in the direction of movement of the contact).
- a currently viewed position within content 592 is indicated by scroll position indicator 596 .
- the intensity of the contact has increased above a light press intensity threshold IT L , as indicated by intensity meter 530 .
- Scroll enhancement indicator 5104 is shown (e.g., to indicate an extent to which the characteristic intensity of the contact is affecting content scrolling and/or post-lift-off content movement behavior).
- the length of scroll enhancement indicator 5104 provides a visual indication of a simulated inertia of content 592 that occurs on lift-off (e.g., the resistance to slowing down after lift-off from the velocity with which content 592 is moving in response to the movement of the contact prior to lift-off).
- a simulated inertia is set based on a characteristic intensity of the contact.
- FIG. 5II content 592 has been scrolled in accordance with the movement of the contact from an initial position as indicated by focus selector 594 c (e.g., focus selector 594 at a first point in time) to a subsequent position as indicated by focus selector 594 d (e.g., focus selector 594 at a second point in time that is later than the first point in time) along the path indicated by arrow 5102 .
- scroll position indicator 596 is shown at a lower position in 5 II than the position of scroll position indicator 596 in 5 HH.
- FIG. 5JJ following movement of the contact as described with regard to FIGS. 5HH-5II , lift-off of the contact from touch screen 112 has occurred.
- the content 592 moves at a velocity v3, as indicated by dotted arrow 5106 .
- content 592 moves with a greater velocity in FIGS. 5II-5KK (e.g., v3 is greater than v1) in accordance with the higher characteristic intensity of the contact with touch screen 112 prior to lift-off as indicated in FIGS. 5HH-5II .
- FIG. 5KK the movement of content 592 continues at a reduced velocity v4, as indicated by dotted arrow 5106 .
- the velocity of the movement is reduced from velocity v3, as indicated in FIG. 5JJ , to velocity v4, as indicated in 5 KK (e.g., to indicate a friction effect).
- content 592 moves by a greater distance in FIGS. 5 JJ- 5 KK in accordance with the higher characteristic intensity of the contact with touch screen 112 prior to lift-off as indicated in FIGS. 5HH-5II .
- FIGS. 5LL-5OO illustrate content scrolling ( FIGS. 5LL and 5MM ) and movement of content occurring in response to lift-off of a contact ( FIGS. 5NN and 5OO ) when a detected characteristic intensity of a contact has a third intensity prior to lift-off, in accordance with some embodiments.
- a contact is detected on touch screen 112 at a location indicated by focus selector 594 .
- the contact moves along a path indicated by arrow 5108 .
- a first portion of content 592 is presented on touch screen display 112 .
- content 592 is scrolled (e.g., in the direction of movement of the contact).
- a currently viewed position within content 592 is indicated by scroll position indicator 596 .
- the intensity of the contact has increased further above a light press intensity threshold IT L , to just below deep press intensity threshold IT D (e.g., the characteristic intensity of the contact indicated in FIG.
- Scroll enhancement indicator 5104 of FIG. 5LL exceeds the characteristic intensity of the contact as indicated in FIG. 5HH ), as indicated by intensity meter 530 .
- Scroll enhancement indicator 5104 of FIG. 5LL is longer than scroll enhancement indicator 5104 of FIG. 5HH (e.g., visually indicating the speed of the content's motion).
- FIG. 5MM content 592 has been scrolled in accordance with the movement of the contact from an initial position as indicated by focus selector 594 e (e.g., focus selector 594 at a first point in time) to a subsequent position as indicated by focus selector 594 f (e.g., focus selector 594 at a second point in time that is later than the first point in time) along the path indicated by arrow 5108 .
- scroll position indicator 596 is shown at a lower position in 5 MM than the position of scroll position indicator 596 in 5 LL.
- FIG. 5NN following movement of the contact as described with regard to FIGS. 5LL-5MM , lift-off of the contact from touch screen 112 has occurred.
- the content 592 moves at a velocity v5, as indicated by dotted arrow 5110 .
- content 592 moves with a greater velocity in FIGS. 5NN-5OO (e.g., v5 is greater than v3) in accordance with the higher characteristic intensity of the contact with touch screen 112 prior to lift-off as indicated in FIGS. 5LL-5MM .
- FIG. 5OO the movement of content 592 continues at a reduced velocity v6, as indicated by dotted arrow 5110 .
- the velocity of the movement is reduced from velocity v5, as indicated in FIG. 5NN , to velocity v6, as indicated in 5 OO (e.g., to indicate a friction effect).
- content 592 moves by a greater distance in FIGS. 5NN-5OO in accordance with the higher characteristic intensity of the contact with touch screen 112 prior to lift-off as indicated in FIGS. 5LL-5MM .
- Scroll enhancement indicator 5104 of FIG. 5OO is shorter than scroll enhancement indicator 5104 of FIG. 5NN (e.g., visually indicating the reduced speed of the content's motion).
- FIGS. 5PP-5RR illustrate scrolling through content 592 to a predefined portion of the content in response to lift-off of a contact when the contact had a characteristic intensity above an intensity threshold prior to the lift-off of the contact, in accordance with some embodiments.
- a contact is detected at touch on touch screen 112 at a location indicated by focus selector 594 .
- the contact moves along a path indicated by arrow 5112 .
- a first portion of content 592 is presented on touch screen display 112 .
- content 592 is scrolled (e.g., in the direction of movement of the contact).
- a currently viewed position within content 592 is indicated by scroll position indicator 596 .
- the intensity of the contact has increased above a deep press intensity threshold IT D , as indicated by intensity meter 530 .
- FIG. 5QQ content 592 has been scrolled in accordance with the movement of the contact from an initial position as indicated by focus selector 594 g (e.g., focus selector 594 at a first point in time) to a subsequent position as indicated by focus selector 594 h (e.g., focus selector 594 at a second point in time that is later than the first point in time) along the path indicated by arrow 5112 .
- scroll position indicator 596 is shown at a lower position in 5 QQ than the position of scroll position indicator 596 in 5 PP.
- FIG. 5SS illustrates an intensity filter, in accordance with some embodiments.
- Solid line indicates a detected intensity of a contact.
- Dotted line 5116 indicates a shifted intensity profile that indicates filtered intensity values based on the detected intensity values indicated by detected intensity.
- the intensity filter shifts an intensity profile of a contact, e.g., by a first time shift past the lift-off of the contact. For example, lift-off of the contact occurs at a point in time indicated by t lift-off .
- a characteristic intensity value I C at lift-off is determined from a point on shifted intensity profile 5116 corresponding to a time t lift-off when lift-off of contact from touch screen 112 is detected (e.g., the time when detected intensity drops to a contact intensity value of 0).
- an initial speed for moving content e.g., v1, v3, v5 as indicated in FIG.
- 5FF, 5JJ, 5NN , respectively) and/or a steady state speed for scrolling through the content to the predefined portion are determined based on a selected intensity value (e.g., I C ) on the shifted intensity profile 5116 .
- FIG. 5TT illustrates a speed filter, in accordance with some embodiments.
- Solid line 5118 indicates a detected speed of a contact.
- Dotted line 5120 indicates a shifted speed profile that indicates filtered speed values based on the detected speed values indicated by detected speed 5118 .
- the speed filter shifts a speed profile of a contact, e.g., by a first time shift past the lift-off of the contact. For example, lift-off of the contact occurs at a point in time indicated by t lift-off .
- a characteristic speed value V C at lift-off is determined from a point on shifted speed profile 5120 corresponding to a time t lift-off when lift-off of contact from touch screen 112 is detected (e.g., the time when detected speed 5118 drops to a contact speed value of 0).
- an initial speed for moving content e.g., v1, v3, v5 as indicated in FIG.
- a steady state speed for scrolling through the content to the predefined portion e.g., scrolling to the end of content 592 as indicated by scroll position indicator 596 in 5 RR
- a selected speed value e.g., V C
- FIGS. 6A-6B are flow diagrams illustrating a method 600 of navigating within and between content items in accordance with some embodiments.
- the method 600 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300 , FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device 100 , FIG. 1A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface.
- the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display.
- the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface.
- the method 600 provides an efficient way to navigate within and between content items based on the intensity of a user input. Such methods reduce the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to interact with the content item faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges.
- method 600 is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface.
- the device displays ( 602 ), on the display, content of a first content item, wherein the first content item is one of a sequence of content items (e.g., a plurality of content items).
- the sequence of content items corresponds ( 604 ) to a plurality of electronic messages in an electronic messaging application (e.g., as shown in FIG. 5J ), a plurality of web browser windows (or tabbed windows) in a web browser, a plurality of applications, a plurality of digital images in a set of images (e.g., a single album or collection in a photo or camera application), or a plurality of sets of digital images (e.g., a plurality of albums or collections of photos in a photo or camera application).
- an electronic messaging application e.g., as shown in FIG. 5J
- a plurality of web browser windows or tabbed windows
- a plurality of applications e.g., a plurality of applications
- a plurality of digital images in a set of images e.g., a single album or collection in a photo or camera application
- a plurality of sets of digital images e.g., a plurality of albums or collections of photos in a photo or camera
- the sequence of content items corresponds to a plurality of content sections, such as a plurality conversations in a messaging or email application, a plurality of weeks (or months or years) in a calendar application, a plurality of chapters in a book, a plurality of scenes in a video, or a plurality of events in a digital image library.
- a plurality of content sections such as a plurality conversations in a messaging or email application, a plurality of weeks (or months or years) in a calendar application, a plurality of chapters in a book, a plurality of scenes in a video, or a plurality of events in a digital image library.
- the device detects ( 606 ) a user input that includes movement of a contact in a respective direction on the touch-sensitive surface.
- the user input is a swipe gesture that is made with the contact (e.g., user input 510 , FIGS. 5B-5C and/or user input 513 , FIGS. 5E-5G ).
- the swipe gesture includes movement of the contact from a first location on the touch-sensitive surface to a second location on the touch-sensitive surface.
- the swipe gesture is a vertical swipe gesture.
- the swipe gesture is a horizontal swipe gesture.
- the device In response ( 608 ) to detecting the user input: in accordance with a determination that the user input meets item-switching criteria, the device replaces display of the first content item with display of a second content item (e.g., a different content item distinct from the first content item) in the sequence of content items, wherein the item-switching criteria include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity (e.g., a maximum intensity) of the contact is above a first intensity threshold (e.g., user input 513 , FIGS. 5E-5G results in replacing display of content item 502 with display of second content 518 ).
- a characteristic intensity e.g., a maximum intensity
- the item-switching criteria also include a criterion that is met when the device detects a predetermined magnitude (e.g., amount or distance) of movement of the contact (e.g., FIG. 5E shows movement of user input 513 as a precondition to replacing display of content item 502 with display of second content 518 ). That is, there is a predetermined magnitude of movement that is required to be detected by the device in order to cause the device to replace display of the first content item with display of the second content item. In some embodiments, slight movement of the contact (e.g., less than the predetermined magnitude) results in display of a portion of the second content item and the device then reverts back to displaying the first content item when the contact terminates.
- a predetermined magnitude e.g., amount or distance
- the device scrolls the first content item in response to the initial user input (e.g., an initial portion of a swipe gesture). If later during the user input, the contact exceeds the first intensity threshold, the device then transitions to displaying the second content item.
- the item-switching criteria are met when the initial intensity of the contact exceeds the first intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the item-switching criteria are met when the initial intensity of the contact exceeds the first intensity threshold while the contact is moving (e.g., moving above a predetermined velocity threshold). In some embodiments, the item-switching criteria are not met if the contact is stationary or is moving below a predetermined velocity threshold, even if the characteristic intensity of the contact exceeds the first intensity threshold.
- the device In response ( 608 ) to detecting the user input: in accordance with a determination that the user input does not meet the item-switching criteria, the device navigates through the content of the first content item in accordance with the movement of the contact (e.g., displaying a second portion of the first content that is different from the first portion of the content, as shown in FIGS. 5A-5C ).
- the item-switching criteria includes ( 610 ) a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the contact exceeds the first intensity threshold after detecting at least a predetermined threshold amount of movement of the contact. For example when an increase in intensity from below the first intensity threshold to above the first intensity threshold is detected before the user starts swiping (e.g., before the device detects movement of the contact), the device does not switch between content items. Conversely, in this example, when the increase in intensity from below the first intensity threshold to above the first intensity threshold is detected during the swipe, the device navigates to the second content item).
- the second content item is ( 612 ) sequentially adjacent to the first content item (e.g. in the sequence of content items) and is selected based on the respective direction of the movement of the contact.
- replacing display of the first content item with the second content item includes displaying a transition between the first content item and the second content item. The transition includes concurrently displaying at least a portion of the first content item and at least a portion of the second content item and the transition is dynamically controlled by the user input.
- replacing display of the first content item with a second content item in the sequence of content items includes sliding the first content item off the display in a direction corresponding to the respective direction and sliding the second content item onto the display in the direction corresponding to the respective direction. For example, when the movement of the contact is principally vertically upwards, the first content item is slid off the display vertically upwards toward the top of the display and the second content item is slid onto the display vertically upwards from the bottom of the display.
- a vertically upward swipe results in forward navigation in the sequence of content items (e.g. when the first content item is a photograph, forward navigation results in display of another photograph that is more recent than the first photograph) or vice versa.
- a vertically downwards swipe results in backward navigation in the sequence of content items (e.g. when the first content item is a photograph, backward navigation results in display of another photograph that is less recent than the first photograph) or vice versa.
- the device performs analogous functionality with respect to horizontal swipes. For example, a rightward-swipe results in backward navigation with left-to-right sliding, and a leftward swipe results in forward navigation with right-to-left sliding or vice versa.
- replacing display of the first content item with a second content item includes directly manipulating the first content item and the second content item in accordance with the movement of the contact.
- the movement e.g., speed, direction, and/or position
- the movement of the contact corresponds to (e.g. tracks) the movement of the contact so that the user feels that she is directly dragging the second content item onto the display and pushing the first content item off the display.
- navigating through the content of the first content item includes: in accordance with a determination that the respective direction is a first direction on the touch-sensitive surface, scrolling ( 614 ) the content in a first direction on the display; and in accordance with a determination that the respective direction is a second direction on the touch-sensitive surface, scrolling the content in a second direction on the display that is different from the first direction on the display.
- navigating through the content of the first content item includes directly manipulating the displayed content of the first content item in accordance with the movement of the contact. For example, the movement (e.g., speed, direction, and/or distance) of the content, when scrolled, tracks the movement of the contact.
- the scrolling occurs in the same direction as the sliding of content items on and off the display that would have occurred, as described above, had the user input met the item-switching criteria. So, for example, a vertically upwards swipe that is below the first intensity threshold results in upward scrolling of the first content item, while a vertically upward swipe that is above the first intensity threshold results in sliding the first content item upwards off the top of the display and sliding the second content item upwards from the bottom of the display.
- navigating through the content of the first content item in accordance with the movement of the contact includes: maintaining ( 616 ) display of a first portion of the first content item in a first user interface region on the display; and navigating (e.g., scrolling) through a second portion of the first content item in a second user interface region on the display.
- a portion of the content item e.g., an email header or universal resource locator (URL) bar
- URL universal resource locator
- replacing display of the first content item with the second content item includes displaying ( 618 ) a transition between the first content item and the second content item; and the transition includes reducing a size of the first content item.
- the transition includes zooming out from the first content item at the start of the transition to indicate to the user that the device is navigating to the second content item rather than navigating (e.g., scrolling) within the first content item.
- the progress of the transition is directly controllable by the user, e.g., via the intensity of the contact. So, for example, as the user increases the contact intensity toward the first intensity threshold, the first content item zooms-out. If the user subsequently reduces the intensity of the contact slightly, the first content item zooms back in.
- a plurality of intensity levels within the vicinity of the first intensity threshold map to a plurality of corresponding zoom levels (e.g., sizes) of the first content item.
- zoom levels e.g., sizes
- the user feels as though she is pushing the first content item back in the z-direction by pushing harder on the contact.
- a region beyond an edge of the first content item is displayed (e.g., a background area that is a different color or pattern than a color or pattern of the background of the first content item, illustrating to the user that the first content item has been pushed back in the z-direction, as shown in FIG. 5E ).
- replacing display of the first content item with the second content item includes displaying ( 620 ) a transition between the first content item and the second content item; and the transition includes increasing a size of the second content item (e.g., zooming in on the second content item at the end of the transition to indicate that navigation to the second content item is complete).
- the progress of the transition is directly controllable by the user, e.g., via the intensity of the contact. So, for example, as the user reduces the contact intensity toward the first intensity threshold, the second content item zooms-in. If the user subsequently increases the intensity of the contact slightly, the second content item zooms back out.
- a plurality of intensity levels within the vicinity of the first intensity threshold map to a plurality of corresponding zoom levels (e.g., sizes) of the second content item.
- zoom levels e.g., sizes
- the increase in intensity of the contact from below the first intensity threshold to above the first intensity threshold causes the device to push the first content item back. Movement of the contact then drags the second content item onto the display and pushes the first content item off of the display, where both the first content item and the second content item are zoomed-out during dragging (e.g., scrolling).
- the second content item When the second content item is scrolled onto (e.g., entirely onto the display, or past a predefined threshold for transitioning to the second content item), the second content item increases in size when the intensity is reduced from above the first intensity threshold to below the first intensity threshold, or when liftoff of the contact is detected, as shown in FIGS. 5G-5I .
- the device while displaying the first content item, the device detects ( 622 ) a second user input at a location that corresponds to a selectable affordance (e.g., a URL link, data detected text, or an icon), wherein the second user input includes a second contact that is stationary on the touch-sensitive surface.
- a selectable affordance e.g., a URL link, data detected text, or an icon
- the device In response to detecting the second user input, in accordance with a determination that the user input occurs while a focus selector is at a location that corresponds to a selectable affordance (e.g., a URL link, data detected text, or an icon) and the movement of the contact is less than a predetermined amount (e.g., the contact is stationary or nearly so), the device displays a preview area of content that corresponds to the selectable affordance overlaid on the first content item.
- a selectable affordance e.g., a URL link, data detected text, or an icon
- the device determines whether the contact is moving on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., the contact moves more than a predetermined amount in a predetermined time) or whether the contact is stationary (e.g., the contact moves less than a predetermined amount in a predetermined time) on the touch-sensitive surface.
- the device either navigates through the content of the first content item or replaces display of the first content item with the second content item depending on whether the user input meets item-switching criteria, as described above.
- the device displays a preview (e.g., peeks at a second user interface that corresponds to the selectable affordance via a preview window).
- the device in accordance with a determination that the user input begins at a first edge of the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., the user input is a flick gesture that starts at the edge of the touch-sensitive surface, sometimes called an “edge swipe”), performs ( 624 ) an operation that is distinct from both replacing display of the first content item with the second content item and navigating through the content of the first content item.
- the user input is a flick gesture that starts at the edge of the touch-sensitive surface, sometimes called an “edge swipe”
- the operation includes displaying a web page from the history of web pages viewed in the window/tabbed window of the web browser; for an electronic messaging program, the operation includes displaying (e.g., in sequence) a plurality of representations of electronic communications; for a social networking application, the operation includes displaying a menu with settings for the application.)
- the device in accordance with a determination that the user input begins at a first edge of the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., the user input is a flick gesture that starts at the edge of the touch-sensitive surface) and has a characteristic intensity above a respective intensity threshold, the device performs a different operation that is distinct from any of replacing display of the first user interface with the second user interface, displaying the second portion of the first user interface, or an operation that is performed when the characteristic intensity is below the respective threshold. For example, in response to detecting an edge-swipe with an intensity above the respective threshold, the device displays a multitasking user interface for switching between open applications).
- the device after replacing display of the first content item with the second content item in the sequence of content items, detecting a second user input that includes movement of a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface; in response to detecting the second user input: in accordance with a determination that the second user input meets the item-switching criteria, the device replaces ( 626 ) display of the second content item with a third content item in the sequence of content items; and in accordance with a determination that the second user input does not meet the item-switching criteria, navigating through content of the second content item in accordance with the movement of the second contact.
- the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described above with reference to method 700 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 700 , 800 , 900 , and 1000 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.
- FIGS. 7A-7C are flow diagrams illustrating a method 700 of reordering list items in accordance with some embodiments.
- the method 700 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300 , FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device 100 , FIG. 1A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface.
- the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display.
- the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface.
- the method 700 provides an intuitive way to reorder list items.
- the method reduces the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user when reordering list items, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface.
- the device presents ( 702 ) a first portion of a list of items 532 on the display.
- a list of items 532 includes items 534 , 536 , 538 , 540 , 542 , 544 , 546 , and 548 , as indicated at 5 L- 5 U.
- a portion of the list of items 532 is presented on touch screen 112 .
- the portion of the list of items shown in FIG. 5L includes items 534 , 536 , 538 , 540 , 542 , and 544 .
- the device detects ( 704 ) a contact on the touch-sensitive surface 112 while the first portion of the list of items 532 is presented on the display (e.g., while a focus selector is over a first item in the list of items). For example, a contact is detected on touch screen 112 at a location indicated by focus selector 550 while the first portion of the list of items 532 (including items 534 - 544 ) is presented on touch screen 112 , as shown in FIG. 5M . Focus selector 550 is over item 534 of list 532 .
- the device detects ( 706 ) a first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface 112 while a characteristic intensity of the contact remains below a first intensity threshold.
- the first intensity threshold is, e.g., hint intensity level IT H , light press intensity level IT L , or another statically or dynamically determined intensity level.
- the contact at the location indicated by focus selector 550 moves on touch screen 112 , as indicated by arrow 552 , while the characteristic intensity of the contact remains below IT H , as indicated by intensity level meter 530 .
- the device Scrolls ( 708 ) the list of items 532 to present a second portion of the list of items 532 on the display in accordance with the first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., as in regular scrolling with a light drag). For example, in response to the movement of the contact along the path indicated by arrow 552 , list 532 is scrolled to present a second portion of the list including items 546 and 548 , as indicated in FIG. 5N . To indicate that scrolling has occurred, scroll position indicator 554 is shown at a higher position in the user interface of 5 N than the position of scroll position indicator 554 in the user interface of 5 M.
- While a focus selector 550 associated with the contact is located on a first item (e.g., item 534 ) in the second portion of the list of items presented on the display (and while continuing to detect the contact on the touch-sensitive surface), the device detects ( 710 ) an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold (e.g., IT H as shown at intensity meter 530 ) followed by a second movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
- IT H as shown at intensity meter 530
- the device moves ( 712 ) the first item (e.g., item 534 ) relative to other items in the second portion of the list of items 532 presented on the display in accordance with the second movement of the contact (e.g., detaching an item from the list and moving it with a drag that started with a deep press).
- the first intensity threshold e.g., above IT H , as shown by intensity meter 530 as shown in FIG. 5O
- IT L as shown by intensity meter 530 as shown in FIG.
- first item 534 moves relative to other items 536 , 538 , 540 , 546 , and 548 in the second portion of the list of items 532 .
- the device in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold followed by the second movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface, while the focus selector 550 associated with the contact is located on the first item (e.g., item 534 ) in the second portion of the list of items 532 , the device changes ( 714 ) an appearance of the first item (e.g., enlarging the first item, highlighting a boundary of the first item, changing the color or hue of the first item, lifting the first item above the plane of the list of items, or providing a combination of two or more of the above visual effects, while maintaining the normal appearances of the other items in the list). For example, as shown in FIGS.
- the size of item 534 is reduced and item 534 is shown lifted above the plane of the list of items 532 .
- the appearance of the whole list may also change in a different way, so that the appearance change of the first item is still distinguished from the appearance change applied to the other items in the list.
- the amount of appearance change is dynamically determined and adjusted based on the actual variation in the characteristic intensity of the contact.
- changing the appearance of the first item includes ( 716 ) dynamically changing a size of the first item in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact (e.g., dynamically increasing the size of the first item as the current intensity of the contact increases beyond the first threshold, such that the first item overlaps with an item adjacent to the first item).
- the characteristic intensity of the contact at the position indicated by focus selector 550 increases from a level above hint intensity threshold IT H , as shown by intensity meter 530 in FIG. 5O , to a level above light press intensity threshold IT L , as shown by intensity meter 530 in FIG. 5P
- the size of item 534 decreases from the size of item 534 as shown in FIG. 5O to the size of item 534 as shown in FIG. 5P .
- the device moves ( 718 ) the first item (e.g., item 534 ) by a first distance relative to a second item (e.g., item 536 ) that is adjacent to the first item to at least partially reveal a first item slot (e.g., item 558 ) associated with the first item on the display.
- a first item slot e.g., item 558
- FIGS. 5P-5R in accordance with the movement of the contact on touch screen 112 along the path indicated by arrow 556 , item 534 moves relative to item 536 to partially reveal item slot 558 associated with 534 .
- moving the first item (e.g., item 534 ) by the first distance relative to the second item (e.g., item 536 ) that is adjacent to the first item includes ( 720 ), during an initial portion of the second movement of the contact (e.g., during the first 10 mm or 5 mm of the second movement of the contact after the intensity of the contact has reached above the first intensity threshold), moving the first item at a slower speed than the focus selector 550 to create a distance lag between the first item and the focus selector (e.g., the first item is dragged behind the focus selector with some inertia); and during a subsequent portion of the second movement of the contact following the initial portion of the second movement of the contact (e.g., after the first 10 mm or 5 mm of the second movement of the contact after the intensity of the contact has reached above the first intensity threshold), accelerating the movement of the first item to eliminate the distance lag between the first item and the focus selector (e.g., during the next 2 mm
- item 534 moves at a slower speed than focus selector 550 (e.g., the position of focus selector 550 in FIG. 5P is different from the position of focus selector 550 in FIG. 5Q and the position of item 534 in FIG. 5P is the same as the position of item 534 in FIG. 5Q ).
- the position of focus selector 550 in FIG. 5P is different from the position of focus selector 550 in FIG. 5Q and the position of item 534 in FIG. 5P is the same as the position of item 534 in FIG. 5Q ).
- FIGS. 556 During a subsequent portion of the movement of the contact along the path indicated by arrow 556 , as shown in FIGS.
- the movement of item 534 accelerates to eliminate the distance lag between item 534 and focus selector 550 (e.g., item 534 moves from a position as shown in FIG. 5Q with focus selector 550 at the lower edge of item 534 to a position as shown in FIG. 5R with focus selector 550 centered on item 534 , such that item 534 has “caught up” with focus selector 550 ).
- the device detects ( 722 ) a lift-off of the contact upon moving the first item (e.g., item 534 ) by the first distance relative to the second item (e.g., item 536 ) that is adjacent to the first item; and, in accordance with a determination that the first distance is smaller than a first threshold distance (e.g., half of a slot height), the device restores the first item into the first item slot (e.g. item slot 558 ) associated with the first item on the display (e.g., and reversing visual changes applied to the first item and/or other items in the list, such as restoring the size, transparency, etc. of the first item and/or other items in the list).
- a first threshold distance e.g., half of a slot height
- item 534 is restored into item slot 558 (e.g. the location of item 534 before item 534 detached from list 532 ), resulting in a user interface that displays a list 532 that is the same as list 532 shown in FIG. 5N .
- the device moves ( 724 ) the second item into the first item slot associated with the first item to reveal a second item slot (e.g. item slot 560 ) associated with the second item (e.g., sliding the second item into a slot that was associated with the first item).
- a first threshold distance e.g., half of a slot height
- the device moves ( 724 ) the second item into the first item slot associated with the first item to reveal a second item slot (e.g. item slot 560 ) associated with the second item (e.g., sliding the second item into a slot that was associated with the first item).
- a first threshold distance e.g., half of a slot height
- the device detects ( 726 ) a lift-off of the contact while the second item slot (e.g. item slot 560 ) associated with the second item (e.g., item 536 ) is revealed on the display; and in response to detecting the lift-off of the contact while the second item slot associated with the second item is revealed on the display, the device inserts the first item (e.g. 534 ) into the second item slot. For example, as shown in FIG. 5 T 1 , first item 534 is inserted into item slot 560 (that was previously occupied by item 536 ).
- the device moves ( 728 ) a respective other item to a respective new item slot and reveals a respective previous item slot for the respective other item on the display. For example, as a movement of the contact that causes item 534 to pass over multiple other items (e.g., over items 536 and 538 ) occurs, item 536 is moved to item slot 558 and item slot 560 for item 536 is revealed; and subsequently item 538 is moved to item slot 560 and a new item slot (not shown) is revealed.
- the device generates ( 730 ) a respective tactile output (e.g., thereby providing haptic feedback) as the respective other item moves to the respective new item slot and reveals the respective previous item slot (e.g., the tactile output is feedback indicating that the respective other item has snapped into a new slot). For example, as shown in FIG. 5S , when item 536 moves to item slot 558 and item slot 560 is revealed, a tactile output, as indicated at 562 , occurs.
- a respective tactile output e.g., thereby providing haptic feedback
- a respective movement of the respective other item changes ( 732 ) in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact during the second movement of the contact. For example, the movement of the respective other item slows down when the contact intensity increases. As a result, the scrolling of the other items in the list during the movement of the first item slows down when the intensity of the contact increases during the second movement of the contact.
- the device detects ( 734 ) that the first item (e.g. item 534 ) has moved within a second threshold distance of a first end (e.g., top or bottom) of the displayed second portion of the list of items in accordance with the second movement of the contact; and, in response to detecting that the first item has moved within the second threshold distance of the first end of the displayed second portion of the list of items, the device scrolls the list of items toward a second end (e.g., bottom or top) of the displayed second portion of the list of items opposite the first end to display a third portion of the list of items. For example, as shown in FIG.
- item 534 moves along a path indicated by arrow 564 to a location within a threshold distance of lower edge 566 of the displayed portion of list 532 .
- the list of items 532 is scrolled toward upper edge 568 , as shown in FIGS. 5 T 2 - 5 U.
- items 542 and 544 are revealed.
- scroll position indicator 554 is shown at a lower position in the user interface of 5 U than the position of scroll position indicator 554 in the user interface of 5 T 2 .
- scrolling the list of items 532 toward the second end (e.g., toward upper edge 568 ) of the displayed second portion of the list of items opposite the first end (e.g., lower edge 566 ) to display the third portion of the list of items includes ( 736 ): dynamically changing a scrolling speed of the scrolling toward the second end of the displayed second portion of the list of items in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact.
- increasing the intensity of the contact causes the scrolling of the list of items to speed up, e.g., to quickly scroll to the desired location in the list for inserting the first item.
- increasing the intensity of the contact causes the scrolling of the list of items to slow down, e.g., to allow the user to see more clearly which items are coming into view.
- the device applies ( 738 ) a transparency effect to the first item (e.g., making the first item semitransparent) while the first item (e.g. item 734 ) overlaps with another item in the list of items (e.g., item 736 ).
- FIGS. 7A-7C have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed.
- One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600 , 800 , 900 , and 1000 ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 700 described above with respect to FIGS. 7A-7C .
- the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described above with reference to method 700 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600 , 800 , 900 , and 1000 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.
- FIGS. 8A-8C are flow diagrams illustrating a method 800 of navigating structured content in accordance with some embodiments.
- the method 800 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300 , FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device 100 , FIG. 1A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface.
- the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display.
- the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface.
- the method 800 provides an intuitive way to navigate structured content.
- the method reduces the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user when navigating structured content, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface.
- the device presents ( 802 ) a first portion of structured content 572 on the display, wherein the structured content 572 includes a plurality of sections, and the first portion includes content from a first section of the plurality of sections.
- structured content 572 e.g., the book The Jungle Book by Rudyard Kipling
- FIGS. 5V-5CC includes multiple sections (e.g., chapters).
- FIG. 5V shows a portion including content from Chapter 3 of structured content 572 .
- the device detects ( 804 ) a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while the first portion of the structured content is presented on the display. For example, as shown at FIGS. 5W-5BB , a contact is received at a location indicated by focus selector 574 .
- the device detects ( 806 ) an increase in a characteristic intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., an increase from below hint intensity threshold IT H to above IT H , as indicated at FIGS. 5Y-5Z and/or an increase from below light press intensity threshold IT L to above IT L , as indicated at FIGS. 5Z-5AA ) and detects a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a movement along a path indicated by arrow 580 in FIGS. 5Z-5BB ).
- detection of the movement of the contact is required before detection of the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact (e.g., to differentiate from a gesture for triggering a peek and pop response of the user interface).
- detection of an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact is required before detection of the movement of the contact. In some embodiments there is no relative timing requirement for detecting the increase in contact intensity and detecting the movement of the contact.
- the device In response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact and detecting the first movement of the first contact ( 808 ): in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., above intensity light press intensity threshold IT L , or another statically or dynamically determined threshold), the device translates the structured content 572 to display a start of a second section adjacent to the first section of the structured content at a predefined location on the display (e.g., the device translates the structured content to display at the beginning of the UI window or the middle of the UI window).
- a first intensity threshold e.g., above intensity light press intensity threshold IT L , or another statically or dynamically determined threshold
- the device translates the structured content 572 to display a start of a second section adjacent to the first section of the structured content at a predefined location on the display (e.g., the device translates the structured content to display at the beginning of the UI window or the middle of the UI window).
- the device translates the structured content 572 in accordance with a magnitude of the movement (e.g., speed or distance) of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. For example, as shown in FIGS. 5W-5X , structured content 572 is translated (e.g., from showing a first portion of Chapter 3, as shown in FIG. 5W , to showing a second portion of Chapter 3, as shown in FIG. 5X ) in accordance with a distance traversed by focus selector 574 as the contact moves across touch screen 112 along a path indicated by arrow 578 .
- a magnitude of the movement e.g., speed or distance
- a focus selector 574 associated with the first contact is on ( 810 ) the structured content 572 (and not on an index or scroll bar presented on the display).
- focus selector 574 is located on the structured content 572 .
- the device in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the first movement of the first contact (e.g., in response to detecting an increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact above the first intensity threshold, and the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface), applies ( 812 ) a visual effect on the first portion of the structured content on the display.
- applying the visual effect includes shrinking the first portion of the structured content, and/or pushing the first portion of the structured content to a lower z-level on the display. For example, as shown in FIGS. 5Y-5Z , the displayed portion of structured content 572 is reduced in size (e.g., from the size of the displayed portion of structured content 572 in FIG. 5Y to the size of the displayed portion of structured content 572 in FIG. 5Z ) and pushed to a lower z-level on the display.
- the device removes ( 814 ) the applied visual effect on the first portion of the structured content on the display during the translating of the structured content.
- the device prior to the determination that the characteristic intensity of the first contact has increased above the first intensity threshold ( 816 ): the device detects an initial increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact (e.g., an increase above the first intensity threshold); and, in response to detecting the initial increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact, the device concurrently presents a scroll bar with the first portion of the structured content 572 on the display, wherein the scroll bar includes a scroll position indicator 576 that indicates a respective position of the first portion of the structured content 572 in the structured content 572 ; and, in response to the determination that the characteristic intensity of the first contact has increased above the first intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ), the device presents a plurality of section indicators (e.g.
- an initial increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact e.g., an increase above the first intensity threshold
- the device concurrently presents a scroll bar with the first portion of the structured content 572 on the display, wherein the scroll bar includes a scroll position indicator 576 that indicates a respective position of the
- section indicators 582 , 584 , 586 , and 588 as shown in FIG. 5Z along with the scroll position indicator 576 , wherein a relative ordering of the section indicators 582 , 584 , 586 , and 588 to the scroll position indicator 576 corresponds to relative positions of the sections to the first portion of the structured content in the structured content 572 .
- presenting the plurality of section indicators with the scroll bar includes: presenting ( 818 ) an animation that shows the plurality of section indicators 582 , 584 , 586 , and 588 emerging from the scroll position indicator 576 and spreading out along the scroll bar.
- presenting ( 818 ) an animation that shows the plurality of section indicators 582 , 584 , 586 , and 588 emerging from the scroll position indicator 576 and spreading out along the scroll bar For example, as illustrated in FIGS. 5Z-5AA , section indicators 582 , 584 , 586 , and 588 spread out from initial positions as shown in FIG. 5Z to spread positions as indicated in FIG. 5AA .
- the animation shows the section indicators flying out from the scroll position indicator, overshooting, and then bouncing back to their respective final positions along the scroll bar.
- the device when translating of the structured content to display the start of the second section adjacent to the first section of the structured content, the device presents ( 820 ) an animation that shows the scroll position indicator 576 hopping over a respective section indicator (e.g., section indicator 588 ) in the plurality of section indicators (e.g., the section indicator that is adjacent to the scroll position indicator in the scroll direction). For example, as shown in FIGS. 5AA-5BB , scroll position indicator 576 hops from above section indicator 588 , as shown in FIG. 5AA , to below section indicator 588 , as shown in FIG. 5BB .
- a respective section indicator e.g., section indicator 588
- the device detects ( 822 ) a lift-off of the first contact, and, in response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact, the device ceases to display the scroll bar, the scroll position indicator, and the plurality of section indicators.
- the scroll position indicator 576 and section indicators 582 , 584 , 586 , and 588 shown in FIG. 5BB are no longer visible when liftoff occurs as shown in FIG. 5CC .
- the scroll bar, the scroll position indicator, and the plurality of section indicators are displayed in response to the determination that the characteristic intensity of the first contact has increased above the first intensity threshold, and if the first movement is detected after the characteristic intensity of the first contact has decreased below the first intensity threshold, the section scrolling mode is not entered, and the plurality of section indicators (and optionally, the scroll bar and the scroll position indicator) are removed from the display.
- the device in response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact, presents ( 824 ) an animation that shows the plurality of section indicators (e.g. section indicators 582 , 584 , 586 , and 588 , as shown in FIGS. 5AA-5BB ) moving (e.g., retracting) into the scroll position indicator 576 before ceasing the display the scroll position indicator 576 .
- section indicators e.g. section indicators 582 , 584 , 586 , and 588 , as shown in FIGS. 5AA-5BB
- the structured content 572 is translated ( 826 ) to display the start of the second section (e.g., Chapter 4) adjacent to the first section (e.g., Chapter 3) of the structured content at the predefined location on the display in accordance with a determination that the first movement of the first contact (e.g., along the path indicated by arrow 580 ) exceeds a first threshold distance. In some embodiments, if the first movement of the first contact does not exceed the first threshold distance, the structured content is not translated to display the start of the second section adjacent to the first section of the structured content at the predefined location on the display. Instead, the first portion of the structured content remains to be displayed at or is restored to its original location on the display after the first movement.
- the first movement of the first contact e.g., along the path indicated by arrow 580
- the characteristic intensity of the first contact is below ( 828 ) the first intensity threshold (e.g., below IT L as indicated by intensity meter 530 ) after the first movement of the first contact (e.g., along the path indicated by arrow 580 ) exceeds the first threshold distance.
- the user can release the pressure on the content (e.g., decrease the contact intensity) below the first intensity threshold after entering the section scrolling mode (e.g., entering the section scrolling mode with the increase in intensity above the first intensity threshold and moving the first contact by at least the first threshold distance).
- the device Upon reduction of the contact intensity, the device remains in the section scrolling mode, and further movement beyond the first threshold distance is used for continued section scrolling.
- the sections in the structured content are mapped ( 830 ) to a plurality of vertical positions on the display (e.g., the plurality of sections correspond to an equal number of positions evenly distributed on the display in the scrolling direction (e.g., the vertical direction).
- the vertical positions are represented by respective markers, e.g., section markers (such as section indicators 582 , 584 , 586 , and 588 ).
- the positions and/or the corresponding markers are located away from the scroll bar, and on the displayed content.
- the first movement of the first contact from a first position of the plurality of positions to a second position of the plurality of positions results in a translation of the structured content from one section of the structured document that corresponds to the first position on the display to another section of the structured content that corresponds to the second position on the display. For example, if the structured content has five sections, each section is mapped to a corresponding vertical position on the display along the vertical direction. After the conditions for section scrolling are satisfied and the section scrolling mode has been entered, a movement from the position corresponding to section 3 to the position corresponding to section 5 causes the content to be scrolled from section 3 to section 5, as opposed to causing the content to be scrolled by the amount determined in regular scrolling.
- FIGS. 8A-8C have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed.
- One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600 , 700 , 900 , and 1000 ) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 800 described above with respect to FIGS. 8A-8C .
- the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, animations described above with reference to method 800 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600 , 700 , 900 , and 1000 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.
- FIGS. 9A-9D are flow diagrams illustrating a method 900 of moving content on a display in accordance with some embodiments.
- the method 900 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300 , FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device 100 , FIG. 1A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface.
- the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display.
- the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface.
- the method 900 provides an intuitive way to move content on a display.
- the method reduces the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user when moving content on a display, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface.
- the device presents ( 902 ) a first portion of content 592 (e.g., “The Raven” by Edgar Allan Poe) on a display (e.g., touch screen 112 ).
- a first portion of content 592 e.g., “The Raven” by Edgar Allan Poe
- the device While presenting the first portion of the content 592 on the display, the device ( 904 ) detects a first contact on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch screen 112 ) and detects a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a movement of focus selector 594 , such as a movement along a path indicated by arrow 598 of FIGS. 5DD-5EE , a movement along a path indicated by arrow 5102 of FIGS. 5HH-5II , or a movement along a path indicated by arrow 5108 of FIGS. 5LL-5MM ).
- a touch-sensitive surface e.g., touch screen 112
- a first movement of focus selector 594 such as a movement along a path indicated by arrow 598 of FIGS. 5DD-5EE , a movement along a path indicated by arrow 5102 of FIGS. 5HH-5II , or a movement along a path indicated by arrow 5108 of FIGS. 5
- the device scrolls ( 906 ) the content 592 to present a second portion of the content on the display in accordance with the first movement of the first contact. For example, content 592 is scrolled from the first portion of the content displayed in FIG. 5DD to present a second portion of the content in FIG. 5EE . Scrolling to present a second portion of the content 592 is also described with regard to FIGS. 5II, and 5MM .
- the device detects ( 908 ) an increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
- the intensity of the contact increases above contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 , as indicated by intensity meter 530 , during movement of the contact along a path indicated by arrow 598 .
- the intensity of the contact increases above light press intensity threshold IT L , as indicated by intensity meter 530 , during movement of the contact along a path indicated by arrow 5102 .
- FIGS. 5LL-5MM the intensity of the contact increases above light press intensity threshold IT L , as indicated by intensity meter 530 , during movement of the contact along a path indicated by arrow 5108 .
- the device After detecting the increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, the device detects ( 910 ) a lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface. For example, lift-off of the contact is detected, as indicated at FIG. 5FF , following the movement of the contact indicated in FIGS. 5DD-5EE . Lift-off of the contact is also detected, as indicated at FIG. 5JJ , following the movement of the contact indicated in FIGS. 5HH-5II . Lift-off of the contact is also detected, as indicated at FIG. 5NN , following the movement of the contact indicated in FIGS. 5LL-5MM .
- the device moves ( 912 ) the content 592 on the display by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic intensity of the first contact and a characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact.
- content 592 moves in response to lift-off of the contact from a position as indicated at FIG. 5FF to a different position as indicated 5 GG. Movement of content 592 in response to lift-off is additionally illustrated at FIGS. 5JJ-5KK and 5NN-5OO .
- the characteristic speed of the first movement is a first speed and moving the content 592 on the display by an amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes ( 914 ): in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity is a first intensity (e.g., a characteristic intensity of the contact below light press intensity threshold IT L , as indicated in FIGS. 5DD-5EE ), moving the content 592 by a first amount (e.g. movement of content 592 from a position at lift-off as shown in FIG. 5FF to a moved position as shown in FIG.
- a first intensity e.g., a characteristic intensity of the contact below light press intensity threshold IT L , as indicated in FIGS. 5DD-5EE
- moving the content 592 by a first amount e.g. movement of content 592 from a position at lift-off as shown in FIG. 5FF to a moved position as shown in FIG.
- the characteristic intensity is a second intensity that is different from the first intensity (e.g., an characteristic intensity of the contact above light press intensity threshold IT L , as indicated in FIGS. 5HH-5II ), moving the content by a second amount that is different from the first amount (e.g. movement of content 592 from a position at lift-off as shown in FIG. 5JJ to a moved position as shown in FIG. 5KK ).
- the amount of movement of content 592 as shown in FIGS. 5FF-5GG is less than the amount of movement of content 592 as shown in FIGS. 5JJ-5KK .
- the first intensity is greater than the second intensity and the first amount of movement is greater than the second amount of movement ( 916 ).
- the first intensity has a characteristic intensity of the contact above a light press intensity threshold IT L (e.g., as indicated in FIGS. 5HH-5II ), the second intensity characteristic intensity of the contact above hint intensity threshold IT H and below light press intensity threshold IT L (e.g., as indicated in FIGS. 5DD-5EE ), and the first amount of movement of content 592 (e.g., as indicated in FIGS. 5JJ-5KK ) is greater than the second amount of movement of content 593 (e.g., as indicated in FIGS. 5FF-5GG ).
- the first intensity is less than the second intensity and the first amount of movement is greater than the second amount of movement ( 918 ).
- moving the content 592 on the display by an amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes ( 920 ) setting a simulated friction based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact (e.g., decreasing the simulated friction for larger characteristic intensity values). For example, in accordance with a contact that has a characteristic intensity above light press intensity threshold IT L prior to lift-off (e.g., as indicated in FIGS. 5HH-5II ), a first simulated friction effect is set, causing a reduction in the velocity of the movement of content 592 from velocity v3 (as indicated in FIG. 5JJ ) to velocity v1 (as indicated in FIG. 5KK ).
- a second simulated friction effect is set, causing a reduction in the velocity of the movement of content 592 from velocity v1 (as indicated in FIG. 5FF ) to velocity v2 (as indicated in FIG. 5GG ).
- the first simulated friction set when the larger characteristic intensity value of FIG. 5HH-5II is detected is decreased in comparison with the second simulated friction set when the smaller characteristic intensity value of 5 DD- 5 EE is detected.
- moving the content 592 on the display by an amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes ( 922 ) setting a simulated inertia based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact (e.g., decreasing the simulated inertia for larger characteristic intensity values).
- moving the content on the display by an amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes ( 924 ) setting an initial speed of movement for moving the content based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact (e.g., increasing the initial speed for larger characteristic intensity values). For example, in accordance with a contact that has a characteristic intensity above light press intensity threshold IT L prior to lift-off (e.g., as indicated in FIGS. 5HH-5II ), an initial speed is v3 (as indicated in FIG. 5JJ ).
- an initial speed is v1 (as indicated in FIG. 5FF ).
- v3 is greater than v1.
- moving the content 592 on the display by an amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes ( 926 ): determining an initial speed (e.g., v1, v3, or v5 as indicated in FIGS.
- the characteristic intensity and the characteristic speed are intensity and speed detected a predefined time period before the lift-off.
- the characteristic intensity is determined based on a filtered intensity profile (e.g., 5 SS) and/or the characteristic speed is determined based on a filtered speed profile (e.g., 5 TT).
- a filtered intensity profile e.g., 5 SS
- the characteristic speed is determined based on a filtered speed profile (e.g., 5 TT).
- the characteristic values are values on the profiles 5116 and/or 5120 at t lift-off .
- the device in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, dynamically applies ( 928 ) a visual effect on the first portion of content 592 on the display in accordance with a current intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
- dynamically applying the visual effect includes dynamically resizing (e.g., shrinking) the content or changing a z-height (e.g., pushing the content away from the screen) of the content on the display in accordance the current intensity of the first contact.
- the visual effect is applied only temporarily when the scroll speed is below a threshold speed (e.g., before the scrolling is started and when the scrolling is just started), and the visual effect is removed when the scrolling speed reaches the threshold speed.
- the device presents ( 930 ) a scroll bar on the display, wherein the scroll bar includes a scroll position indicator 596 that indicates a respective position of a currently displayed portion of the content 592 in the content 592 ; and the device presents ( 932 ) a scroll enhancement indicator 5104 concurrently with the scroll position indicator 596 , wherein an appearance of the scroll enhancement indicator 5104 varies dynamically with a current intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., scroll enhancement indicator 5104 is shown with a first length in FIG. 5HH , when a characteristic intensity of the contact is at above light press intensity threshold IT L , and scroll enhancement indicator 5104 is shown with a second length, greater than the first length in FIG.
- scroll enhancement indicator 5104 is shown with a first length in FIG. 5HH , when a characteristic intensity of the contact is at above light press intensity threshold IT L , and scroll enhancement indicator 5104 is shown with a second length, greater than the first length in FIG.
- the scroll enhancement indicator is a shadow displayed on a side of the scroll position indicator that is opposite to the scrolling direction, and a length of the shadow dynamically changes in accordance with the intensity of the first contact, e.g., higher intensity leads to a longer shadow.
- the length of the shadow also indirectly indicates the amount of deviation (e.g., how much greater an initial scrolling speed after lift-off of contact) as compared to the case in a regular scroll action.
- the scroll bar is displayed with a normal touch intensity, and anything beyond the normal touch intensity causes the scroll enhancement indicator to appear as well.
- the device dynamically changes ( 934 ) the appearance of the scroll enhancement indicator 596 in accordance with a current scrolling speed.
- scroll enhancement indicator 5104 is shown with a first length in FIG. 5NN , when a scrolling speed is v5, and scroll enhancement indicator 5104 is shown with a second length (shorter than the first length) in FIG. 5OO , when a scrolling speed is v6 (v6 is slower than v5, as indicated by the length of arrow 5110 associated with v6 and with v5).
- the length of the shadow also indirectly indicates the amount of deviation (e.g., how much greater the current scrolling speed is as compared to the case in a regular scroll action).
- the moving the content 592 on the display by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic intensity of the first contact and a characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes ( 936 ): applying an intensity filter to an intensity profile (e.g., of FIG. 5SS ) of the first contact, wherein the intensity filter shifts the intensity profile (e.g., as shown at 5116 of FIG.
- the intensity filter is a function that skews and shifts the intensity profile to the right on a time-intensity profile
- an initial speed e.g., e.g., v1, v3, or v5 as indicated in FIGS. 5FF, 5JJ, and 5NN , respectively
- the selected intensity value is the intensity value at the time of lift-off on the shifted intensity profile (e.g., I C on 5116 of FIG. 5SS ).
- moving the content on the display by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic intensity of the first contact and a characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes ( 938 ): applying a speed filter to a speed profile (e.g., 5118 of FIG. 5TT ) of the first contact, wherein the speed filter shifts the speed profile (e.g., as shown at 5120 of FIG. 5TT ) by a second time shift past the lift-off of the first contact; determining an initial speed (e.g., v1, v3, or v5 as indicated in FIGS.
- the selected speed value is the speed value at the time of lift-off on the shifted speed profile (e.g., V C on 5120 of FIG. 5TT ). In some embodiments, the selected speed value is greater than the maximum speed of the first contact during the first movement.
- the device prior to detecting the first movement of the first contact, the device detects ( 940 ) an earlier increase in intensity of the first contact while the first contact remains stationary on the touch-sensitive surface.
- the device detects the first contact, and then detects an increase in intensity of the first contact while the first contact is stationary on the touch sensitive surface.
- the scrolling is performed in accordance with the first movement, without consideration of the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact while the first contact was stationary.
- the increase in intensity detected during the movement of the first contact is taken into consideration for the inertia scrolling performed after the lift-off of the first contact, e.g., through the use of the characteristic intensity and characteristic speed of the first contact that were detected during the first movement.
- detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact includes ( 942 ) detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above a first intensity threshold (e.g., a preview intensity threshold, such as hint intensity threshold IT H ) while a focus selector 594 is located on a first user interface element on the display, and the device performs a predefined operation associated with the first user interface element (e.g., presents a preview or a quick action menu associated with the first user interface element) in response to detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above the first intensity threshold (e.g., a preview intensity threshold) while the focus selector is located on the first user interface element on the display.
- a first intensity threshold e.g., a preview intensity threshold, such as hint intensity threshold IT H
- the device performs a predefined operation associated with the first user interface element (e.g., presents a preview or a quick action menu associated with the first user interface element) in response to detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above the first intensity threshold (e
- the device detects the first contact, and then detects an increase in intensity of the first contact above a first intensity threshold (e.g., a hint intensity threshold IT H or a preview intensity threshold) while the first contact is stationary on the touch sensitive surface 112 (and correspondingly, and while a focus selector 594 is located on a first user interface element (e.g., a user interface element that is configured to respond to different changes in contact intensity with different user interface responses (e.g., a web link or a representation of a contact, or an application icon) on the display), the device performs a predefined operation associated with the user interface element (e.g., presenting a preview of the webpage referred to in the web link, presenting a quick action menu associated with the contact, or presenting a quick action menu associated with the application icon).
- a first intensity threshold e.g., a hint intensity threshold IT H or a preview intensity threshold
- the preview or quick action menus are optionally removed and the user interface is restored to the same state as it was before the increase in contact intensity of the first contact was detected.
- the device will resume normal scrolling behavior in accordance with subsequent movement of the first contact (e.g., the first movement of the first contact) without consideration of the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact) detected while the first contact was stationary.
- the increase in intensity detected during the movement of the first contact is taken into consideration of the inertia scrolling performed after the lift-off of the first contact, e.g., through the use of the characteristic intensity and characteristic speed of the first contact that were detected during the first movement.
- the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described above with reference to method 900 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600 , 700 , 800 , and 1000 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.
- FIGS. 10A-10C are flow diagrams illustrating a method 1000 of moving content on a display in accordance with some embodiments.
- the method 1000 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300 , FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device 100 , FIG. 1A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface.
- the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display.
- the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface.
- the method 1000 provides an intuitive way to move content on a display.
- the method reduces the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user when moving content on a display, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface.
- the device presents ( 1002 ) a first portion of content 592 (e.g., “The Raven” by Edgar Allan Poe) on a display (e.g., touch screen 112 ).
- a first portion of content 592 e.g., “The Raven” by Edgar Allan Poe
- the device ( 1004 ) While presenting the first portion of the content, the device ( 1004 ): detects a first contact (e.g., a contact at a location indicated by focus selector 594 ) on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch screen 112 ); and detects a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a movement of focus selector 594 , such as a movement along a path indicated by arrow 5112 of FIGS. 5PP-5QQ ).
- a first contact e.g., a contact at a location indicated by focus selector 594
- a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface e.g., a movement of focus selector 594 , such as a movement along a path indicated by arrow 5112 of FIGS. 5PP-5QQ .
- the device detects ( 1006 ) a lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface. For example, after the movement of the contact indicated by FIGS. 5PP-5QQ , lift-off of the contact occurs as indicated in 5 RR.
- the device In response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface ( 1008 ): in accordance with a determination that the first contact had a characteristic intensity above a respective intensity threshold (e.g., a characteristic intensity above deep press intensity threshold IT D , or another statically or dynamically determined threshold) prior to the lift-off of the first contact, the device scrolls through the content to a predefined portion of the content (e.g., a beginning or an end of the content, or a next section or previous section of the content, depending on the direction of first movement). For example, as indicated in FIGS. 5PP-5QQ , a characteristic intensity of the contact increased above deep press intensity threshold IT D , as indicated by intensity meter 530 .
- a characteristic intensity of the contact increased above deep press intensity threshold IT D , as indicated by intensity meter 530 .
- the device scrolls through the content by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic speed of the first contact during the first movement (e.g., scrolling by an amount that is determined based on an initial speed of the content on lift-off of the first contact and simulated inertia and friction). For example, as shown in FIGS.
- a characteristic intensity of the contact does not increase above a deep press intensity threshold IT D , as indicated by intensity meter 530 .
- content 592 is scrolled (e.g., by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic speed of the contact during the movement along the path indicated by arrow 5108 in FIGS. 5LL-5MM ).
- the initial speed of the content is optionally determined based on a speed of the contact at a predetermined time relative to the lift-off time of the contact.
- scrolling through the content to a predefined portion of the content includes ( 1010 ) accelerating scrolling of the content to display an end portion of the content on the display.
- the accelerated scrolling to display the end portion of the content is independent of a movement speed of the first movement and/or the length of content that needs to be scrolled to reach the end portion.
- the first movement corresponds ( 1012 ) to movement toward a top portion of the display (e.g., as shown in FIG. 5QQ , the contact moves upward along a path indicated by arrow 5112 toward a top portion of display 112 ).
- scrolling through the content to a predefined portion of the content includes ( 1014 ) accelerating scrolling of the content to display a beginning portion of the content on the display.
- the accelerated scrolling to display the beginning portion of the content is independent of a movement speed of the first movement and/or the length of content that needs to be scrolled to reach the beginning portion.
- the first movement corresponds ( 1016 ) to movement toward a bottom portion of the display.
- scrolling through the content by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic speed of the first contact during the first movement includes ( 1018 ): scrolling through the content 592 by a first amount before the lift-off of the first contact (e.g., scrolling from a first position in content 592 , as shown in FIG. 5PP , to a second position in content 592 , as shown in FIG. 5QQ ); and continuing to scroll through the content by a second amount after the lift-off of the first contact (e.g., scrolling from the second position in content 592 , as shown in FIG. 5QQ , to a third position in content 592 , as shown in FIG.
- the scrolling of the content after the lift-off of the first contact is continued at an initial speed that is determined based on the characteristic speed of the first contact during the first movement. For example, during the regular scrolling, how much scrolling actually happens depends on factors such as the amount of content that can be scrolled, and the movement speed of the first contact, and does not deterministically scroll to the end or the beginning of the content.
- the device detects ( 1020 ) the increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface above the respective intensity threshold during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., the device detects the increase in intensity above deep press intensity threshold IT D , as indicated at intensity meter 530 in FIGS. 5PP-5QQ ); and in response to detecting the increase in intensity above the respective intensity threshold, the device applies a visual effect on the first portion of content on the display.
- the visual effect is an enlargement of the content, or a change in z-height of the content relative to the display plane.
- the device removes ( 1022 ) the applied visual effect on the first portion of content on the display during the scrolling through the content to the predefined portion of the content (e.g., during the accelerated scrolling of the content on the display).
- the visual effect is applied when the intensity is above the first intensity threshold, and during the period of time that the scrolling speed is accelerated to a steady state accelerated scrolling speed, and once the scrolling speed has reached the steady state accelerated scrolling speed, the previously applied visual effect is removed.
- the device applies ( 1024 ) an intensity filter to an intensity profile (e.g., of FIG. 5SS ) of the first contact, wherein the intensity filter shifts the intensity profile (e.g., as shown at 5116 of FIG. 5SS ) by a first time shift past the lift-off of the first contact; and the device determines a steady state speed for the scrolling through the content to the predefined portion of the content based on a selected intensity value on the shifted intensity profile 5116 .
- the selected intensity value is the intensity value at the time of lift-off on the shifted intensity profile (e.g., I C on 5116 of FIG. 5SS ).
- the device scrolls ( 1026 ) through the content by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic speed of the first contact during the first movement includes scrolling through the content to display a second portion of the content
- the method includes: while displaying the second portion of the content, detecting a predefined input (e.g., a tap input on the touch-sensitive surface) while a focus selector is within a predefined region (e.g., a predefined top or bottom region of the user interface that is displaying the second portion of the content) on the display; and in response to detecting the predefined input while the focus selector is within the predefined region on the display, scrolling through the content to the predefined portion of the content (e.g., a beginning or an end of the content or a next section or previous section of the content depending on whether the predefined region invoked by the predefined input (e.g., a tap input) is at the top or the bottom of the user interface displaying the second portion of the content).
- a predefined input e.g
- the user can quickly scroll to the predefined portion of the content either by a forced press and flick gesture anywhere in the displayed content, or by a tap gesture within the predefined region in the user interface, regardless of how long the content is, and where the displayed portion of the content is within the content.
- the device prior to detecting the first movement of the first contact, the device detects ( 1028 ) an earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above the respective intensity threshold while the first contact remains stationary on the touch-sensitive surface; and the device determines that the first contact had a characteristic intensity below the respective intensity threshold prior to the lift-off of the first contact in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the first contact remained below the respective intensity threshold during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
- the device detects the first contact, and before detecting the first movement of the first contact, the device detects an increase in intensity of the first contact above the first intensity threshold while the first contact is stationary on the touch sensitive surface.
- This earlier increase in intensity of the first contact does not affect the user interface responses that occur during or after subsequent movement of the first contact (e.g., the first movement) if the contact intensity had dropped below the first intensity threshold before the start of the movement.
- the device detects a movement of the first contact (e.g., the first movement of the first contact)
- the scrolling is performed without consideration of any earlier increase(s) in intensity of the first contact while the first contact was stationary.
- the device scrolls the content to the predefined portion (e.g., an end or beginning portion).
- detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact includes ( 1030 ) detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above a first intensity threshold (e.g., a preview intensity threshold) while a focus selector is located on a first user interface element on the display, and the device performs a predefined operation associated with the first user interface element (e.g., presenting a preview or a quick action menu associated with the first user interface element) in response to detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above the first intensity threshold (e.g., a preview intensity threshold) while the focus selector is located on a first user interface element on the display.
- a first intensity threshold e.g., a preview intensity threshold
- the device detects the first contact, and then detects an increase in intensity of the first contact above a first intensity threshold (e.g., a hint intensity threshold or a preview intensity threshold) while the first contact is stationary on the touch sensitive surface (and correspondingly, and while a focus selector is located on a first user interface element (e.g., a user interface element that is configured to respond to different changes in contact intensity with different user interface responses (e.g., a web link or a representation of a contact, or an application icon) on the display).
- a first intensity threshold e.g., a hint intensity threshold or a preview intensity threshold
- the device In response to this increase in intensity of the first contact above the first intensity threshold, the device performs a predefined operation associated with the user interface element (e.g., presenting a preview of the webpage referred to in the web link, presenting a quick action menu associated with the contact, or presenting a quick action menu associated with the application icon). Then, after the intensity of the first contact has decreased to below the first intensity threshold (e.g., decreased below the hint intensity threshold or preview intensity threshold) and before the first contact starts to move, the preview or quick action menus are optionally removed and the user interface is restored to the same state as it was before the increase in contact intensity of the first contact was detected.
- a predefined operation associated with the user interface element e.g., presenting a preview of the webpage referred to in the web link, presenting a quick action menu associated with the contact, or presenting a quick action menu associated with the application icon.
- the device resumes its scrolling behavior in accordance with subsequent movement of the first contact (e.g., the first movement of the first contact) without consideration of the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact detected while the first contact was stationary.
- the device scrolls the content to the predefined portion (e.g., an end or beginning portion).
- the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, animations described above with reference to method 1000 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600 , 700 , 800 , and 900 ). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.
- FIG. 11 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 1100 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments.
- the functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in FIG. 11 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.
- an electronic device includes a display unit 1102 configured to display content items; a touch-sensitive surface unit 1104 configured to receive user inputs; one or more sensor units 1106 configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104 ; and a processing unit 1108 coupled to the display unit 1102 , the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104 and the one or more sensor units 1106 .
- the processing unit 1108 includes a detecting unit 1110 , a determining unit 1112 , and a display enabling unit 1114 .
- the processing unit 1108 is configured to: enable display, on the display unit 1102 , of content of a first content item, wherein the first content item is one of a sequence of content items (e.g., with display enabling unit 1114 ); detect a user input that includes movement of a contact in a respective direction on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104 (e.g., with detecting unit 1110 ); in response to detecting the user input: in accordance with a determination that the user input meets item-switching criteria (e.g., with the determining unit 1112 ), enable the display unit 1102 to replace display of the first content item with display of a second content item in the sequence of content items (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114 ), wherein the item-switching criteria include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact is above a first intensity threshold; and, in accordance with a determination that the user input does not meet the item-switching criteria (e.g., with
- the item-switching criteria includes a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the contact exceeds the first intensity threshold after detecting at least a predetermined threshold amount of movement of the contact (e.g., with the detecting unit 1110 ).
- the processing unit 1108 is configured to: while enabling display of the first content item (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114 ), detect a second user input at a location that corresponds to a selectable affordance (e.g., with the detecting unit 1110 ), wherein the second user input includes a second contact that is stationary on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104 ; in response to detecting the second user input: in accordance with a determination that the user input occurs while a focus selector is at a location that corresponds to a selectable affordance and the movement of the contact is less than a predetermined amount (e.g., with the determining unit 1112 ), enable display of a preview area of content that corresponds to the selectable affordance overlaid on the first content item (e.g., with a display enabling unit 1114 ).
- the second content item is sequentially adjacent to the first content item and is selected based on the respective direction of the movement of the contact.
- navigating through the content of the first content item includes: in accordance with a determination that the respective direction is a first direction on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104 (e.g., with the determining unit 1112 ), scrolling the content in a first direction on the display unit 1102 (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114 ); and in accordance with a determination that the respective direction is a second direction on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104 (e.g., with the determining unit 1112 ), scrolling the content in a second direction on the display unit 1102 that is different from the first direction on the display unit 1102 (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114 ).
- navigating through the content of the first content item in accordance with the movement of the contact includes: maintaining display of a first portion of the first content item in a first user interface region on the display unit 1102 ; and navigating through a second portion of the first content item in a second user interface region on the display unit 1102 (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114 ).
- replacing display of the first content item with the second content item includes displaying a transition between the first content item and the second content item (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114 ); and the transition includes reducing a size of the first content item.
- replacing display of the first content item with the second content item includes displaying a transition between the first content item and the second content item (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114 ); and the transition includes increasing a size of the second content item.
- the sequence of content items corresponds to a plurality of electronic messages in an electronic messaging application, a plurality of web browser windows in a web browser, a plurality of applications, a plurality of digital images in a set of images, or a plurality of sets of digital images.
- the processing unit 1108 is configured to: in accordance with a determination that the user input begins at a first edge of the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104 (e.g., with the determining unit 1112 ), perform an operation that is distinct from both replacing display of the first content item with the second content item and navigating through the content of the first content item (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114 ).
- the processing unit 1108 is configured to: after replacing display of the first content item with the second content item in the sequence of content items, detect a second user input that includes movement of a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104 (e.g., with the detecting unit 1110 ); enable the display unit 1102 to, in response to detecting the second user input: in accordance with a determination that the second user input meets the item-switching criteria, replace display of the second content item with a third content item in the sequence of content items (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114 ); and in accordance with a determination that the second user input does not meet the item-switching criteria, navigate through content of the second content item in accordance with the movement of the second contact (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114 ).
- detection operation 606 and replace and navigation operations of operation 608 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170 , event recognizer 180 , and event handler 190 .
- Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112 , and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136 - 1 .
- a respective event recognizer 180 of application 136 - 1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another.
- event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event.
- Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192 .
- event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application.
- FIGS. 1A-1B it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in FIGS. 1A-1B .
- FIG. 12 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 700 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments.
- the functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in FIG. 12 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.
- an electronic device 1200 includes a display unit 1202 configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit 1204 configured to receive contacts, one or more sensor units 1206 configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit 1204 ; and a processing unit 1208 coupled with the display unit 1202 , the touch-sensitive surface unit 1204 and the one or more sensor units 1206 .
- the processing unit 1208 includes: a presenting unit 1210 , a detecting unit 1212 , a scrolling unit 1214 , a moving unit 1216 , a display enabling unit 1218 , a changing unit 1220 , an accelerating unit 1222 , a restoring unit 1224 , an inserting unit 1226 , a generating unit 1228 , and an applying unit 1230 .
- the processing unit 1208 is configured to: present (e.g., with the presenting unit 1210 ) a first portion of a list of items on the display unit; detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1212 ) a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit while the first portion of the list of items is presented on the display unit; detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1212 ) a first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit while a characteristic intensity of the contact remains below a first intensity threshold; in response to detecting the first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit while the characteristic intensity of the contact remains below the first intensity threshold, scroll (e.g., with the scrolling unit 1214 ) the list of items to present a second portion of the list of items on the display unit in accordance with the first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; while a focus selector associated with the contact is located on a first item in the second portion of the list of items presented on the display unit, detect (e.g., with the
- the processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold followed by the second movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, while the focus selector associated with the contact is located on the first item in the second portion of the list of items, change (e.g., with the changing unit 1220 ) an appearance of the first item.
- changing the appearance of the first item includes dynamically changing a size of the first item in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact.
- the processing unit is configured to: in accordance with the second movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, move (e.g., with the moving unit 1216 ) the first item by a first distance relative to a second item that is adjacent to the first item to at least partially reveal a first item slot associated with the first item on the display unit.
- moving the first item by the first distance relative to the second item that is adjacent to the first item includes: during an initial portion of the second movement of the contact, move (e.g., with the moving unit 1216 ) the first item at a slower speed than the focus selector to create a distance lag between the first item and the focus selector; and during a subsequent portion of the second movement of the contact following the initial portion of the second movement of the contact, accelerate (e.g., with the accelerating unit 1222 ) the movement of the first item to eliminate the distance lag between the first item and the focus selector.
- the processing unit is configured to: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1212 ) a lift-off of the contact upon moving the first item by the first distance relative to the second item that is adjacent to the first item; and, in accordance with a determination that the first distance is smaller than a first threshold distance, restore (e.g., with the restoring unit 1224 ) the first item into the first item slot associated with the first item on the display unit.
- the processing unit is configured to: in accordance with a determination that the first distance is greater than a first threshold distance, move (e.g., with the moving unit 1216 ) the second item into the first item slot associated with the first item to reveal a second item slot associated with the second item.
- the processing unit is configured to: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1212 ) a lift-off of the contact while the second item slot associated with the second item is revealed on the display unit; and in response to detecting the lift-off of the contact while the second item slot associated with the second item is revealed on the display unit, insert (e.g., with the inserting unit 1226 ) the first item into the second item slot.
- the processing unit is configured to: during the second movement of the contact, for a plurality of other items besides the first item in the list of items, move (e.g., with the moving unit 1216 ) a respective other item to a respective new item slot and revealing a respective previous item slot for the respective other item on the display unit.
- the processing unit is configured to: generate (e.g., with the generating unit 1228 ) a respective tactile output as the respective other item moves to the respective new item slot and reveals the respective previous item slot.
- a respective movement of the respective other item changes in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact during the second movement of the contact.
- the processing unit is configured to: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1212 ) that the first item has moved within a second threshold distance of a first end of the displayed second portion of the list of items in accordance with the second movement of the contact; and, in response to detecting that the first item has moved within the second threshold distance of the first end of the displayed second portion of the list of items, scroll (e.g., with the scrolling unit 1214 ) the list of items toward a second end of the displayed second portion of the list of items opposite the first end to enable display (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1218 ) a third portion of the list of items.
- scrolling the list of items toward the second end of the displayed second portion of the list of items opposite the first end to enable display the third portion of the list of items includes: dynamically changing (e.g., with the changing unit 1220 ) a scrolling speed of the scrolling toward the second end of the displayed second portion of the list of items in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact.
- the processing unit is configured to: apply (e.g., with the applying unit 1230 ) a transparency effect to the first item while the first item overlaps with another item in the list of items.
- detection operations 704 , 706 , and 710 ; scrolling operation 708 ; and moving operation 712 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170 , event recognizer 180 , and event handler 190 .
- Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112 , and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136 - 1 .
- a respective event recognizer 180 of application 136 - 1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another.
- event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event.
- Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192 .
- event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application.
- FIGS. 1A-1B it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in FIGS. 1A-1B .
- FIG. 13 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 1300 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments.
- the functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in FIG. 13 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.
- an electronic device 1300 includes a display unit 1302 configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit 1304 configured to receive contacts, one or more sensor units 1306 configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit 1304 ; and a processing unit 1308 coupled with the display unit 1302 , the touch-sensitive surface unit 1304 and the one or more sensor units 1306 .
- the processing unit 1308 includes: a presenting unit 1310 , a detecting unit 1312 , a translating unit 1314 , an applying unit 1316 , a removing unit 1318 , and a ceasing unit 1320 .
- the processing unit 1308 is configured to: present (e.g., with the presenting unit 1310 ) a first portion of structured content on the display unit, wherein the structured content includes a plurality of sections, and the first portion includes content from a first section of the plurality of sections; detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1312 ) a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit while the first portion of the structured content is presented on the display unit; detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1312 ) an increase in a characteristic intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit and detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1312 ) a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact and detecting the first movement of the first contact: in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a first intensity threshold, translate (e.g., with the translating unit 1314 ) the structured content to enable display of a start of
- a focus selector associated with the first contact is on the structured content.
- the processing unit in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the first movement of the first contact, is configured to apply (e.g., with the applying unit 1316 ) a visual effect on the first portion of the structured content on the display unit.
- the processing unit is configured to: remove (e.g., with the removing unit 1318 ) the applied visual effect on the first portion of the structured content on the display unit during the translating of the structured content.
- the processing unit is configured to: prior to the determination that the characteristic intensity of the first contact has increased above the first intensity threshold: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1312 ) an initial increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact; and, in response to detecting the initial increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact, concurrently present (e.g., with the presenting unit 1310 ) a scroll bar with the first portion of the structured content on the display unit, wherein the scroll bar includes a scroll position indicator that indicates a respective position of the first portion of the structured content in the structured content; and, in response to the determination that the characteristic intensity of the first contact has increased above the first intensity threshold, present (e.g., with the presenting unit 1310 ) a plurality of section indicators along with the scroll position indicator, wherein a relative ordering of the section indicators to the scroll position indicator corresponds to relative positions of the sections to the first portion of the structured content in the structured content.
- presenting the plurality of section indicators with the scroll bar includes: presenting an animation that shows the plurality of section indicators emerging from the scroll position indicator and spreading out along the scroll bar.
- the processing unit is configured to: when translating of the structured content to enable display of the start of the second section adjacent to the first section of the structured content, present (e.g., with the presenting unit 1310 ) an animation that shows the scroll position indicator hopping over a respective section indicator in the plurality of section indicators.
- the processing unit is configured to: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1312 ) a lift-off of the first contact, and, in response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact, cease (e.g., with the ceasing unit 1320 ) to display the scroll bar, the scroll position indicator, and the plurality of section indicators.
- the processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact, present (e.g., with the presenting unit 1310 ) an animation that shows the plurality of section indicators moving into the scroll position indicator before ceasing the display of the scroll position indicator.
- the structured content is translated to enable display of the start of the second section adjacent to the first section of the structured content at the predefined location on the display unit in accordance with a determination that the first movement of the first contact exceeds a first threshold distance.
- the characteristic intensity of the first contact is below the first intensity threshold after the first movement of the first contact exceeds the first threshold distance.
- the sections in the structured content are mapped to a plurality of vertical positions on the display unit, and the first movement of the first contact from a first position of the plurality of positions to a second position of the plurality of positions results in a translation of the structured content from one section of the structured document that corresponds to the first position on the display unit to another section of the structured content that corresponds to the second position on the display unit.
- detection operations 804 and 806 and translation operations 808 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170 , event recognizer 180 , and event handler 190 .
- Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112 , and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136 - 1 .
- a respective event recognizer 180 of application 136 - 1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another.
- event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event.
- Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192 .
- event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application.
- FIGS. 1A-1B it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in FIGS. 1A-1B .
- FIG. 14 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 1400 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments.
- the functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in FIG. 14 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.
- an electronic device 1400 includes a display unit 1402 configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit 1404 configured to receive contacts, one or more sensor units 1406 configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit 1404 ; and a processing unit 1408 coupled with the display unit 1402 , the touch-sensitive surface unit 1404 and the one or more sensor units 1406 .
- the processing unit 1408 includes: a presenting unit 1410 , a detecting unit 1412 , a scrolling unit 1414 , a moving unit 1416 , an applying unit 1418 , a changing unit 1420 , and a performing unit 1422 .
- the processing unit 1408 is configured to: present (e.g., with the presenting unit 1410 ) a first portion of content on the display unit; while presenting the first portion of the content on the display unit: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1412 ) a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1412 ) a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; in response to detecting the first movement of the first contact, scroll (e.g., with the scrolling unit 1414 ) the content to present a second portion of the content on the display unit in accordance with the first movement of the first contact; detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1412 ) an increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; after detecting the increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, detect (e.g.
- the characteristic speed of the first movement is a first speed and moving the content on the display unit by an amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes: in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity is a first intensity, moving (e.g., with the moving unit 1416 ) the content by a first amount; and, in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity is a second intensity that is different from the first intensity, moving (e.g., with the moving unit 1416 ) the content by a second amount that is different from the first amount.
- the first intensity is greater than the second intensity and the first amount of movement is greater than the second amount of movement.
- the first intensity is less than the second intensity and the first amount of movement is greater than the second amount of movement.
- moving the content on the display unit by an amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes setting a simulated friction based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact.
- moving the content on the display unit by an amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes setting a simulated inertia based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact.
- moving the content on the display unit by an amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes setting an initial speed of movement for moving the content based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact.
- moving the content on the display unit by an amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes: determining an initial speed for continued scrolling after the lift-off of the first contact based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact; and continuing the scrolling of the content after the lift-off of the first contact with the initial speed determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact.
- the processing unit is configured to in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, dynamically apply (e.g., with the applying unit 1418 ) a visual effect on the first portion of content on the display unit in accordance with a current intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit.
- the processing unit is configured to: present (e.g., with the presenting unit 1418 ) a scroll bar on the display unit, wherein the scroll bar includes a scroll position indicator that indicates a respective position of a currently displayed portion of the content in the content; and present (e.g., with the presenting unit 1418 ) a scroll enhancement indicator concurrently with the scroll position indicator, wherein an appearance of the scroll enhancement indicator varies dynamically with a current intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit.
- the processing unit is configured to: while moving the content on the display unit by the amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact, dynamically change (e.g., with the changing unit 1420 ) the appearance of the scroll enhancement indicator in accordance with a current scrolling speed.
- moving the content on the display unit by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic intensity of the first contact and a characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes: applying an intensity filter to an intensity profile of the first contact, wherein the intensity filter shifts the intensity profile by a first time shift past the lift-off of the first contact; and determining an initial speed for moving the content on the display unit after the lift-off of the first contact based on a selected intensity value on the filtered intensity profile.
- moving the content on the display unit by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic intensity of the first contact and a characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes: applying a speed filter to a speed profile of the first contact, wherein the speed filter shifts the speed profile by a second time shift past the lift-off of the first contact; determining an initial speed for moving the content on the display unit after the lift-off of the first contact based on a selected speed value on the shifted speed profile; and moving the content on the display unit with the determined initial speed after the lift-off of the first contact.
- the processing unit is configured to: prior to detecting the first movement of the first contact, detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1412 ) an earlier increase in intensity of the first contact while the first contact remains stationary on the touch-sensitive surface unit.
- detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact includes detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above a first intensity threshold while a focus selector is located on a first user interface element on the display unit, and the processing unit is configured to perform (e.g., with the performing unit 1422 ) a predefined operation associated with the first user interface element in response to detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above the first intensity threshold while the focus selector is located on the first user interface element on the display unit.
- detection operations 904 , 908 , and 910 , scrolling operation 906 , and moving operation 912 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170 , event recognizer 180 , and event handler 190 .
- Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112 , and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136 - 1 .
- a respective event recognizer 180 of application 136 - 1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another.
- event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event.
- Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192 .
- event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application.
- FIGS. 1A-1B it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in FIGS. 1A-1B .
- FIG. 15 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 1500 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments.
- the functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in FIG. 15 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.
- an electronic device 1500 includes a display unit 1402 configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit 1504 configured to receive contacts, one or more sensor units 1506 configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit 1504 ; and a processing unit 1508 coupled with the display unit 1502 , the touch-sensitive surface unit 1504 and the one or more sensor units 1506 .
- the processing unit 1508 includes: a presenting unit 1510 , a detecting unit 1512 , scrolling unit 1514 , an applying unit 1516 , a removing unit 1518 , a determining unit 1520 , and a performing unit 1522 .
- the processing unit 1508 is configured to: present (e.g., with the presenting unit 1510 ); a first portion of content on the display unit; while presenting the first portion of the content: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1512 ) a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1512 ) a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1512 ) a lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and, in response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit: in accordance with a determination that the first contact had a characteristic intensity above a respective intensity threshold prior to the lift-off of the first contact, scroll (e.g., with the scrolling unit 1514 ) through the content to a predefined portion of the content; and in accordance with a determination that the first contact had
- scrolling through the content to a predefined portion of the content includes accelerating scrolling of the content to enable display of an end portion of the content on the display unit.
- the first movement corresponds to movement toward a top portion of the display unit.
- scrolling through the content to a predefined portion of the content includes accelerating scrolling of the content to enable display of a beginning portion of the content on the display unit.
- the first movement corresponds to movement toward a bottom portion of the display unit.
- scrolling through the content by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic speed of the first contact during the first movement includes: scrolling through the content by a first amount before the lift-off of the first contact; and continuing to scroll through the content by a second amount after the lift-off of the first contact, wherein the scrolling of the content after the lift-off of the first contact is continued at an initial speed that is determined based on the characteristic speed of the first contact during the first movement.
- the processing unit is configured to: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1512 ) the increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit above the respective intensity threshold during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and in response to detecting the increase in intensity above the respective intensity threshold, apply (e.g., with the applying unit 1516 ) a visual effect on the first portion of content on the display unit.
- the processing unit is configured to remove (e.g., with the removing unit 1518 ) the applied visual effect on the first portion of content on the display unit during the scrolling through the content to the predefined portion of the content.
- the processing unit is configured to: apply (e.g., with the applying unit 1516 ) an intensity filter to an intensity profile of the first contact, wherein the intensity filter shifts the intensity profile by a first time shift past the lift-off of the first contact; and determine (e.g., with the determining unit 1520 ) a steady state speed for the scrolling through the content to the predefined portion of the content based on a selected intensity value on the shifted intensity profile.
- scrolling through the content by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic speed of the first contact during the first movement includes scrolling through the content to enable display of a second portion of the content
- the processing unit is configured to: while displaying the second portion of the content, detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1512 ) a predefined input while a focus selector is within a predefined region on the display unit; and in response to detecting the predefined input while the focus selector is within the predefined region on the display unit, scroll (e.g., with the scrolling unit 1514 ) through the content to the predefined portion of the content.
- the processing unit is configured to: prior to detecting the first movement of the first contact, detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1512 ) an earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above the respective intensity threshold while the first contact remains stationary on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and determine (e.g., with the determining unit 1520 ) that the first contact had a characteristic intensity below the respective intensity threshold prior to the lift-off of the first contact in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the first contact remained below the respective intensity threshold during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit.
- detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact includes detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above a first intensity threshold while a focus selector is located on a first user interface element on the display unit, and the processing unit is configured to perform (e.g., with the performing unit 1522 ) a predefined operation associated with the first user interface element in response to detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above the first intensity threshold while the focus selector is located on a first user interface element on the display unit.
- detection operations 1004 , 1006 and scrolling operations 1008 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170 , event recognizer 180 , and event handler 190 .
- Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112 , and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136 - 1 .
- a respective event recognizer 180 of application 136 - 1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186 , and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another.
- event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event.
- Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192 .
- event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application.
- FIGS. 1A-1B it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in FIGS. 1A-1B .
Abstract
An electronic device displays content of a first content item, wherein the first content item is one of a sequence of content items. The device detects a user input that includes movement of a contact in a respective direction on the touch-sensitive surface. In response to detecting the user input: in accordance with a determination that the user input meets item-switching criteria, the device replaces display of the first content item with display of a second content item in the sequence of content items, wherein the item-switching criteria include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact is above a first intensity threshold; and, in accordance with a determination that the user input does not meet the item-switching criteria, the device navigates through the content of the first content item in accordance with the movement of the contact.
Description
- This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/354,035, filed Mar. 14, 2019, which is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/009,688, filed Jan. 28, 2016, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,235,035, which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/235,490, filed Sep. 30, 2015, and U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/203,387, filed Aug. 10, 2015, all of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entireties.
- This relates generally to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces, including but not limited to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces used for navigating and manipulating displayed content.
- The use of touch-sensitive surfaces as input devices for computers and other electronic computing devices has increased significantly in recent years. Exemplary touch-sensitive surfaces include touchpads and touch-screen displays. Such surfaces are widely used to navigate and manipulate content in user interfaces on a display.
- Exemplary types of navigation and manipulation include scrolling, zooming, and adjusting the position and/or size of one or more user interface objects, as well as reordering user interface objects. Exemplary user interface objects include digital images, video, text, icons, control elements such as buttons, and other graphics. A user will, in some circumstances, need to navigate and manipulate content in a reader application (e.g., iBooks from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.), a file management program (e.g., Finder from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.), an image management application (e.g., Aperture, iPhoto, Photos from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.), a digital content (e.g., videos and music) management application (e.g., iTunes from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.), a drawing application, a presentation application (e.g., Keynote from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.), a word processing application (e.g., Pages from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.), or a spreadsheet application (e.g., Numbers from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.).
- But existing methods for performing these navigations and manipulations are cumbersome and inefficient. In addition, these methods take longer than necessary, thereby wasting energy. This latter consideration is particularly important in battery-operated devices.
- Accordingly, there is a need for electronic devices with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for content navigation and manipulation. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods for content navigation and manipulation. Such methods and interfaces reduce the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges.
- The above deficiencies and other problems associated with user interfaces for electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces are reduced or eliminated by the disclosed devices. In some embodiments, the device is a desktop computer. In some embodiments, the device is portable (e.g., a notebook computer, tablet computer, or handheld device). In some embodiments, the device is a personal electronic device (e.g., a wearable electronic device, such as a watch). In some embodiments, the device has a touchpad. In some embodiments, the device has a touch-sensitive display (also known as a “touch screen” or “touch-screen display”). In some embodiments, the device has a graphical user interface (GUI), one or more processors, memory and one or more modules, programs or sets of instructions stored in the memory for performing multiple functions. In some embodiments, the user interacts with the GUI primarily through stylus and/or finger contacts and gestures on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the functions optionally include document reading, image editing, drawing, presenting, word processing, spreadsheet making, game playing, telephoning, video conferencing, e-mailing, instant messaging, workout support, digital photographing, digital videoing, web browsing, digital music playing, note taking, and/or digital video playing. Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a non-transitory computer readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors.
- In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying, on the display, content of a first content item, wherein the first content item is one of a sequence of content items. The device detects a user input that includes movement of a contact in a respective direction on the touch-sensitive surface. In response to detecting the user input: in accordance with a determination that the user input meets item-switching criteria, the device replaces display of the first content item with display of a second content item in the sequence of content items, wherein the item-switching criteria include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact is above a first intensity threshold; and, in accordance with a determination that the user input does not meet the item-switching criteria, the device navigates through the content of the first content item in accordance with the movement of the contact.
- In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: presenting a first portion of a list of items on the display. The device detects a contact on the touch-sensitive surface while the first portion of the list of items is presented on the display and a first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface while a characteristic intensity of the contact remains below a first intensity threshold. In response to detecting the first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface while the characteristic intensity of the contact remains below the first intensity threshold, the device scrolls the list of items to present a second portion of the list of items on the display in accordance with the first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. While a focus selector associated with the contact is located on a first item in the second portion of the list of items presented on the display, the device detects an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold followed by a second movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold followed by the second movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface, the device moves the first item relative to other items in the second portion of the list of items presented on the display in accordance with the second movement of the contact.
- In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: presenting a first portion of structured content on the display. The structured content includes a plurality of sections, and the first portion includes content from a first section of the plurality of sections. The device detects a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while the first portion of the structured content is presented on the display. The device detects an increase in a characteristic intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface and detects a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact and detecting the first movement of the first contact: in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a first intensity threshold, the device translates the structured content to display a start of a second section adjacent to the first section of the structured content at a predefined location on the display; and in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact does not increase above the first intensity threshold, the device translates the structured content in accordance with a magnitude of the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
- In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: presenting a first portion of content on the display. While presenting the first portion of the content on the display, the device detects a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface and detects a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In response to detecting the first movement of the first contact, the device scrolls the content to present a second portion of the content on the display in accordance with the first movement of the first contact. The device detects an increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface. After detecting the increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, the device detects a lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, the device moves the content on the display by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic intensity of the first contact and a characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact.
- In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: presenting a first portion of content on the display. While presenting the first portion of the content, the device detects a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface and detects a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The device detects a lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface: in accordance with a determination that the first contact had a characteristic intensity above a respective intensity threshold prior to the lift-off of the first contact, the device scrolls through the content to a predefined portion of the content; and in accordance with a determination that the first contact had a characteristic intensity below the respective intensity threshold prior to the lift-off of the first contact, the device scrolls through the content by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic speed of the first contact during the first movement.
- In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts, one or more sensor units to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to: enable display, on the display unit, of content of a first content item, wherein the first content item is one of a sequence of content items; detect a user input that includes movement of a contact in a respective direction on the touch-sensitive surface unit; in response to detecting the user input: in accordance with a determination that the user input meets item-switching criteria, enable the display unit to replace display of the first content item with display of a second content item in the sequence of content items, wherein the item-switching criteria include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact is above a first intensity threshold; and, in accordance with a determination that the user input does not meet the item-switching criteria, enable the display unit to navigate through the content of the first content item in accordance with the movement of the contact.
- In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts, one or more sensor units to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to: present a first portion of a list of items on the display unit; detect a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit while the first portion of the list of items is presented on the display unit; detect a first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit while a characteristic intensity of the contact remains below a first intensity threshold; in response to detecting the first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit while the characteristic intensity of the contact remains below the first intensity threshold, scroll the list of items to present a second portion of the list of items on the display unit in accordance with the first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; while a focus selector associated with the contact is located on a first item in the second portion of the list of items presented on the display unit, detect an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold followed by a second movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold followed by the second movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, move the first item relative to other items in the second portion of the list of items presented on the display unit in accordance with the second movement of the contact.
- In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts, one or more sensor units to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to: present a first portion of structured content on the display unit, wherein the structured content includes a plurality of sections, and the first portion includes content from a first section of the plurality of sections; detect a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit while the first portion of the structured content is presented on the display unit; detect an increase in a characteristic intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit and detecting a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact and detecting the first movement of the first contact: in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a first intensity threshold, translate the structured content to enable display of a start of a second section adjacent to the first section of the structured content at a predefined location on the display unit; and, in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact does not increase above the first intensity threshold, translate the structured content in accordance with a magnitude of the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit.
- In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts, one or more sensor units to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to: present a first portion of content on the display unit; while presenting the first portion of the content on the display unit: detect a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and detect a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; in response to detecting the first movement of the first contact, scroll the content to present a second portion of the content on the display unit in accordance with the first movement of the first contact; detect an increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; after detecting the increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, detect a lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and, in response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, move the content on the display unit by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic intensity of the first contact and a characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact.
- In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts, one or more sensor units to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to: present a first portion of content on the display unit; while presenting the first portion of the content: detect a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and detect a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; detect a lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and, in response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit: in accordance with a determination that the first contact had a characteristic intensity above a respective intensity threshold prior to the lift-off of the first contact, scroll through the content to a predefined portion of the content; and in accordance with a determination that the first contact had a characteristic intensity below the respective intensity threshold prior to the lift-off of the first contact, scroll through the content by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic speed of the first contact during the first movement.
- In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, one or more processors, memory, and one or more programs; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors and the one or more programs include instructions for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, a computer readable storage medium has stored therein instructions which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform or cause performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, a graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory includes one or more of the elements displayed in any of the methods described herein, which are updated in response to inputs, as described in any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes: a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface; and means for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, an information processing apparatus, for use in an electronic device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, includes means for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein.
- Thus, electronic devices with displays, touch-sensitive surfaces and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for content navigation and manipulation, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace conventional methods for content navigation and manipulation.
- For a better understanding of the various described embodiments, reference should be made to the Description of Embodiments below, in conjunction with the following drawings in which like reference numerals refer to corresponding parts throughout the figures.
-
FIG. 1A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments. -
FIG. 1B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. -
FIG. 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device having a touch screen in accordance with some embodiments. -
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. -
FIG. 4A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device in accordance with some embodiments. -
FIG. 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display in accordance with some embodiments. -
FIGS. 4C-4E illustrate exemplary dynamic intensity thresholds in accordance with some embodiments. -
FIGS. 5A-5TT illustrate exemplary user interfaces for navigating within and between content items in accordance with some embodiments. -
FIGS. 6A-6B are flow diagrams illustrating a method of navigating within and between content items in accordance with some embodiments. -
FIGS. 7A-7C are flow diagrams illustrating a method of reordering list items in accordance with some embodiments. -
FIGS. 8A-8C are flow diagrams illustrating a method of navigating structured content in accordance with some embodiments. -
FIGS. 9A-9D are flow diagrams illustrating a method of variable movement of content in accordance with some embodiments. -
FIGS. 10A-10C are flow diagrams illustrating a method of scrolling to a predefined portion of content in accordance with some embodiments. -
FIGS. 11-15 are functional block diagrams of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments. - Many electronic devices use graphical user interfaces to display user interface objects (e.g., content items). There is often a need to navigate the user interface objects, the position of one or more user interface objects with respect to the position of a different user interface object, or a component of the user interface object with respect to another component of the user interface object. Thus, there is a need to manipulate user interface objects in a fast, efficient, and convenient manner on an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface.
- Many electronic devices have graphical user interfaces that present lists of items such as digital content, bookmarks, locations (e.g., locations for which weather information is displayed) folders and/or other items. A user may need to move an item in a list to a different location in a list. For example, a user may reorder a playlist of digital content to change a location of a particular content item within the playlist. Here, methods are disclosed that streamline list reordering by enabling a user to use the same input gesture for list scrolling and list reordering functions. The function resulting from a gesture depends on a characteristic intensity of a contact in the gesture. Providing different functions resulting from the same input, based on an intensity component of the input, increases the range of controls available to a user.
- Many electronic devices have graphical user interfaces with features for navigating structured content, such as graphical user interfaces for reader applications and other applications for displaying content. A user may need to access a start of a next section following a currently displayed section (or a prior section preceding the currently displayed section) of structured content. Some methods for accessing adjacent sections require a user to navigate using a menu or a slider control. With conventional scrolling using a slider control, the distance of the movement of the contact is closely correlated with the amount of content scrolling (e.g., lines, pages, etc.) that is performed. Here, methods are disclosed that streamline the structured content navigation process by allowing a user to translate structured content directly to an adjacent section using a defined input (regardless of the number of pages in the current section). Additionally, the user is enabled to translate either to an adjacent section or in accordance with a magnitude of movement of a contact, depending on a characteristic intensity of a contact in the input.
- Many electronic devices have graphical user interfaces with features for scrolling through content, such as graphical user interfaces for reader applications and for other applications for displaying content. A user may need to scroll through content at different speeds at various times (e.g., in order to scroll through different amounts of content). With conventional scrolling, the distance of the movement of a contact is closely correlated with the movement of the contact before and after liftoff of the contact. Here, methods are disclosed that provide scrolling movement that changes in accordance with features of a contact in the input, including a characteristic intensity of the contact.
- Many electronic devices have graphical user interfaces with features for scrolling through content, such as graphical user interfaces for reader applications and for other applications for displaying content. A user may need to scroll to a predefined portion of content. Some methods for accessing a portion of content require a user to continually scroll until the portion of the content is reached. Here, methods are disclosed that provide movement-based scrolling and scrolling to a predefined portion of content in accordance with a characteristic intensity of a contact in an input.
- Below,
FIGS. 1A-1B, 2, and 3 provide a description of exemplary devices.FIGS. 4A-4B and 5A-5TT illustrate exemplary user interfaces for content navigation and manipulation.FIGS. 6A-6B illustrate a flow diagram of a method of navigating within and between content items.FIGS. 7A-7C illustrate a flow diagram of a method of reordering list items.FIGS. 8A-8C illustrate a flow diagram of a method of navigating structured content.FIGS. 9A-9D illustrate a flow diagram of a method of variable movement of content.FIGS. 10A-10C illustrate a flow diagram of a method of scrolling to a predefined portion of content. The user interfaces inFIGS. 5A-5TT are used to illustrate the processes inFIGS. 6A-6B, 7A-7C, 8A-8C, 9A-9D, and 10A-10C . - Reference will now be made in detail to embodiments, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings. In the following detailed description, numerous specific details are set forth in order to provide a thorough understanding of the various described embodiments. However, it will be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art that the various described embodiments may be practiced without these specific details. In other instances, well-known methods, procedures, components, circuits, and networks have not been described in detail so as not to unnecessarily obscure aspects of the embodiments.
- It will also be understood that, although the terms first, second, etc. are, in some instances, used herein to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first contact could be termed a second contact, and, similarly, a second contact could be termed a first contact, without departing from the scope of the various described embodiments. The first contact and the second contact are both contacts, but they are not the same contact, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.
- The terminology used in the description of the various described embodiments herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting. As used in the description of the various described embodiments and the appended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will also be understood that the term “and/or” as used herein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. It will be further understood that the terms “includes,” “including,” “comprises,” and/or “comprising,” when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof.
- As used herein, the term “if” is, optionally, construed to mean “when” or “upon” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting,” depending on the context. Similarly, the phrase “if it is determined” or “if [a stated condition or event] is detected” is, optionally, construed to mean “upon determining” or “in response to determining” or “upon detecting [the stated condition or event]” or “in response to detecting [the stated condition or event],” depending on the context.
- Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, and associated processes for using such devices are described. In some embodiments, the device is a portable communications device, such as a mobile telephone, that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions. Exemplary embodiments of portable multifunction devices include, without limitation, the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. Other portable electronic devices, such as laptops or tablet computers with touch-sensitive surfaces (e.g., touch-screen displays and/or touchpads), are, optionally, used. It should also be understood that, in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communications device, but is a desktop computer with a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-screen display and/or a touchpad).
- In the discussion that follows, an electronic device that includes a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. It should be understood, however, that the electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse and/or a joystick.
- The device typically supports a variety of applications, such as one or more of the following: a note taking application, a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a website creation application, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephone application, a video conferencing application, an e-mail application, an instant messaging application, a workout support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video camera application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application, and/or a digital video player application.
- The various applications that are executed on the device optionally use at least one common physical user-interface device, such as the touch-sensitive surface. One or more functions of the touch-sensitive surface as well as corresponding information displayed on the device are, optionally, adjusted and/or varied from one application to the next and/or within a respective application. In this way, a common physical architecture (such as the touch-sensitive surface) of the device optionally supports the variety of applications with user interfaces that are intuitive and transparent to the user.
- Attention is now directed toward embodiments of portable devices with touch-sensitive displays.
FIG. 1A is a block diagram illustrating portablemultifunction device 100 with touch-sensitive display system 112 in accordance with some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display system 112 is sometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience, and is sometimes simply called a touch-sensitive display.Device 100 includes memory 102 (which optionally includes one or more computer readable storage mediums),memory controller 122, one or more processing units (CPUs) 120, peripherals interface 118,RF circuitry 108,audio circuitry 110,speaker 111,microphone 113, input/output (I/O) subsystem 106, other input orcontrol devices 116, andexternal port 124.Device 100 optionally includes one or moreoptical sensors 164.Device 100 optionally includes one ormore intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensity of contacts on device 100 (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100).Device 100 optionally includes one or moretactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs on device 100 (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 ofdevice 100 ortouchpad 355 of device 300). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses orsignal lines 103. - As used in the specification and claims, the term “tactile output” refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user's sense of touch. For example, in situations where the device or the component of the device is in contact with a surface of a user that is sensitive to touch (e.g., a finger, palm, or other part of a user's hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or the component of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad) is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a “down click” or “up click” of a physical actuator button. In some cases, a user will feel a tactile sensation such as an “down click” or “up click” even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user's movements. As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as “roughness” of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users. Thus, when a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an “up click,” a “down click,” “roughness”), unless otherwise stated, the generated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that will generate the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user.
- It should be appreciated that
device 100 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and thatdevice 100 optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown inFIG. 1A are implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or a combination thereof, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits. -
Memory 102 optionally includes high-speed random access memory and optionally also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Access tomemory 102 by other components ofdevice 100, such as CPU(s) 120 and theperipherals interface 118, is, optionally, controlled bymemory controller 122. - Peripherals interface 118 can be used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU(s) 120 and
memory 102. The one ormore processors 120 run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored inmemory 102 to perform various functions fordevice 100 and to process data. - In some embodiments, peripherals interface 118, CPU(s) 120, and
memory controller 122 are, optionally, implemented on a single chip, such aschip 104. In some other embodiments, they are, optionally, implemented on separate chips. - RF (radio frequency)
circuitry 108 receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals.RF circuitry 108 converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals.RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth.RF circuitry 108 optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication. The wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSDPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), long term evolution (LTE), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11ac, IEEE 802.11ax, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and/or IEEE 802.11n), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, a protocol for e-mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS)), and/or Short Message Service (SMS), or any other suitable communication protocol, including communication protocols not yet developed as of the filing date of this document. -
Audio circuitry 110,speaker 111, andmicrophone 113 provide an audio interface between a user anddevice 100.Audio circuitry 110 receives audio data fromperipherals interface 118, converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal tospeaker 111.Speaker 111 converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves.Audio circuitry 110 also receives electrical signals converted bymicrophone 113 from sound waves.Audio circuitry 110 converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface 118 for processing. Audio data is, optionally, retrieved from and/or transmitted tomemory 102 and/orRF circuitry 108 byperipherals interface 118. In some embodiments,audio circuitry 110 also includes a headset jack (e.g., 212,FIG. 2 ). The headset jack provides an interface betweenaudio circuitry 110 and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone). - I/O subsystem 106 couples input/output peripherals on
device 100, such as touch-sensitive display system 112 and other input orcontrol devices 116, withperipherals interface 118. I/O subsystem 106 optionally includesdisplay controller 156,optical sensor controller 158,intensity sensor controller 159,haptic feedback controller 161, and one ormore input controllers 160 for other input or control devices. The one ormore input controllers 160 receive/send electrical signals from/to other input orcontrol devices 116. The other input orcontrol devices 116 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth. In some alternate embodiments, input controller(s) 160 are, optionally, coupled with any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, infrared port, USB port, stylus, and/or a pointer device such as a mouse. The one or more buttons (e.g., 208,FIG. 2 ) optionally include an up/down button for volume control ofspeaker 111 and/ormicrophone 113. The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g., 206,FIG. 2 ). - Touch-
sensitive display system 112 provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and a user.Display controller 156 receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch-sensitive display system 112. Touch-sensitive display system 112 displays visual output to the user. The visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed “graphics”). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output corresponds to user interface objects. As used herein, the term “affordance” refers to a user□interactive graphical user interface object (e.g., graphical user interface object that is configured to respond to inputs directed toward the graphical user interface object). Examples of user□interactive graphical user interface objects include, without limitation, a button, slider, icon, selectable menu item, switch, or other user interface control. - Touch-
sensitive display system 112 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact. Touch-sensitive display system 112 and display controller 156 (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory 102) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch-sensitive display system 112 and converts the detected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages or images) that are displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112. In an exemplary embodiment, a point of contact between touch-sensitive display system 112 and the user corresponds to a finger of the user or a stylus. - Touch-
sensitive display system 112 optionally uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies are used in other embodiments. Touch-sensitive display system 112 anddisplay controller 156 optionally detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch-sensitive display system 112. In an exemplary embodiment, projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. - Touch-
sensitive display system 112 optionally has a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen video resolution is in excess of 400 dpi (e.g., 500 dpi, 800 dpi, or greater). The user optionally makes contact with touch-sensitive display system 112 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user. - In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen,
device 100 optionally includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating particular functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is, optionally, a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from touch-sensitive display system 112 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen. -
Device 100 also includespower system 162 for powering the various components.Power system 162 optionally includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light-emitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices. -
Device 100 optionally also includes one or moreoptical sensors 164.FIG. 1A shows an optical sensor coupled withoptical sensor controller 158 in I/O subsystem 106. Optical sensor(s) 164 optionally include charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors. Optical sensor(s) 164 receive light from the environment, projected through one or more lens, and converts the light to data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module 143 (also called a camera module), optical sensor(s) 164 optionally capture still images and/or video. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the back ofdevice 100, opposite touch-sensitive display system 112 on the front of the device, so that the touch screen is enabled for use as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, another optical sensor is located on the front of the device so that the user's image is obtained (e.g., for selfies, for videoconferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen, etc.). -
Device 100 optionally also includes one or morecontact intensity sensors 165.FIG. 1A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled withintensity sensor controller 159 in I/O subsystem 106. Contact intensity sensor(s) 165 optionally include one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). Contact intensity sensor(s) 165 receive contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back ofdevice 100, opposite touch-screen display system 112 which is located on the front ofdevice 100. -
Device 100 optionally also includes one ormore proximity sensors 166.FIG. 1A showsproximity sensor 166 coupled withperipherals interface 118. Alternately,proximity sensor 166 is coupled withinput controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106. In some embodiments, the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch-sensitive display system 112 when the multifunction device is placed near the user's ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call). -
Device 100 optionally also includes one or moretactile output generators 167.FIG. 1A shows a tactile output generator coupled withhaptic feedback controller 161 in I/O subsystem 106. Tactile output generator(s) 167 optionally include one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device). Tactile output generator(s) 167 receive tactile feedback generation instructions fromhaptic feedback module 133 and generates tactile outputs ondevice 100 that are capable of being sensed by a user ofdevice 100. In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of a surface of device 100) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device 100). In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back ofdevice 100, opposite touch-sensitive display system 112, which is located on the front ofdevice 100. -
Device 100 optionally also includes one ormore accelerometers 168.FIG. 1A showsaccelerometer 168 coupled withperipherals interface 118. Alternately,accelerometer 168 is, optionally, coupled with aninput controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106. In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch-screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers.Device 100 optionally includes, in addition to accelerometer(s) 168, a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) ofdevice 100. - In some embodiments, the software components stored in
memory 102 includeoperating system 126, communication module (or set of instructions) 128, contact/motion module (or set of instructions) 130, graphics module (or set of instructions) 132, haptic feedback module (or set of instructions) 133, text input module (or set of instructions) 134, Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions) 135, and applications (or sets of instructions) 136. Furthermore, in some embodiments,memory 102 stores device/globalinternal state 157, as shown inFIGS. 1A and 3 . Device/globalinternal state 157 includes one or more of: active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other information occupy various regions of touch-sensitive display system 112; sensor state, including information obtained from the device's various sensors and other input orcontrol devices 116; and location and/or positional information concerning the device's location and/or attitude. - Operating system 126 (e.g., iOS, Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components.
-
Communication module 128 facilitates communication with other devices over one or moreexternal ports 124 and also includes various software components for handling data received byRF circuitry 108 and/orexternal port 124. External port 124 (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.) is adapted for coupling directly to other devices or indirectly over a network (e.g., the Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with the 30-pin connector used in some iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. In some embodiments, the external port is a Lightning connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with the Lightning connector used in some iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. - Contact/
motion module 130 optionally detects contact with touch-sensitive display system 112 (in conjunction with display controller 156) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel). Contact/motion module 130 includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact (e.g., by a finger or by a stylus), such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact). Contact/motion module 130 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining movement of the point of contact, which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts or stylus contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., “multitouch”/multiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 anddisplay controller 156 detect contact on a touchpad. - Contact/
motion module 130 optionally detects a gesture input by a user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities of detected contacts). Thus, a gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a particular contact pattern. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event. Similarly, tap, swipe, drag, and other gestures are optionally detected for a stylus by detecting a particular contact pattern for the stylus. -
Graphics module 132 includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch-sensitive display system 112 or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed. As used herein, the term “graphics” includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including without limitation text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations and the like. - In some embodiments,
graphics module 132 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code.Graphics module 132 receives, from applications etc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to displaycontroller 156. -
Haptic feedback module 133 includes various software components for generating instructions used by tactile output generator(s) 167 to produce tactile outputs at one or more locations ondevice 100 in response to user interactions withdevice 100. -
Text input module 134, which is, optionally, a component ofgraphics module 132, provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g.,contacts 137,e-mail 140,IM 141,browser 147, and any other application that needs text input). -
GPS module 135 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone 138 for use in location-based dialing, tocamera 143 as picture/video metadata, and to applications that provide location-based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets). -
Applications 136 optionally include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof: -
- contacts module 137 (sometimes called an address book or contact list);
-
telephone module 138; -
video conferencing module 139; -
e-mail client module 140; - instant messaging (IM)
module 141; -
workout support module 142; -
camera module 143 for still and/or video images; -
image management module 144; -
browser module 147; -
calendar module 148; -
widget modules 149, which optionally include one or more of: weather widget 149-1, stocks widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, dictionary widget 149-5, and other widgets obtained by the user, as well as user-created widgets 149-6; -
widget creator module 150 for making user-created widgets 149-6; -
search module 151; - video and
music player module 152, which is, optionally, made up of a video player module and a music player module; -
notes module 153; -
map module 154; and/or -
online video module 155.
- Examples of
other applications 136 that are, optionally, stored inmemory 102 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication. - In conjunction with touch-
sensitive display system 112,display controller 156,contact module 130,graphics module 132, andtext input module 134,contacts module 137 includes executable instructions to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in applicationinternal state 192 ofcontacts module 137 inmemory 102 or memory 370), including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e-mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers and/or e-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications bytelephone 138,video conference 139,e-mail 140, orIM 141; and so forth. - In conjunction with
RF circuitry 108,audio circuitry 110,speaker 111,microphone 113, touch-sensitive display system 112,display controller 156,contact module 130,graphics module 132, andtext input module 134,telephone module 138 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers inaddress book 137, modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed. As noted above, the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols and technologies. - In conjunction with
RF circuitry 108,audio circuitry 110,speaker 111,microphone 113, touch-sensitive display system 112,display controller 156, optical sensor(s) 164,optical sensor controller 158,contact module 130,graphics module 132,text input module 134,contact list 137, andtelephone module 138,videoconferencing module 139 includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions. - In conjunction with
RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112,display controller 156,contact module 130,graphics module 132, andtext input module 134,e-mail client module 140 includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response to user instructions. In conjunction withimage management module 144,e-mail client module 140 makes it very easy to create and send e-mails with still or video images taken withcamera module 143. - In conjunction with
RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112,display controller 156,contact module 130,graphics module 132, andtext input module 134, theinstant messaging module 141 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony-based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, Apple Push Notification Service (APNs) or IMPS for Internet-based instant messages), to receive instant messages and to view received instant messages. In some embodiments, transmitted and/or received instant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as are supported in a MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, “instant messaging” refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, APNs, or IMPS). - In conjunction with
RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112,display controller 156,contact module 130,graphics module 132,text input module 134,GPS module 135,map module 154, and music player module 146,workout support module 142 includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals); communicate with workout sensors (in sports devices and smart watches); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store and transmit workout data. - In conjunction with touch-
sensitive display system 112,display controller 156, optical sensor(s) 164,optical sensor controller 158,contact module 130,graphics module 132, andimage management module 144,camera module 143 includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them intomemory 102, modify characteristics of a still image or video, and/or delete a still image or video frommemory 102. - In conjunction with touch-
sensitive display system 112,display controller 156,contact module 130,graphics module 132,text input module 134, andcamera module 143,image management module 144 includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images. - In conjunction with
RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112,display system controller 156,contact module 130,graphics module 132, andtext input module 134,browser module 147 includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages. - In conjunction with
RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112,display system controller 156,contact module 130,graphics module 132,text input module 134,e-mail client module 140, andbrowser module 147,calendar module 148 includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions. - In conjunction with
RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112,display system controller 156,contact module 130,graphics module 132,text input module 134, andbrowser module 147,widget modules 149 are mini-applications that are, optionally, downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget 149-1, stocks widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, and dictionary widget 149-5) or created by the user (e.g., user-created widget 149-6). In some embodiments, a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets). - In conjunction with
RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112,display system controller 156,contact module 130,graphics module 132,text input module 134, andbrowser module 147, thewidget creator module 150 includes executable instructions to create widgets (e.g., turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget). - In conjunction with touch-
sensitive display system 112,display system controller 156,contact module 130,graphics module 132, andtext input module 134,search module 151 includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files inmemory 102 that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions. - In conjunction with touch-
sensitive display system 112,display system controller 156,contact module 130,graphics module 132,audio circuitry 110,speaker 111,RF circuitry 108, andbrowser module 147, video andmusic player module 152 includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touch-sensitive display system 112, or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port 124). In some embodiments,device 100 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.). - In conjunction with touch-
sensitive display system 112,display controller 156,contact module 130,graphics module 132, andtext input module 134, notesmodule 153 includes executable instructions to create and manage notes, to do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions. - In conjunction with
RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112,display system controller 156,contact module 130,graphics module 132,text input module 134,GPS module 135, andbrowser module 147,map module 154 includes executable instructions to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions; data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location; and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions. - In conjunction with touch-
sensitive display system 112,display system controller 156,contact module 130,graphics module 132,audio circuitry 110,speaker 111,RF circuitry 108,text input module 134,e-mail client module 140, andbrowser module 147,online video module 155 includes executable instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on thetouch screen 112, or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port 124), send an e-mail with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264. In some embodiments,instant messaging module 141, rather thane-mail client module 140, is used to send a link to a particular online video. - Each of the above identified modules and applications correspond to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). These modules (i.e., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise re-arranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments,
memory 102 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore,memory 102 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above. - In some embodiments,
device 100 is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad. By using a touch screen and/or a touchpad as the primary input control device for operation ofdevice 100, the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) ondevice 100 is, optionally, reduced. - The predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by the user, navigates
device 100 to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed ondevice 100. In such embodiments, a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad. -
FIG. 1B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 102 (inFIG. 1A ) or 370 (FIG. 3 ) includes event sorter 170 (e.g., in operating system 126) and a respective application 136-1 (e.g., any of theaforementioned applications 136, 137-155, 380-390). -
Event sorter 170 receives event information and determines the application 136-1 andapplication view 191 of application 136-1 to which to deliver the event information.Event sorter 170 includes event monitor 171 andevent dispatcher module 174. In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes applicationinternal state 192, which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112 when the application is active or executing. In some embodiments, device/globalinternal state 157 is used byevent sorter 170 to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and applicationinternal state 192 is used byevent sorter 170 to determineapplication views 191 to which to deliver event information. - In some embodiments, application
internal state 192 includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application 136-1 resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application 136-1, a state queue for enabling the user to go back to a prior state or view of application 136-1, and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user. -
Event monitor 171 receives event information fromperipherals interface 118. Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touch-sensitive display system 112, as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripherals interface 118 transmits information it receives from I/O subsystem 106 or a sensor, such asproximity sensor 166, accelerometer(s) 168, and/or microphone 113 (through audio circuitry 110). Information that peripherals interface 118 receives from I/O subsystem 106 includes information from touch-sensitive display system 112 or a touch-sensitive surface. - In some embodiments, event monitor 171 sends requests to the peripherals interface 118 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information. In other embodiments,
peripheral interface 118 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration). - In some embodiments,
event sorter 170 also includes a hit view determination module 172 and/or an active eventrecognizer determination module 173. - Hit view determination module 172 provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views, when touch-
sensitive display system 112 displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display. - Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes herein called application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected optionally correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is, optionally, called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as proper inputs are, optionally, determined based, at least in part, on the hit view of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture.
- Hit view determination module 172 receives information related to sub-events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 172 identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (i.e., the first sub-event in the sequence of sub-events that form an event or potential event). Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determination module, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view.
- Active event
recognizer determination module 173 determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active eventrecognizer determination module 173 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active eventrecognizer determination module 173 determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touch sub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain as actively involved views. -
Event dispatcher module 174 dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer 180). In embodiments including active eventrecognizer determination module 173,event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active eventrecognizer determination module 173. In some embodiments,event dispatcher module 174 stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respectiveevent receiver module 182. - In some embodiments,
operating system 126 includesevent sorter 170. Alternatively, application 136-1 includesevent sorter 170. In yet other embodiments,event sorter 170 is a stand-alone module, or a part of another module stored inmemory 102, such as contact/motion module 130. - In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes a plurality of
event handlers 190 and one or more application views 191, each of which includes instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of the application's user interface. Eachapplication view 191 of the application 136-1 includes one ormore event recognizers 180. Typically, arespective application view 191 includes a plurality ofevent recognizers 180. In other embodiments, one or more ofevent recognizers 180 are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit (not shown) or a higher level object from which application 136-1 inherits methods and other properties. In some embodiments, arespective event handler 190 includes one or more of:data updater 176,object updater 177,GUI updater 178, and/orevent data 179 received fromevent sorter 170.Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or callsdata updater 176,object updater 177 orGUI updater 178 to update the applicationinternal state 192. Alternatively, one or more of the application views 191 includes one or morerespective event handlers 190. Also, in some embodiments, one or more ofdata updater 176,object updater 177, andGUI updater 178 are included in arespective application view 191. - A
respective event recognizer 180 receives event information (e.g., event data 179) fromevent sorter 170, and identifies an event from the event information.Event recognizer 180 includesevent receiver 182 andevent comparator 184. In some embodiments,event recognizer 180 also includes at least a subset of:metadata 183, and event delivery instructions 188 (which optionally include sub-event delivery instructions). -
Event receiver 182 receives event information fromevent sorter 170. The event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a touch, the event information optionally also includes speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device. -
Event comparator 184 compares the event information to predefined event or sub-event definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub-event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event. In some embodiments,event comparator 184 includesevent definitions 186.Event definitions 186 contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event 1 (187-1), event 2 (187-2), and others. In some embodiments, sub-events in an event 187 include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching. In one example, the definition for event 1 (187-1) is a double tap on a displayed object. The double tap, for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition for event 2 (187-2) is a dragging on a displayed object. The dragging, for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch-sensitive display system 112, and lift-off of the touch (touch end). In some embodiments, the event also includes information for one or more associatedevent handlers 190. - In some embodiments, event definition 187 includes a definition of an event for a respective user-interface object. In some embodiments,
event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view in which three user-interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112, when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display system 112,event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which of the three user-interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with arespective event handler 190, the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine whichevent handler 190 should be activated. For example,event comparator 184 selects an event handler associated with the sub-event and the object triggering the hit test. - In some embodiments, the definition for a respective event 187 also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer's event type.
- When a
respective event recognizer 180 determines that the series of sub-events do not match any of the events inevent definitions 186, therespective event recognizer 180 enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process sub-events of an ongoing touch-based gesture. - In some embodiments, a
respective event recognizer 180 includesmetadata 183 with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers. In some embodiments,metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another. In some embodiments,metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy. - In some embodiments, a
respective event recognizer 180 activatesevent handler 190 associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized. In some embodiments, arespective event recognizer 180 delivers event information associated with the event toevent handler 190. Activating anevent handler 190 is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view. In some embodiments,event recognizer 180 throws a flag associated with the recognized event, andevent handler 190 associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process. - In some embodiments,
event delivery instructions 188 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process. - In some embodiments,
data updater 176 creates and updates data used in application 136-1. For example,data updater 176 updates the telephone number used incontacts module 137, or stores a video file used in video player module 145. In some embodiments, objectupdater 177 creates and updates objects used in application 136-1. For example, objectupdater 177 creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object.GUI updater 178 updates the GUI. For example,GUI updater 178 prepares display information and sends it tographics module 132 for display on a touch-sensitive display. - In some embodiments, event handler(s) 190 includes or has access to
data updater 176,object updater 177, andGUI updater 178. In some embodiments,data updater 176,object updater 177, andGUI updater 178 are included in a single module of a respective application 136-1 orapplication view 191. In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules. - It shall be understood that the foregoing discussion regarding event handling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies to other forms of user inputs to operate
multifunction devices 100 with input-devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens. For example, mouse movement and mouse button presses, optionally coordinated with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements such as taps, drags, scrolls, etc., on touch-pads; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye movements; biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof are optionally utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to be recognized. -
FIG. 2 illustrates aportable multifunction device 100 having a touch screen (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112,FIG. 1A ) in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI) 200. In this embodiment, as well as others described below, a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers 202 (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses 203 (not drawn to scale in the figure). In some embodiments, selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward and/or downward) and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward and/or downward) that has made contact withdevice 100. In some implementations or circumstances, inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap. -
Device 100 optionally also includes one or more physical buttons, such as “home” ormenu button 204. As described previously,menu button 204 is, optionally, used to navigate to anyapplication 136 in a set of applications that are, optionally executed ondevice 100. Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on the touch-screen display. - In some embodiments,
device 100 includes the touch-screen display,menu button 204,push button 206 for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s) 208, Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)card slot 210, head setjack 212, and docking/chargingexternal port 124.Push button 206 is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process. In some embodiments,device 100 also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions throughmicrophone 113.Device 100 also, optionally, includes one or morecontact intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive display system 112 and/or one or moretactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs for a user ofdevice 100. -
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments.Device 300 need not be portable. In some embodiments,device 300 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child's learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller).Device 300 typically includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 310, one or more network orother communications interfaces 360,memory 370, and one ormore communication buses 320 for interconnecting these components.Communication buses 320 optionally include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components.Device 300 includes input/output (I/O)interface 330 comprisingdisplay 340, which is typically a touch-screen display. I/O interface 330 also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 350 andtouchpad 355,tactile output generator 357 for generating tactile outputs on device 300 (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s) 167 described above with reference toFIG. 1A ), sensors 359 (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s) 165 described above with reference toFIG. 1A ).Memory 370 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM or other random access solid state memory devices; and optionally includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices.Memory 370 optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from CPU(s) 310. In some embodiments,memory 370 stores programs, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs, modules, and data structures stored inmemory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (FIG. 1A ), or a subset thereof. Furthermore,memory 370 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present inmemory 102 of portablemultifunction device 100. For example,memory 370 ofdevice 300 optionallystores drawing module 380,presentation module 382,word processing module 384, website creation module 386,disk authoring module 388, and/orspreadsheet module 390, whilememory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (FIG. 1A ) optionally does not store these modules. - Each of the above identified elements in
FIG. 3 are, optionally, stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices. Each of the above identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above. The above identified modules or programs (i.e., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise re-arranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments,memory 370 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore,memory 370 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above. - Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (“UI”) that are, optionally, implemented on
portable multifunction device 100. -
FIG. 4A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications onportable multifunction device 100 in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are, optionally, implemented ondevice 300. In some embodiments,user interface 400 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof: -
- Signal strength indicator(s) 402 for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals;
-
Time 404; - Bluetooth indicator 405;
-
Battery status indicator 406; -
Tray 408 with icons for frequently used applications, such as:-
Icon 416 fortelephone module 138, labeled “Phone,” which optionally includes anindicator 414 of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages; -
Icon 418 fore-mail client module 140, labeled “Mail,” which optionally includes anindicator 410 of the number of unread e-mails; -
Icon 420 forbrowser module 147, labeled “Browser;” and -
Icon 422 for video andmusic player module 152, also referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.)module 152, labeled “iPod;” and
-
- Icons for other applications, such as:
-
Icon 424 forIM module 141, labeled “Messages;” -
Icon 426 forcalendar module 148, labeled “Calendar;” -
Icon 428 forimage management module 144, labeled “Photos;” -
Icon 430 forcamera module 143, labeled “Camera;” -
Icon 432 foronline video module 155, labeled “Online Video;” -
Icon 434 for stocks widget 149-2, labeled “Stocks;” -
Icon 436 formap module 154, labeled “Map;” -
Icon 438 for weather widget 149-1, labeled “Weather;” -
Icon 440 for alarm clock widget 149-4, labeled “Clock;” -
Icon 442 forworkout support module 142, labeled “Workout Support;” -
Icon 444 fornotes module 153, labeled “Notes;” and -
Icon 446 for a settings application or module, which provides access to settings fordevice 100 and itsvarious applications 136.
-
- It should be noted that the icon labels illustrated in
FIG. 4A are merely exemplary. For example, in some embodiments,icon 422 for video andmusic player module 152 is labeled “Music” or “Music Player.” Other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons. In some embodiments, a label for a respective application icon includes a name of an application corresponding to the respective application icon. In some embodiments, a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon. -
FIG. 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g.,device 300,FIG. 3 ) with a touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., a tablet ortouchpad 355,FIG. 3 ) that is separate from thedisplay 450.Device 300 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors 357) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 451 and/or one or moretactile output generators 359 for generating tactile outputs for a user ofdevice 300. -
FIG. 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g.,device 300,FIG. 3 ) with a touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., a tablet ortouchpad 355,FIG. 3 ) that is separate from thedisplay 450. Although many of the examples that follow will be given with reference to inputs on touch screen display 112 (where the touch sensitive surface and the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown inFIG. 4B . In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 451 inFIG. 4B ) has a primary axis (e.g., 452 inFIG. 4B ) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g., 453 inFIG. 4B ) on the display (e.g., 450). In accordance with these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e.g., 460 and 462 inFIG. 4B ) with the touch-sensitive surface 451 at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display (e.g., inFIG. 4B, 460 corresponds to 468 and 462 corresponds to 470). In this way, user inputs (e.g.,contacts FIG. 4B ) are used by the device to manipulate the user interface on the display (e.g., 450 inFIG. 4B ) of the multifunction device when the touch-sensitive surface is separate from the display. It should be understood that similar methods are, optionally, used for other user interfaces described herein. - Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures, etc.), it should be understood that, in some embodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse based input or a stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact). As another example, a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are simultaneously detected, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously.
- As used herein, the term “focus selector” refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other location marker, the cursor acts as a “focus selector,” so that when an input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g.,
touchpad 355 inFIG. 3 or touch-sensitive surface 451 inFIG. 4B ) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations that include a touch-screen display (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 inFIG. 1A or the touch screen inFIG. 4A ) that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch-screen display, a detected contact on the touch-screen acts as a “focus selector,” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch-screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations, focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch-screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); in these implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions of the user interface. Without regard to the specific form taken by the focus selector, the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch-screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user's intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interface with which the user is intending to interact). For example, the location of a focus selector (e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box) over a respective button while a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of the device). - As used in the specification and claims, the term “intensity” of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact or a stylus contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average or a sum) to determine an estimated force of a contact. Similarly, a pressure-sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements). In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure). Using the intensity of a contact as an attribute of a user input allows for user access to additional device functionality that may otherwise not be readily accessible by the user on a reduced-size device with limited real estate for displaying affordances (e.g., on a touch-sensitive display) and/or receiving user input (e.g., via a touch-sensitive display, a touch-sensitive surface, or a physical/mechanical control such as a knob or a button).
- In some embodiments, contact/
motion module 130 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has “clicked” on an icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device 100). For example, a mouse “click” threshold of a trackpad or touch-screen display can be set to any of a large range of predefined thresholds values without changing the trackpad or touch-screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click “intensity” parameter). - As used in the specification and claims, the term “characteristic intensity” of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact). A characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally based on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent maximum of the intensities of the contact, or the like. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds may include a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold. In this example, a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation, a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results in a second operation, and a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second intensity threshold results in a third operation. In some embodiments, a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more intensity thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective option or forgo performing the respective operation) rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation.
- In some embodiments, a portion of a gesture is identified for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity. For example, a touch-sensitive surface may receive a continuous swipe contact transitioning from a start location and reaching an end location (e.g., a drag gesture), at which point the intensity of the contact increases. In this example, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end location may be based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact, and not the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location). In some embodiments, a smoothing algorithm may be applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of: an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm. In some circumstances, these smoothing algorithms eliminate narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity.
- The user interface figures described herein optionally include various intensity diagrams that show the current intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface relative to one or more intensity thresholds (e.g., a contact detection intensity threshold IT0, a light press intensity threshold ITL, a deep press intensity threshold ITD (e.g., that is at least initially higher than IL), and/or one or more other intensity thresholds (e.g., an intensity threshold IH that is lower than IL)). This intensity diagram is typically not part of the displayed user interface, but is provided to aid in the interpretation of the figures. In some embodiments, the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations that are different from operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, when a contact is detected with a characteristic intensity below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold IT0 below which the contact is no longer detected), the device will move a focus selector in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an operation associated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep press intensity threshold. Generally, unless otherwise stated, these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interface figures.
- In some embodiments, the response of the device to inputs detected by the device depends on criteria based on the contact intensity during the input. For example, for some “light press” inputs, the intensity of a contact exceeding a first intensity threshold during the input triggers a first response. In some embodiments, the response of the device to inputs detected by the device depends on criteria that include both the contact intensity during the input and time-based criteria. For example, for some “deep press” inputs, the intensity of a contact exceeding a second intensity threshold during the input, greater than the first intensity threshold for a light press, triggers a second response only if a delay time has elapsed between meeting the first intensity threshold and meeting the second intensity threshold. This delay time is typically less than 200 ms in duration (e.g., 40, 100, or 120 ms, depending on the magnitude of the second intensity threshold, with the delay time increasing as the second intensity threshold increases). This delay time helps to avoid accidental deep press inputs. As another example, for some “deep press” inputs, there is a reduced-sensitivity time period that occurs after the time at which the first intensity threshold is met. During the reduced-sensitivity time period, the second intensity threshold is increased. This temporary increase in the second intensity threshold also helps to avoid accidental deep press inputs. For other deep press inputs, the response to detection of a deep press input does not depend on time-based criteria.
- In some embodiments, one or more of the input intensity thresholds and/or the corresponding outputs vary based on one or more factors, such as user settings, contact motion, input timing, application running, rate at which the intensity is applied, number of concurrent inputs, user history, environmental factors (e.g., ambient noise), focus selector position, and the like. Exemplary factors are described in U.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 14/399,606 and 14/624,296, which are incorporated by reference herein in their entireties.
- For example,
FIG. 4C illustrates adynamic intensity threshold 480 that changes over time based in part on the intensity oftouch input 476 over time.Dynamic intensity threshold 480 is a sum of two components,first component 474 that decays over time after a predefined delay time p1 from whentouch input 476 is initially detected, andsecond component 478 that trails the intensity oftouch input 476 over time. The initial high intensity threshold offirst component 474 reduces accidental triggering of a “deep press” response, while still allowing an immediate “deep press” response iftouch input 476 provides sufficient intensity.Second component 478 reduces unintentional triggering of a “deep press” response by gradual intensity fluctuations of in a touch input. In some embodiments, whentouch input 476 satisfies dynamic intensity threshold 480 (e.g., atpoint 481 inFIG. 4C ), the “deep press” response is triggered. -
FIG. 4D illustrates another dynamic intensity threshold 486 (e.g., intensity threshold ID).FIG. 4D also illustrates two other intensity thresholds: a first intensity threshold IH and a second intensity threshold IL. InFIG. 4D , althoughtouch input 484 satisfies the first intensity threshold IH and the second intensity threshold IL prior to time p2, no response is provided until delay time p2 has elapsed attime 482. Also inFIG. 4D ,dynamic intensity threshold 486 decays over time, with the decay starting attime 488 after a predefined delay time p1 has elapsed from time 482 (when the response associated with the second intensity threshold IL was triggered). This type of dynamic intensity threshold reduces accidental triggering of a response associated with the dynamic intensity threshold ID immediately after, or concurrently with, triggering a response associated with a lower intensity threshold, such as the first intensity threshold IH or the second intensity threshold IL. -
FIG. 4E illustrate yet another dynamic intensity threshold 492 (e.g., intensity threshold ID). InFIG. 4E , a response associated with the intensity threshold IL is triggered after the delay time p2 has elapsed from whentouch input 490 is initially detected. Concurrently,dynamic intensity threshold 492 decays after the predefined delay time p1 has elapsed from whentouch input 490 is initially detected. So a decrease in intensity oftouch input 490 after triggering the response associated with the intensity threshold IL, followed by an increase in the intensity oftouch input 490, without releasingtouch input 490, can trigger a response associated with the intensity threshold ID (e.g., at time 494) even when the intensity oftouch input 490 is below another intensity threshold, for example, the intensity threshold IL. - An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold ITL to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold ITL and the deep press intensity threshold ITD is sometimes referred to as a “light press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold ITD to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold ITD is sometimes referred to as a “deep press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold IT0 to an intensity between the contact-detection intensity threshold IT0 and the light press intensity threshold ITL is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on the touch-surface. A decrease of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity above the contact-detection intensity threshold IT0 to an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold IT0 is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-surface. In some embodiments IT0 is zero. In some embodiments, IT0 is greater than zero. In some illustrations a shaded circle or oval is used to represent intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some illustrations, a circle or oval without shading is used represent a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface without specifying the intensity of the respective contact.
- In some embodiments, described herein, one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respective press input or in response to detecting the respective press input performed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), where the respective press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press-input intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on a “down stroke” of the respective press input). In some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the press-input threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on an “up stroke” of the respective press input).
- In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs sometimes termed “jitter,” where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationship to the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold). Thus, in some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on an “up stroke” of the respective press input). Similarly, in some embodiments, the press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the press-input intensity threshold and, optionally, a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., the increase in intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity of the contact, depending on the circumstances).
- For ease of explanation, the description of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press-input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are, optionally, triggered in response to detecting: an increase in intensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase in intensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-input intensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, or a decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press-input intensity threshold. Additionally, in examples where an operation is described as being performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of a contact below the press-input intensity threshold, the operation is, optionally, performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to, and lower than, the press-input intensity threshold. As described above, in some embodiments, the triggering of these responses also depends on time-based criteria being met (e.g., a delay time has elapsed between a first intensity threshold being met and a second intensity threshold being met).
- Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (“UI”) and associated processes that may be implemented on an electronic device, such as
portable multifunction device 100 ordevice 300, with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. -
FIGS. 5A-5TT illustrate exemplary user interfaces for content navigation and manipulation in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes inFIGS. 6A-6B, 7A-7C, 8A-8C, 9A-9D, and 10A-10C . For convenience of explanation, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device with a touch-sensitive display system 112. In such embodiments, the focus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with a respective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system 112. However, analogous operations are, optionally, performed on a device with adisplay 450 and a separate touch-sensitive surface 451 in response to detecting the contacts on the touch-sensitive surface 451 while displaying the user interfaces shown in the figures on thedisplay 450, along with a focus selector. -
FIGS. 5A-5TT illustrate exemplary user interfaces for manipulating content items depending on the intensity (e.g., pressure) applied by a contact during a user gesture in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes described below with reference toFIGS. 6A-6B . -
FIGS. 5A-5K illustrate exemplary user interfaces that perform certain actions based on intensity characteristics of a user input (e.g., contact) in accordance with some embodiments. - For example,
FIGS. 5A-5C illustrate an exemplary user interface of adevice 100 that performs certain actions (e.g., scrolls through a content item) when a contact intensity of a user input does not exceed a predetermined threshold, in accordance with some embodiments. Alternatively,FIGS. 5D-5H illustrate an exemplary user interface that performs alternate actions (e.g., replaces a content item with another content item) when the contact intensity exceeds a predetermined threshold, in accordance with some embodiments. Lastly,FIG. 5K illustrates an exemplary user interface that displays a preview of a selectable affordance when certain criteria of the user input are met. - Turning now to
FIG. 5A ,FIG. 5A illustrates a user interface ofdevice 100 beforedevice 100 performs certain actions (e.g., scrolls through a content item) based on characteristics of the user input. Thedevice 100 displays a content item (e.g., content item 502) on a display. In some embodiments,content item 502 is an email message in an email application including anemail content section 502 a, anemail title section 502 b, and anemail header section 502 c. While the examples shown inFIGS. 5A-5K illustratecontent item 502 as an email message, in some embodiments,content item 502 may be other content items, including web pages, books, images, text, among other types. In some embodiments,content item 502 is associated with a sequence of content items, such as plurality of electronic messages in an electronic messaging application, a plurality of web browser windows (or tabbed windows) in a web browser, a plurality of applications, a plurality of digital images in a set of images (e.g., a single album or collection in a photo or camera application), or a plurality of sets of digital images (e.g., a plurality of albums or collections of photos in a photo or camera application). In some embodiments, the sequence of content items corresponds to a plurality of content sections, such as a plurality of conversations in a messaging or email application, a plurality of weeks (or months or years) in a calendar application, a plurality of chapters in a book, a plurality of scenes in a video, or a plurality of events in a digital image library. - In addition to the email message, the
device 100 also displays other components of the email application, including anemail tool bar 503. Theemail tool bar 503 includes selectable affordances (e.g., a left-arrow 504, an up-arrow 506, and a down-arrow 508). A section label (e.g., “inbox”) is associated with the left-arrow. In some embodiments, when a user selects a selectable affordance (e.g., the left arrow 504), as shown viauser input 511 inFIG. 5I , thedevice 100 displays a plurality of content items (e.g.,email messages FIG. 5J . When a user selects the up-arrow 506, the email application displays a content item preceding the currently-displayed content item 502 (e.g., a preceding email message in the user's inbox). When a user selects the down-arrow 508, thedevice 100 displays a content item following the currently-displayed content item 502 (e.g., a successive email message in the user's inbox). -
FIG. 5B illustrates a user interface, subsequent toFIG. 5A , after thedevice 100 detects a user input 510 (e.g., a contact) on thecontent item 502 and before thedevice 100 performs certain actions (e.g., scrolls through a content item) based on characteristics of the user input, in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, thedevice 100 detects movement (e.g., press, flick, swipe) and/or intensity (e.g., contact, light, deep) ofuser input 510. For illustrative purposes, and not part of thedevice 100, user inputs are represented as a circle ondevice 100, where the density of the dots speckled within the circle represents the intensity exerted by the user. InFIG. 5B , the dots speckled within the circle are low density, meaning the user is exerting low pressure. Also, for illustrative purposes, and not part of thedevice 100, some ofFIGS. 5B-5K include an intensity diagram 501 indicating the intensity of a user input determined by thedevice 100. The intensity diagram 501 includes a plurality of exemplary thresholds (e.g., contact detection threshold IT0, “hint” threshold ITH, light press threshold ITL, and deep press threshold ITD). InFIG. 5B , because the user is exerting low intensity that falls between the contact detection threshold IT0 and “hint” threshold ITH, the intensity diagram includes shading that rises to a level between these two thresholds. In subsequent Figures, the amount of shading in the intensity diagram indicates the intensity exerted by a user at a user input. Lastly, for illustrative purposes, and not part of thedevice 100, user input movement (e.g., movement of the contact of the user input on the touch-sensitive surface) is represented as a vector (e.g.,vector 512,FIG. 5B ), where the direction of the vector represents the direction of the user input movement and the magnitude of the vector represents the amount of movement of the user input (e.g.,user input 510,FIG. 5B ). - The
device 100 is configured to navigate a content item or replace a content item with another content item based on the received user input. In response to detecting a user input, thedevice 100 determines whether the user input meets item-switching criteria. The item-switching criteria includes a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of a contact in the user input is above a first intensity threshold (e.g., “hint” threshold ITH, light press threshold ITL, or deep press threshold ITD). In some embodiments, if the characteristic intensity of the user input is below the first intensity threshold, thedevice 100 navigates or scrolls through the content of thecontent item 502 in accordance with the movement of the user input. - For example, in
FIG. 5B , the characteristic intensity of theuser input 510, as shown in the intensity diagram 501, is below a first intensity threshold associated with item-switching criteria (e.g., light press threshold ITL). In some embodiments, thedevice 100 detectsmovement 512 of the user input in a respective direction ontouch screen 112 and navigates or scrolls through the content of thecontent item 502 in accordance with the movement of theuser input 510. In some embodiments, as shown inFIG. 5B , theuser input 510 is a swipe/drag gesture that is made with a contact. In some embodiments, the swipe/drag gesture includes movement of the contact from a first position (e.g., position 510-1) on the touch-sensitive surface to a second position (e.g., position 510-2) on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the swipe/drag gesture is a vertical swipe gesture (as shown inFIG. 5B ). In some embodiments, the swipe gesture is a horizontal swipe gesture. - In some embodiments, when the
device 100 detects theuser input 510 and the characteristic intensity of theuser input 510 is below the first intensity threshold (e.g., light press threshold ITL), thedevice 100 displays ascroll bar 514 indicating the location of the portion of content displayed to the user relative to theentire content item 502. As thedevice 100 navigates through the content of thecontent item 502 and displays different content portions of the content item, thedevice 100 moves thescroll bar 514 to different positions relative to the content portion of the content item displayed to the user. - For example,
FIG. 5C illustrates a user interface, subsequent toFIG. 5B , of adevice 100 after thedevice 100 performs certain actions (e.g., scrolls through a content item) based on characteristics of the user input, in accordance with some embodiments. As shown, theuser input 510 moved to second position 510-2 from first position 510-1. In response to the movement of theuser input 510, thedevice 100 navigates through the content of thecontent item 502 and displays a second content portion of thecontent item 502, where the second content portion is different from the first content portion. In addition, thedevice 100 moves thescroll bar 514 to a second position that is different from the position of thescroll bar 514 inFIG. 5B . - In some embodiments, the
device 100 scrolls the content in a direction on the display in an opposite direction relative to the movement of theuser input 510. In some embodiments, thedevice 100 scrolls the content in a direction on the display in a same direction relative to the movement of theuser input 510. In some embodiments, navigating through the content of the first content item includes directly manipulating the displayed content of the first content item in accordance with the movement of the contact. For example, the movement (e.g., speed, direction, and/or distance) of the content, when scrolled, tracks the movement of the contact. - In some embodiments, the
device 100 maintains display of a first portion of the first content item in a first user interface region on the display; and navigates (e.g., scrolls) through a second portion of the first content item in a second user interface region on the display. For example, as shown inFIGS. 5B-5C , when scrolling the content within acontent item 502, a portion of the content item (e.g., email tool bar 503) is fixed relative to the content (e.g., thebody 502 a ofcontent item 502 and theemail title section 502 b of content item 502). -
FIG. 5D-5I illustrate certain actions (e.g., replacingcontent item 502 with another content item), performed by thedevice 100 when the user input meets item-switching criteria, in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, if the characteristic intensity of the user input is above a first intensity threshold (e.g., “hint” threshold ITH, light press threshold ITL, or deep press threshold ITD), thedevice 100 replaces display of thecontent item 502 with display of a second content item 518 (e.g., a different content item distinct from the content item 502). In some embodiments, thedevice 100 replaces display of thecontent item 502 with display ofsecond content item 518 in accordance with other criteria being met as well. For example, as shown inFIG. 5E , the device initiates replacing display of the first content item with a second content item when a user input is detected with an increase in contact intensity in conjunction with at least a minimum amount of movement of the contact. -
FIG. 5D is analogous toFIG. 5A .FIGS. 5E-5I illustrate operations performed bydevice 100 in response to detecting auser input 513. -
FIG. 5E showsuser input 513, which is analogous to user input 510 (FIGS. 5B-5C ) except thatuser input 513 has an intensity that exceeds a “hint” threshold ITH. In response, thedevice 100 reduces (e.g., decreases) the size of content item 502 (e.g., zooms-out oncontent item 502 in a z-direction). In some embodiments, the zooming out ofcontent item 502 provides a hint to the user thatuser input 513 will result in different functionality by virtue of being a deeper press (e.g., as compared touser input 510,FIGS. 5B-5C ). In some embodiments, the size reduction ofcontent item 502 is directly controllable by the user, e.g., via the intensity of theuser input 513. So, for example, as the user increases the contact intensity of auser input 513 toward the light press intensity threshold ITL (as shown in intensity diagram 501), thecontent item 502 zooms-out (e.g., reduces in size). If the user subsequently slightly reduces the intensity of the contact of theuser input 513, thecontent item 502 zooms back in. In some embodiments, a plurality of intensity levels within the vicinity of the light press intensity threshold ITL (e.g., a plurality of intensity levels between ITH and ITL) map to a plurality of corresponding zoom levels (e.g., sizes) ofcontent item 502. Thus, the user feels as though she is pushing the first content item back in the z-direction by pushing harder on the contact. In some embodiments, as a result of reducing the size of the first content item, aregion 516 beyond an edge of thecontent item 502 is displayed (e.g., a background area that is a different color or pattern than a color or pattern of the background of the content item 502), illustrating to the user that thecontent item 502 has been pushed back in the z-direction. - In some embodiments, the
device 100 transitions to replacing display of the first content item with a second content item in response to a user input (e.g., replacingcontent item 502 with another content item) when the characteristic intensity exceeds the light press intensity threshold ITL (e.g., an intensity threshold that is greater than the “hint” threshold ITH). In some embodiments, the user can zoom-in to or zoom-out from thecontent item 502 if the characteristic intensity exceeds the “hint” threshold ITH and does not exceed the light press threshold ITL. However, in some embodiments, thedevice 100 does not transition to another content item until the characteristic intensity exceeds the light press threshold ITL. Thus, in some embodiments, there is a range of intensities for whichdevice 100 provides a hint that content item replacement will be performed based on the intensity of the contact (as well as other optional criteria), but does not yet provide that functionality. -
FIG. 5F illustrates a user interface, subsequent toFIG. 5E . InFIG. 5F ,device 100 is replacingcontent item 502 withsecond content item 518, in accordance with some embodiments (e.g.,device 100 is displaying a transition betweencontent item 502 and second content item 518). In some embodiments,device 100 determines whether to replacecontent item 502 withsecond content item 518 based at least in part on the intensity of theuser input 513.FIG. 5F illustrates movement of the user input 513 (e.g., represented by vector 515). As shown, movement of theuser input 513 begins at a first position (e.g., position 513-1) on the touch-sensitive surface and ends at a second position (e.g., position 513-2) on the touch-sensitive surface. - The
device 100 transitions from thecontent item 502 to thesecond content item 518 when certain item-switching criteria are met. In some embodiments, thedevice 100 transitions from thecontent item 502 tosecond content item 518 when the intensity of theuser input 513 exceeds a predetermined threshold (e.g., a light press threshold ITL). In some embodiments, thedevice 100 transitions from thecontent item 502 tosecond content item 518 when the movement ofuser input 513 also exceeds a predetermined movement threshold (e.g., when the device detects a predetermined amount or distance of movement of the contact that exceeds a predetermined movement threshold). That is, in some embodiments, there is a predetermined magnitude of intensity and movement ofuser input 513 that is required to be detected bydevice 100 in order to cause thedevice 100 to replace display ofcontent item 502 with display ofsecond content item 518 rather than, e.g.,scroll content item 502. -
FIG. 5G illustrates the user interface subsequent toFIG. 5F . InFIG. 5G ,device 100 has progressed further in replacingcontent item 502 with second content item 518 (as compared toFIG. 5F ). As shown, theuser input 513 moved to second position 513-2 from first position 513-1. In response to the movement of theuser input 513, thedevice 100 replaces display of thecontent item 502 with the display of thesecond content item 518. - In certain situations,
device 100 either replaces display of thecontent item 502 or scrolls throughcontent item 502 based on other characteristics (e.g., timing of intensity or movement) of a user input. For example, in some embodiments, if an initial intensity of the contact does not exceed an intensity threshold (e.g., “hint” threshold ITH inFIGS. 5B-5C ),device 100 scrolls thecontent item 502 in response to the beginning of the user input (e.g., an initial portion of a swipe gesture). If later, during the user input, the contact of the user input exceeds the intensity threshold,device 100 transitions to displaying a second content item (as inFIGS. 5E-5H ). In some embodiments, the item-switching criteria are met when the initial intensity of the contact exceeds the first intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the item-switching criteria are met when the initial intensity of the contact exceeds the first intensity threshold while the contact is moving (e.g., moving above a predetermined velocity threshold). In some embodiments, the item-switching criteria are not met if the contact is stationary or is moving below a predetermined velocity threshold, even if the characteristic intensity of the contact exceeds the first intensity threshold. - In some embodiments, the
device 100 automatically completes replacingcontent item 502 withsecond content item 518 when the user has dragged thesecond content item 518 sufficiently ontotouch screen 112. For example, as shown inFIG. 5G , theuser input 513 has moved themidpoint 520 betweencontent item 502 andsecond content item 518 past a predetermined positional threshold 517 (e.g., half-way, or a third of the way up touch screen 112). As shown inFIG. 5H , the user terminates user input 513 (e.g., lifts off of touch screen 112), but thedevice 100 continues to animate a transition to the second content item 518 (FIGS. 5H-5I ). In some embodiments, the predetermined positional threshold may be positioned at alternative locations ontouch screen 112. - Thus, as shown in
FIG. 5D-5I , in some embodiments, replacing display of thecontent item 502 with thesecond content item 518 includes displaying a transition between thecontent item 502 and the second content item 518 (e.g., in whichcontent item 502 zooms-out, slides upward off oftouch screen 112 whilesecond content 518 slides upward ontotouch screen 112, andsecond content item 518 zooms-in to complete the animated transition). The transition includes concurrently displaying at least a portion of thecontent item 502 and at least a portion of the second content item 518 (as shown inFIGS. 5E-5G , for example). In some embodiments, the transition is dynamically controlled by the user input 513 (e.g., the user can directly manipulate the progress of the transition via user input 513).FIG. 5I also illustratesuser input 511 corresponding to selection ofaffordance 504. -
FIG. 5J illustrates the result ofuser input 511, namely that thedevice 100 navigates back to a user interface showing a list view of the user's emails (includingcontent item 502,content item 518, andadditional emails 520 a through 520 c).FIG. 5J illustrates that, in some embodiments, thesecond content item 518 is sequentially adjacent to the content item 502 (e.g. in the sequence of content items, as shown inFIG. 5J ) and is selected based on the respective direction of the movement of theuser input 513. That is, in some embodiments, a deep swipe transitions to the next email or previous email depending on the swipe direction, while a normal swipe (e.g., a swipe with a characteristic intensity below a predefined threshold) scrolls the currently displayed email. -
FIG. 5K illustrates an exemplary user interface that displays a preview of a selectable affordance when certain intensity criteria of the user input are met. - In some embodiment,
device 100 detects a user input 519 that is stationary (e.g., includes movement of a contact that is less than a predefined threshold) and over a selectable affordance but is otherwise analogous to user input 513 (e.g., the contact intensity of user input 519 is above the first intensity threshold associated with item-switching criteria, such as light press threshold ITL). In response to user input 519, thedevice 100 displays apreview area 521 of content that corresponds to the selectable affordance overlaid on thecontent item 502. Thus, in some embodiments, a press input over a selectable affordance withincontent item 502, where the press input has an intensity above ITL, triggers different functionality than a swipe/drag overcontent item 502, where the swipe/drag has an intensity above ITL. -
FIGS. 5L-5U illustrate exemplary user interfaces for reordering list items in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes described below with reference toFIGS. 7A-7C . -
FIG. 5L illustrates a portion of a list of items, in accordance with some embodiments. A list ofitems 532 includesitems FIGS. 5L-5U . InFIG. 5L , a portion of the list ofitems including items touch screen 112. -
FIGS. 5M-5N illustrate scrolling of list ofitems 532 when movement is detected while a characteristic intensity of the contact remains below a first intensity threshold. - In
FIG. 5M , a contact is received attouch screen 112 at a location indicated byfocus selector 550. The contact moves acrosstouch screen 112 along a path indicated byarrow 552. A portion oflist 532, includingitems touch screen 112. As the movement of the contact occurs,list 532 is scrolled in the direction of movement of the contact. A currently viewed position within list 532 (e.g., relative to the overall length of list 532) is indicated byscroll position indicator 554. InFIG. 5M , the characteristic intensity of the contact is between a contact detecting intensity threshold IT0 and a hint intensity threshold ITH, as indicated byintensity meter 530. - In
FIG. 5N ,list 532 has been scrolled in accordance with the movement of the contact from an initial position as indicated byfocus selector 550 a (e.g.,focus selector 550 at a first point in time) to a subsequent position as indicated byfocus selector 550 b (e.g.,focus selector 550 at a second point in time that is later than the first point in time) along the path indicated byarrow 552. As a result of the changed currently viewed position withinlist 532 due to movement of the contact, a second portion oflist 532, includingitems Items list 532 are no longer visible. Scrollposition indicator 554 is shown at a higher position in the user interface of 5N than the position ofscroll position indicator 554 in the user interface of 5M. -
FIG. 5O illustrates a changed appearance of an item, in accordance with some embodiments. The contact is at the location ofitem 534, as indicated byfocus selector 550. The contact moves acrosstouch screen 112 along a path indicated byarrow 556. The characteristic intensity of the contact is above a hint intensity threshold ITH, as indicated byintensity meter 530. The appearance ofitem 534 is changed (e.g., a rectangular outline is shown arounditem 534 to highlight the item). In response to the increase of the characteristic intensity of the contact above intensity threshold ITH followed by the movement of the contact, the appearance ofitem 534 has changed (e.g., to indicate to the user thatitem 534 is detachable fromlist 532 and/or on the verge of detachment). -
FIGS. 5P-5U illustrate moving an item relative to other items, in accordance with some embodiments. - In
FIG. 5P , the contact moves acrosstouch screen 112 from the location indicated byfocus selector 550 along a path indicated byarrow 556. The characteristic intensity of the contact is above a hint intensity threshold ITL, as indicated byintensity meter 530. In response to the increase of the characteristic intensity of the contact above intensity threshold ITL followed by the movement of the contact along the path indicated byarrow 556,item 534 has moved (from the position ofitem 534 as shown inFIGS. 5N-5O ) relative to theother items -
FIGS. 5P-5R illustrate movement ofitem 534 that lags movement of the contact as thefocus selector 550 moves acrosstouch screen 112 along the path indicated byarrow 556. - In
FIG. 5P ,item 534 has detached fromlist 532. The detachment ofitem 534 fromlist 532 is indicated by, e.g., changes in the appearance of item 534 (such as a reduced size ofitem 534 relative to the other items in list 532) and changes in the position of item 532 (such as a vertical and/or z-axis shifting ofitem 534 relative to the previous location ofitem 534 shown inFIGS. 5L-5O ). Afirst item slot 558 is partially revealed as a result of the movement ofitem 534. - In
FIGS. 5P-5Q , as the contact moves along a first portion of the path indicated by arrow 556 (as indicated by the movement offocus selector 550 from the location shown inFIG. 5P to the location offocus selector 550 shown inFIG. 5Q ),item 534 remains static (or moves more slowly than focus selector 550). InFIG. 5Q ,focus selector 550 extends below the lower edge ofitem 534. InFIG. 5R , asfocus selector 550 has continued the movement along a second portion of the path indicated byarrow 556,item 534 has accelerated (e.g., to “catch up” with focus selector 550) andfocus selector 550 is again shown in the center ofitem 534. The characteristic intensity of the contact is above a light press intensity threshold ITL, as indicated byintensity meter 530. In response to the increase of the characteristic intensity of the contact above intensity threshold ITL followed by the movement of the contact along the path indicated byarrow 556,item 534 has moved (from the position ofitem 534 as shown inFIGS. 5N-5O ) relative to theother items - In
FIG. 5S , asfocus selector 550 has moved along the path indicated byarrow 556 from a location indicated byfocus selector 550 c (focus selector 550 c at a point in time) to a location indicated byfocus selector 550 d (focus selector 550 at a point in time later than the time of 550 c),item 534 has continued to move relative toitem 536 such thatitem 534 has moved “over”item 536.Item 536 has moved into first item slot 558 (that was previously occupied byitem 534 prior to the detachment ofitem 534 from list 532). Asecond item slot 560 is revealed. As a result of the movement ofitem 536 intofirst item slot 558 and the revelation ofsecond item slot 560, tactile feedback (as indicated at 562) is generated. - In FIG. 5T1,
item 534 is shown inserted intosecond item slot 560.Item 534 is inserted intosecond item slot 560, e.g., as a result of lift off of the contact fromtouch screen 112 whilesecond item slot 560 is revealed (e.g., as shown inFIG. 5S ). - FIGS. 5T2-5U illustrate scrolling of
list 532 that occurs in response toitem 534 moving within a threshold distance of the end of the displayed portion oflist 532. - In FIG. 5T2, the contact moves (e.g., continuing from the movement of the contact as indicated in
FIG. 5S ) from the location indicated byfocus selector 550 along a path indicated byarrow 564 toward alower end 566 of the displayed portion oflist 532. - In
FIG. 5U , as a result of movement of the contact to a location that is within a threshold distance of thelower end 566 of the displayed portion of thelist 532, thelist 532 is scrolled towardupper end 568 of the displayed portion of thelist 532, revealingitems position indicator 554 is shown at a lower position in the user interface of 5U than the position ofscroll position indicator 554 in the user interface of 5T2. As a result of the movement ofitem 544 into a new item slot and the revelation ofprevious item slot 570 for item 544 (which previously occupied previous item slot 570), tactile feedback (as indicated at 562) is generated. -
FIGS. 5V-5CC illustrate exemplary user interfaces for navigating structured content in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes described below with reference toFIGS. 8A-8C . -
FIG. 5V illustrates a first portion (e.g., Chapter 3) of structured content 572 (e.g., the book The Jungle Book by Rudyard Kipling) displayed bytouch screen 112. -
FIG. 5W-5X illustrate translation of structuredcontent 572 in accordance with movement of a contact, in accordance with some embodiments. - In
FIG. 5W , a contact withtouch screen 112 is detected at a location indicated byfocus selector 574. The contact moves acrosstouch screen 112 along a path indicated byarrow 578. A characteristic intensity of the contact is between a contact detecting intensity threshold IT0 and a hint intensity threshold ITH, as indicated byintensity meter 530. A currently viewed position within structured content 572 (e.g., relative to the overall length of structured content 572) is indicated byscroll position indicator 576. - In
FIG. 5X , structuredcontent 572 has been scrolled in accordance with the movement of the contact from an initial position as indicated byfocus selector 574 a (e.g.,focus selector 574 at a first point in time) to a subsequent position as indicated byfocus selector 574 b (e.g.,focus selector 574 at a second point in time that is later than the first point in time) along the path indicated byarrow 578. As a result of the changed currently viewed position within structuredcontent 572 due to movement of the contact,structured content 572 is translated. Scrollposition indicator 576 is shown at a lower position in the user interface of 5X than the position ofscroll position indicator 576 in the user interface of 5 W (e.g., to indicate the advanced position of the currently viewed position within structuredcontent 572 as a result of the translation). -
FIGS. 5Y-5Z illustrate applying a visual effect to structuredcontent 572 and presenting a scroll bar including ascroll position indicator 576, in accordance with some embodiments. - In
FIG. 5Y , a contact is received ontouch screen 112 at a location indicated byfocus selector 574. The characteristic intensity of the contact is below intensity threshold ITH, as indicated byintensity meter 530. Scrollposition indicator 576 is shown (e.g., in response to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact to above IT0) to indicate a position of the displayed portion ofstructured content 572 within structuredcontent 572. - In
FIG. 5Z , the intensity of the contact has increased from below hint intensity threshold level ITH, as indicated byintensity meter 530 ofFIG. 5Y , to above intensity threshold ITH, as indicated byintensity meter 530 ofFIG. 5Z . The contact moves acrosstouch screen 112 along a path indicated byarrow 580. In response to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact (e.g., the increase above intensity level ITH) and the movement of the contact, a visual effect is applied to the displayed section of structuredcontent 572. The applied visual effect includes shrinking the displayed portion ofstructured content 572 and pushing the displayed portion ofstructured content 572 to a lower z-level ontouch screen display 112. - In response to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact (e.g., the increase above intensity level ITH), as indicated in
FIG. 5Z ,section indicators scroll position indicator 576. Section indicator 586 (which is the closest of the section indicators to scroll position indicator 576), corresponds to the displayed portion (“Chapter 3”) of structuredcontent 572.Section indicators Chapters Section indicator 588 corresponds to a portion (e.g., Chapter 4) of structured content 573 following the displayed portion. -
FIGS. 5AA-5BB illustrate translatingstructured content 572 to show a start of a next section, in accordance with some embodiments. - In
FIG. 5AA , a characteristic intensity of the contact has increased from below hint intensity threshold level ITL, as indicated byintensity meter 530 ofFIG. 5Z , to above light press intensity threshold ITL, as indicated byintensity meter 530 ofFIG. 5AA . In response to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact and the movement of the contact along the path indicated byarrow 580, and because the characteristic intensity of the contact increased above light press intensity threshold ITL,structured content 572 is translated to display a start of an adjacent section. For example, as described with regard toFIG. 5BB , a next section (“Chapter 4”) is displayed, e.g., in accordance with the direction of the movement of the contact indicated byarrow 580.Section indicators FIG. 5Z , to adjusted positions, as shown inFIG. 5AA . InFIG. 5AA , that distances between adjacent section indicators are greater than the distances between the initial positions of section indicators as shown inFIG. 5Z . - In
FIG. 5BB , the contact has moved from a position indicated byfocus selector 574 c (focus selector 574 at a position in time) to a position indicated byfocus selector 574 d (focus selector 574 at a position in time that is later than the time of 574 c). A next section (“Chapter 4”) of structuredcontent 572 is displayed. Scrollposition indicator 576 has moved from a position adjacent tosection indicator 586, as indicated inFIG. 5AA , to a position adjacent to section indicator 588 (e.g., the scroll position indicator has “hopped” over section indicator 588), as indicated inFIG. 5BB , to indicate the occurrence of the translation to the adjacent section. -
FIG. 5CC illustrates a displayed next section of structuredcontent 572 after liftoff of the contact has occurred, in accordance with some embodiments. In response to the liftoff of the contact,scroll position indicator 576 andsection indicators Structured content 572 is returned to its initial size (e.g., the adjacent section is displayed at the same size of the section of structuredcontent 572 displayed inFIG. 5Y ). -
FIGS. 5DD-5TT illustrate exemplary user interfaces for moving content on a display in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes inFIGS. 9A-9D and 10A-10C . -
FIGS. 5DD-5GG illustrate content scrolling (FIGS. 5DD and 5EE ) and movement of content occurring in response to lift-off of a contact (FIGS. 5FF and 5GG ) when a detected characteristic intensity of a contact has a first intensity prior to lift-off, in accordance with some embodiments. - In
FIG. 5DD , a contact is detected at touch ontouch screen 112 at a location indicated byfocus selector 594. The contact moves along a path indicated byarrow 598. A first portion of content 592 (the poem “The Raven” by Edgar Allan Poe) is presented ontouch screen display 112. As the movement of the contact occurs,content 592 is scrolled (e.g., in the direction of movement of the contact). A currently viewed position within content 592 (e.g., relative to the overall length of content 592) is indicated byscroll position indicator 596. InFIG. 5DD , the intensity of the contact is between a contact-detection intensity threshold IT0 and a hint intensity threshold ITH, as indicated byintensity meter 530. - In
FIG. 5EE ,content 592 has been scrolled in accordance with the movement of the contact from an initial position as indicated byfocus selector 594 a (e.g.,focus selector 594 at a first point in time) to a subsequent position as indicated byfocus selector 594 b (e.g.,focus selector 594 at a second point in time that is later than the first point in time) along the path indicated byarrow 598. In accordance with the changed currently viewed position withincontent 592,scroll position indicator 596 is shown at a lower position in 5EE than the position ofscroll position indicator 596 in 5DD. - In
FIG. 5FF , following movement of the contact as described with regard toFIGS. 5DD-5EE , lift-off of the contact fromtouch screen 112 has occurred. In response to the lift-off of the contact following the movement of the contact, thecontent 592 moves at a velocity (also referred to herein as “speed”) v1, as indicated bydotted arrow 5100. - In
FIG. 5GG , the movement ofcontent 592 continues at a reduced velocity v2, as indicated bydotted arrow 5100. The velocity of the movement is reduced from velocity v1, as indicated inFIG. 5FF , to velocity v2, as indicated in 5GG, (e.g., to indicate a friction effect). For example, the movement of the content slows due to virtual friction betweencontent 592 and the virtual surface over whichcontent 592 is moving. -
FIGS. 5HH-5KK illustrate content scrolling (FIGS. 5HH and 5II ) and movement of content occurring in response to lift-off of a contact (FIGS. 5JJ and 5KK ) when a detected characteristic intensity of a contact has a second intensity prior to lift-off, in accordance with some embodiments. - In
FIG. 5HH , a contact is detected at touch ontouch screen 112 at a location indicated byfocus selector 594. The contact moves along a path indicated byarrow 5102. A first portion ofcontent 592 is presented ontouch screen display 112. As the movement of the contact occurs,content 592 is scrolled (e.g., in the direction of movement of the contact). A currently viewed position within content 592 (e.g., relative to the overall length of content 592) is indicated byscroll position indicator 596. InFIG. 5HH , the intensity of the contact has increased above a light press intensity threshold ITL, as indicated byintensity meter 530. Scrollenhancement indicator 5104 is shown (e.g., to indicate an extent to which the characteristic intensity of the contact is affecting content scrolling and/or post-lift-off content movement behavior). For example, the length ofscroll enhancement indicator 5104 provides a visual indication of a simulated inertia ofcontent 592 that occurs on lift-off (e.g., the resistance to slowing down after lift-off from the velocity with whichcontent 592 is moving in response to the movement of the contact prior to lift-off). In some embodiments, a simulated inertia is set based on a characteristic intensity of the contact. - In
FIG. 5II ,content 592 has been scrolled in accordance with the movement of the contact from an initial position as indicated byfocus selector 594 c (e.g.,focus selector 594 at a first point in time) to a subsequent position as indicated byfocus selector 594 d (e.g.,focus selector 594 at a second point in time that is later than the first point in time) along the path indicated byarrow 5102. In accordance with the changed currently viewed position withincontent 592,scroll position indicator 596 is shown at a lower position in 5II than the position ofscroll position indicator 596 in 5HH. - In
FIG. 5JJ , following movement of the contact as described with regard toFIGS. 5HH-5II , lift-off of the contact fromtouch screen 112 has occurred. In response to the lift-off of the contact following the movement of the contact, thecontent 592 moves at a velocity v3, as indicated bydotted arrow 5106. Compared with the velocity of movement ofcontent 592 that occurred as indicated inFIGS. 5FF-5GG ,content 592 moves with a greater velocity inFIGS. 5II-5KK (e.g., v3 is greater than v1) in accordance with the higher characteristic intensity of the contact withtouch screen 112 prior to lift-off as indicated inFIGS. 5HH-5II . - In
FIG. 5KK , the movement ofcontent 592 continues at a reduced velocity v4, as indicated bydotted arrow 5106. The velocity of the movement is reduced from velocity v3, as indicated inFIG. 5JJ , to velocity v4, as indicated in 5KK (e.g., to indicate a friction effect). Compared with the movement ofcontent 592 that occurred in response to liftoff as indicated inFIGS. 5FF-5GG ,content 592 moves by a greater distance in FIGS. 5JJ-5KK in accordance with the higher characteristic intensity of the contact withtouch screen 112 prior to lift-off as indicated inFIGS. 5HH-5II . -
FIGS. 5LL-5OO illustrate content scrolling (FIGS. 5LL and 5MM ) and movement of content occurring in response to lift-off of a contact (FIGS. 5NN and 5OO ) when a detected characteristic intensity of a contact has a third intensity prior to lift-off, in accordance with some embodiments. - In
FIG. 5LL , a contact is detected ontouch screen 112 at a location indicated byfocus selector 594. The contact moves along a path indicated byarrow 5108. A first portion ofcontent 592 is presented ontouch screen display 112. As the movement of the contact occurs,content 592 is scrolled (e.g., in the direction of movement of the contact). A currently viewed position within content 592 (e.g., relative to the overall length of content 592) is indicated byscroll position indicator 596. InFIG. 5LL , the intensity of the contact has increased further above a light press intensity threshold ITL, to just below deep press intensity threshold ITD (e.g., the characteristic intensity of the contact indicated inFIG. 5LL exceeds the characteristic intensity of the contact as indicated inFIG. 5HH ), as indicated byintensity meter 530. Scrollenhancement indicator 5104 ofFIG. 5LL is longer thanscroll enhancement indicator 5104 ofFIG. 5HH (e.g., visually indicating the speed of the content's motion). - In
FIG. 5MM ,content 592 has been scrolled in accordance with the movement of the contact from an initial position as indicated byfocus selector 594 e (e.g.,focus selector 594 at a first point in time) to a subsequent position as indicated byfocus selector 594 f (e.g.,focus selector 594 at a second point in time that is later than the first point in time) along the path indicated byarrow 5108. In accordance with the changed currently viewed position withincontent 592,scroll position indicator 596 is shown at a lower position in 5MM than the position ofscroll position indicator 596 in 5LL. - In
FIG. 5NN , following movement of the contact as described with regard toFIGS. 5LL-5MM , lift-off of the contact fromtouch screen 112 has occurred. In response to the lift-off of the contact following the movement of the contact, thecontent 592 moves at a velocity v5, as indicated bydotted arrow 5110. Compared with the velocity of movement ofcontent 592 that occurred as indicated inFIGS. 5II-5KK ,content 592 moves with a greater velocity inFIGS. 5NN-5OO (e.g., v5 is greater than v3) in accordance with the higher characteristic intensity of the contact withtouch screen 112 prior to lift-off as indicated inFIGS. 5LL-5MM . - In
FIG. 5OO , the movement ofcontent 592 continues at a reduced velocity v6, as indicated bydotted arrow 5110. The velocity of the movement is reduced from velocity v5, as indicated inFIG. 5NN , to velocity v6, as indicated in 5OO (e.g., to indicate a friction effect). Compared with the movement ofcontent 592 that occurred in response to liftoff as indicated inFIGS. 5JJ-5KK ,content 592 moves by a greater distance inFIGS. 5NN-5OO in accordance with the higher characteristic intensity of the contact withtouch screen 112 prior to lift-off as indicated inFIGS. 5LL-5MM . Scrollenhancement indicator 5104 ofFIG. 5OO is shorter thanscroll enhancement indicator 5104 ofFIG. 5NN (e.g., visually indicating the reduced speed of the content's motion). -
FIGS. 5PP-5RR illustrate scrolling throughcontent 592 to a predefined portion of the content in response to lift-off of a contact when the contact had a characteristic intensity above an intensity threshold prior to the lift-off of the contact, in accordance with some embodiments. - In
FIG. 5PP , a contact is detected at touch ontouch screen 112 at a location indicated byfocus selector 594. The contact moves along a path indicated byarrow 5112. A first portion ofcontent 592 is presented ontouch screen display 112. As the movement of the contact occurs,content 592 is scrolled (e.g., in the direction of movement of the contact). A currently viewed position within content 592 (e.g., relative to the overall length of content 592) is indicated byscroll position indicator 596. InFIG. 5PP , the intensity of the contact has increased above a deep press intensity threshold ITD, as indicated byintensity meter 530. - In
FIG. 5QQ ,content 592 has been scrolled in accordance with the movement of the contact from an initial position as indicated byfocus selector 594 g (e.g.,focus selector 594 at a first point in time) to a subsequent position as indicated byfocus selector 594 h (e.g.,focus selector 594 at a second point in time that is later than the first point in time) along the path indicated byarrow 5112. In accordance with the changed currently viewed position withincontent 592,scroll position indicator 596 is shown at a lower position in 5QQ than the position ofscroll position indicator 596 in 5PP. - In
FIG. 5RR , following movement of the contact as described with regard toFIGS. 5PP-5QQ , lift-off of the contact fromtouch screen 112 has occurred. In response to the lift-off of the contact following the movement of the contact, in accordance with a determination that the contact had a characteristic intensity above an intensity threshold (e.g., deep press intensity threshold ITD)content 592 is scrolled to a predefined portion (e.g., the end ofcontent 592 as indicated byscroll position indicator 596 in 5RR). -
FIG. 5SS illustrates an intensity filter, in accordance with some embodiments. Solid line indicates a detected intensity of a contact.Dotted line 5116 indicates a shifted intensity profile that indicates filtered intensity values based on the detected intensity values indicated by detected intensity. The intensity filter shifts an intensity profile of a contact, e.g., by a first time shift past the lift-off of the contact. For example, lift-off of the contact occurs at a point in time indicated by tlift-off. In some embodiments, a characteristic intensity value IC at lift-off is determined from a point on shiftedintensity profile 5116 corresponding to a time tlift-off when lift-off of contact fromtouch screen 112 is detected (e.g., the time when detected intensity drops to a contact intensity value of 0). In some embodiments, an initial speed for moving content (e.g., v1, v3, v5 as indicated inFIG. 5FF, 5JJ, 5NN , respectively) and/or a steady state speed for scrolling through the content to the predefined portion (e.g., scrolling to the end ofcontent 592 as indicated byscroll position indicator 596 in 5RR) are determined based on a selected intensity value (e.g., IC) on the shiftedintensity profile 5116. -
FIG. 5TT illustrates a speed filter, in accordance with some embodiments.Solid line 5118 indicates a detected speed of a contact.Dotted line 5120 indicates a shifted speed profile that indicates filtered speed values based on the detected speed values indicated by detectedspeed 5118. The speed filter shifts a speed profile of a contact, e.g., by a first time shift past the lift-off of the contact. For example, lift-off of the contact occurs at a point in time indicated by tlift-off. In some embodiments, a characteristic speed value VC at lift-off is determined from a point on shiftedspeed profile 5120 corresponding to a time tlift-off when lift-off of contact fromtouch screen 112 is detected (e.g., the time when detectedspeed 5118 drops to a contact speed value of 0). In some embodiments, an initial speed for moving content (e.g., v1, v3, v5 as indicated inFIG. 5FF, 5JJ, 5NN , respectively) and/or a steady state speed for scrolling through the content to the predefined portion (e.g., scrolling to the end ofcontent 592 as indicated byscroll position indicator 596 in 5RR) are determined based on a selected speed value (e.g., VC) on the shiftedspeed profile 5120. -
FIGS. 6A-6B are flow diagrams illustrating amethod 600 of navigating within and between content items in accordance with some embodiments. Themethod 600 is performed at an electronic device (e.g.,device 300,FIG. 3 , or portablemultifunction device 100,FIG. 1A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations inmethod 600 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. - As described below, the
method 600 provides an efficient way to navigate within and between content items based on the intensity of a user input. Such methods reduce the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to interact with the content item faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. - In some embodiments,
method 600 is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. - The device displays (602), on the display, content of a first content item, wherein the first content item is one of a sequence of content items (e.g., a plurality of content items).
- In some embodiments, the sequence of content items corresponds (604) to a plurality of electronic messages in an electronic messaging application (e.g., as shown in
FIG. 5J ), a plurality of web browser windows (or tabbed windows) in a web browser, a plurality of applications, a plurality of digital images in a set of images (e.g., a single album or collection in a photo or camera application), or a plurality of sets of digital images (e.g., a plurality of albums or collections of photos in a photo or camera application). In some embodiments, the sequence of content items corresponds to a plurality of content sections, such as a plurality conversations in a messaging or email application, a plurality of weeks (or months or years) in a calendar application, a plurality of chapters in a book, a plurality of scenes in a video, or a plurality of events in a digital image library. - The device detects (606) a user input that includes movement of a contact in a respective direction on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the user input is a swipe gesture that is made with the contact (e.g.,
user input 510,FIGS. 5B-5C and/oruser input 513,FIGS. 5E-5G ). In some embodiments, the swipe gesture includes movement of the contact from a first location on the touch-sensitive surface to a second location on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the swipe gesture is a vertical swipe gesture. In some embodiments, the swipe gesture is a horizontal swipe gesture. - In response (608) to detecting the user input: in accordance with a determination that the user input meets item-switching criteria, the device replaces display of the first content item with display of a second content item (e.g., a different content item distinct from the first content item) in the sequence of content items, wherein the item-switching criteria include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity (e.g., a maximum intensity) of the contact is above a first intensity threshold (e.g.,
user input 513,FIGS. 5E-5G results in replacing display ofcontent item 502 with display of second content 518). - In some embodiments, the item-switching criteria also include a criterion that is met when the device detects a predetermined magnitude (e.g., amount or distance) of movement of the contact (e.g.,
FIG. 5E shows movement ofuser input 513 as a precondition to replacing display ofcontent item 502 with display of second content 518). That is, there is a predetermined magnitude of movement that is required to be detected by the device in order to cause the device to replace display of the first content item with display of the second content item. In some embodiments, slight movement of the contact (e.g., less than the predetermined magnitude) results in display of a portion of the second content item and the device then reverts back to displaying the first content item when the contact terminates. - In some embodiments, when an initial intensity of the contact does not exceed the first intensity threshold (e.g., ITL in
FIG. 5B ), the device scrolls the first content item in response to the initial user input (e.g., an initial portion of a swipe gesture). If later during the user input, the contact exceeds the first intensity threshold, the device then transitions to displaying the second content item. In some embodiments, the item-switching criteria are met when the initial intensity of the contact exceeds the first intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the item-switching criteria are met when the initial intensity of the contact exceeds the first intensity threshold while the contact is moving (e.g., moving above a predetermined velocity threshold). In some embodiments, the item-switching criteria are not met if the contact is stationary or is moving below a predetermined velocity threshold, even if the characteristic intensity of the contact exceeds the first intensity threshold. - In response (608) to detecting the user input: in accordance with a determination that the user input does not meet the item-switching criteria, the device navigates through the content of the first content item in accordance with the movement of the contact (e.g., displaying a second portion of the first content that is different from the first portion of the content, as shown in
FIGS. 5A-5C ). - In some embodiments, the item-switching criteria includes (610) a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the contact exceeds the first intensity threshold after detecting at least a predetermined threshold amount of movement of the contact. For example when an increase in intensity from below the first intensity threshold to above the first intensity threshold is detected before the user starts swiping (e.g., before the device detects movement of the contact), the device does not switch between content items. Conversely, in this example, when the increase in intensity from below the first intensity threshold to above the first intensity threshold is detected during the swipe, the device navigates to the second content item).
- In some embodiments, the second content item is (612) sequentially adjacent to the first content item (e.g. in the sequence of content items) and is selected based on the respective direction of the movement of the contact. In some embodiments, replacing display of the first content item with the second content item includes displaying a transition between the first content item and the second content item. The transition includes concurrently displaying at least a portion of the first content item and at least a portion of the second content item and the transition is dynamically controlled by the user input.
- In some embodiments, replacing display of the first content item with a second content item in the sequence of content items includes sliding the first content item off the display in a direction corresponding to the respective direction and sliding the second content item onto the display in the direction corresponding to the respective direction. For example, when the movement of the contact is principally vertically upwards, the first content item is slid off the display vertically upwards toward the top of the display and the second content item is slid onto the display vertically upwards from the bottom of the display. In some embodiments, a vertically upward swipe results in forward navigation in the sequence of content items (e.g. when the first content item is a photograph, forward navigation results in display of another photograph that is more recent than the first photograph) or vice versa. As another example, when the movement of the contact is principally vertically downwards, the first content item is slid off the display vertically downwards toward the bottom of the display and the second content item is slid onto the display vertically downwards from the top of the display. In some embodiments, a vertically downwards swipe results in backward navigation in the sequence of content items (e.g. when the first content item is a photograph, backward navigation results in display of another photograph that is less recent than the first photograph) or vice versa. In some embodiments, the device performs analogous functionality with respect to horizontal swipes. For example, a rightward-swipe results in backward navigation with left-to-right sliding, and a leftward swipe results in forward navigation with right-to-left sliding or vice versa.
- In some embodiments, replacing display of the first content item with a second content item includes directly manipulating the first content item and the second content item in accordance with the movement of the contact. For example, the movement (e.g., speed, direction, and/or position) of the first content item and the second content item, when sliding on and off the display as described above, corresponds to (e.g. tracks) the movement of the contact so that the user feels that she is directly dragging the second content item onto the display and pushing the first content item off the display.
- In some embodiments, navigating through the content of the first content item includes: in accordance with a determination that the respective direction is a first direction on the touch-sensitive surface, scrolling (614) the content in a first direction on the display; and in accordance with a determination that the respective direction is a second direction on the touch-sensitive surface, scrolling the content in a second direction on the display that is different from the first direction on the display. In some embodiments, navigating through the content of the first content item includes directly manipulating the displayed content of the first content item in accordance with the movement of the contact. For example, the movement (e.g., speed, direction, and/or distance) of the content, when scrolled, tracks the movement of the contact. In some embodiments, the scrolling occurs in the same direction as the sliding of content items on and off the display that would have occurred, as described above, had the user input met the item-switching criteria. So, for example, a vertically upwards swipe that is below the first intensity threshold results in upward scrolling of the first content item, while a vertically upward swipe that is above the first intensity threshold results in sliding the first content item upwards off the top of the display and sliding the second content item upwards from the bottom of the display.
- In some embodiments, navigating through the content of the first content item in accordance with the movement of the contact includes: maintaining (616) display of a first portion of the first content item in a first user interface region on the display; and navigating (e.g., scrolling) through a second portion of the first content item in a second user interface region on the display. In some embodiments, when scrolling the content within a content item, a portion of the content item (e.g., an email header or universal resource locator (URL) bar) is fixed relative to the content (e.g., the body of the content), whereas when switching between the content items, the whole first content item (e.g., both the first portion of the first content item and the second portion of the first content item) scrolls with the content. For example, when switching between the content items, an email header and/or URL bar scroll with the corresponding content item.
- In some embodiments, replacing display of the first content item with the second content item includes displaying (618) a transition between the first content item and the second content item; and the transition includes reducing a size of the first content item. For example, the transition includes zooming out from the first content item at the start of the transition to indicate to the user that the device is navigating to the second content item rather than navigating (e.g., scrolling) within the first content item. In some embodiments, the progress of the transition is directly controllable by the user, e.g., via the intensity of the contact. So, for example, as the user increases the contact intensity toward the first intensity threshold, the first content item zooms-out. If the user subsequently reduces the intensity of the contact slightly, the first content item zooms back in. In some embodiments, a plurality of intensity levels within the vicinity of the first intensity threshold map to a plurality of corresponding zoom levels (e.g., sizes) of the first content item. Thus, the user feels as though she is pushing the first content item back in the z-direction by pushing harder on the contact. In some embodiments, as a result of reducing the size of the first content item, a region beyond an edge of the first content item is displayed (e.g., a background area that is a different color or pattern than a color or pattern of the background of the first content item, illustrating to the user that the first content item has been pushed back in the z-direction, as shown in
FIG. 5E ). - In some embodiments, replacing display of the first content item with the second content item includes displaying (620) a transition between the first content item and the second content item; and the transition includes increasing a size of the second content item (e.g., zooming in on the second content item at the end of the transition to indicate that navigation to the second content item is complete). In some embodiments, the progress of the transition is directly controllable by the user, e.g., via the intensity of the contact. So, for example, as the user reduces the contact intensity toward the first intensity threshold, the second content item zooms-in. If the user subsequently increases the intensity of the contact slightly, the second content item zooms back out. In some embodiments, a plurality of intensity levels within the vicinity of the first intensity threshold map to a plurality of corresponding zoom levels (e.g., sizes) of the second content item. For example, the increase in intensity of the contact from below the first intensity threshold to above the first intensity threshold causes the device to push the first content item back. Movement of the contact then drags the second content item onto the display and pushes the first content item off of the display, where both the first content item and the second content item are zoomed-out during dragging (e.g., scrolling). When the second content item is scrolled onto (e.g., entirely onto the display, or past a predefined threshold for transitioning to the second content item), the second content item increases in size when the intensity is reduced from above the first intensity threshold to below the first intensity threshold, or when liftoff of the contact is detected, as shown in
FIGS. 5G-5I . - In some embodiments, while displaying the first content item, the device detects (622) a second user input at a location that corresponds to a selectable affordance (e.g., a URL link, data detected text, or an icon), wherein the second user input includes a second contact that is stationary on the touch-sensitive surface. In response to detecting the second user input, in accordance with a determination that the user input occurs while a focus selector is at a location that corresponds to a selectable affordance (e.g., a URL link, data detected text, or an icon) and the movement of the contact is less than a predetermined amount (e.g., the contact is stationary or nearly so), the device displays a preview area of content that corresponds to the selectable affordance overlaid on the first content item. In some embodiments, the device determines whether the contact is moving on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., the contact moves more than a predetermined amount in a predetermined time) or whether the contact is stationary (e.g., the contact moves less than a predetermined amount in a predetermined time) on the touch-sensitive surface. When the contact is moving, the device either navigates through the content of the first content item or replaces display of the first content item with the second content item depending on whether the user input meets item-switching criteria, as described above. However, when the contact is stationary and occurs on or over a selectable affordance, the device displays a preview (e.g., peeks at a second user interface that corresponds to the selectable affordance via a preview window).
- In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the user input begins at a first edge of the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., the user input is a flick gesture that starts at the edge of the touch-sensitive surface, sometimes called an “edge swipe”), the device performs (624) an operation that is distinct from both replacing display of the first content item with the second content item and navigating through the content of the first content item. For example, for a web browser, the operation includes displaying a web page from the history of web pages viewed in the window/tabbed window of the web browser; for an electronic messaging program, the operation includes displaying (e.g., in sequence) a plurality of representations of electronic communications; for a social networking application, the operation includes displaying a menu with settings for the application.) In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the user input begins at a first edge of the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., the user input is a flick gesture that starts at the edge of the touch-sensitive surface) and has a characteristic intensity above a respective intensity threshold, the device performs a different operation that is distinct from any of replacing display of the first user interface with the second user interface, displaying the second portion of the first user interface, or an operation that is performed when the characteristic intensity is below the respective threshold. For example, in response to detecting an edge-swipe with an intensity above the respective threshold, the device displays a multitasking user interface for switching between open applications).
- In some embodiments, after replacing display of the first content item with the second content item in the sequence of content items, detecting a second user input that includes movement of a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface; in response to detecting the second user input: in accordance with a determination that the second user input meets the item-switching criteria, the device replaces (626) display of the second content item with a third content item in the sequence of content items; and in accordance with a determination that the second user input does not meet the item-switching criteria, navigating through content of the second content item in accordance with the movement of the second contact.
- It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in
FIGS. 6A-6B have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g.,methods method 600 described above with respect toFIGS. 6A-6B . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described above with reference tomethod 700 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g.,methods -
FIGS. 7A-7C are flow diagrams illustrating amethod 700 of reordering list items in accordance with some embodiments. Themethod 700 is performed at an electronic device (e.g.,device 300,FIG. 3 , or portablemultifunction device 100,FIG. 1A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations inmethod 700 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. - As described below, the
method 700 provides an intuitive way to reorder list items. The method reduces the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user when reordering list items, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to reorder list items faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. - The device presents (702) a first portion of a list of
items 532 on the display. For example, a list ofitems 532 includesitems FIG. 5L , a portion of the list ofitems 532 is presented ontouch screen 112. The portion of the list of items shown inFIG. 5L includesitems - The device detects (704) a contact on the touch-
sensitive surface 112 while the first portion of the list ofitems 532 is presented on the display (e.g., while a focus selector is over a first item in the list of items). For example, a contact is detected ontouch screen 112 at a location indicated byfocus selector 550 while the first portion of the list of items 532 (including items 534-544) is presented ontouch screen 112, as shown inFIG. 5M .Focus selector 550 is overitem 534 oflist 532. - The device detects (706) a first movement of the contact on the touch-
sensitive surface 112 while a characteristic intensity of the contact remains below a first intensity threshold. The first intensity threshold is, e.g., hint intensity level ITH, light press intensity level ITL, or another statically or dynamically determined intensity level. For example, inFIG. 5M , the contact at the location indicated byfocus selector 550 moves ontouch screen 112, as indicated byarrow 552, while the characteristic intensity of the contact remains below ITH, as indicated byintensity level meter 530. - In response to detecting the first movement of the contact on the touch-
sensitive surface 112 while the characteristic intensity of the contact remains below the first intensity threshold (e.g., below ITH), the device scrolls (708) the list ofitems 532 to present a second portion of the list ofitems 532 on the display in accordance with the first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., as in regular scrolling with a light drag). For example, in response to the movement of the contact along the path indicated byarrow 552,list 532 is scrolled to present a second portion of thelist including items FIG. 5N . To indicate that scrolling has occurred,scroll position indicator 554 is shown at a higher position in the user interface of 5N than the position ofscroll position indicator 554 in the user interface of 5M. - While a
focus selector 550 associated with the contact is located on a first item (e.g., item 534) in the second portion of the list of items presented on the display (and while continuing to detect the contact on the touch-sensitive surface), the device detects (710) an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold (e.g., ITH as shown at intensity meter 530) followed by a second movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. For example, whilefocus selector 550 is located onitem 534 of the second portion of the list ofitems 532, as shown inFIG. 5O , a characteristic intensity of the contact increases above ITH, as shown atintensity meter 530, followed by a movement of the contact along the path indicated by 556. - In response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold followed by the second movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface, the device moves (712) the first item (e.g., item 534) relative to other items in the second portion of the list of
items 532 presented on the display in accordance with the second movement of the contact (e.g., detaching an item from the list and moving it with a drag that started with a deep press). For example, as shown atFIGS. 5P-5S , in response to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold (e.g., above ITH, as shown byintensity meter 530 as shown inFIG. 5O , above ITL, as shown byintensity meter 530 as shown inFIG. 5P , above deep press intensity level ITD, or above another statically or dynamically determined intensity threshold level) followed by movement of the contact along the path indicated byarrow 556,first item 534 moves relative toother items items 532. - In some embodiments, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold followed by the second movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface, while the
focus selector 550 associated with the contact is located on the first item (e.g., item 534) in the second portion of the list ofitems 532, the device changes (714) an appearance of the first item (e.g., enlarging the first item, highlighting a boundary of the first item, changing the color or hue of the first item, lifting the first item above the plane of the list of items, or providing a combination of two or more of the above visual effects, while maintaining the normal appearances of the other items in the list). For example, as shown inFIGS. 5O-5S , in response to the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold (e.g., above ITH, as shown byintensity meter 530 as shown inFIG. 5O , or above ITL, as shown byintensity meter 530 as shown inFIG. 5P ) followed by movement of the contact along the path indicated byarrow 556, whilefocus selector 550 is located onitem 534 in the second portion oflist 532, the appearance ofitem 534 is changed. For example, a highlighted boundary is shown arounditem 534, as shown inFIGS. 5O-5S . Whenitem 534 is detached fromlist 532, as shown inFIGS. 5P-5S , the size ofitem 534 is reduced anditem 534 is shown lifted above the plane of the list ofitems 532. In some embodiments, the appearance of the whole list may also change in a different way, so that the appearance change of the first item is still distinguished from the appearance change applied to the other items in the list. In some embodiments, as the characteristic intensity of the contact continues to vary above the first intensity threshold, the amount of appearance change is dynamically determined and adjusted based on the actual variation in the characteristic intensity of the contact. - In some embodiments, changing the appearance of the first item (e.g., item 534) includes (716) dynamically changing a size of the first item in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact (e.g., dynamically increasing the size of the first item as the current intensity of the contact increases beyond the first threshold, such that the first item overlaps with an item adjacent to the first item). For example, when the characteristic intensity of the contact at the position indicated by
focus selector 550 increases from a level above hint intensity threshold ITH, as shown byintensity meter 530 inFIG. 5O , to a level above light press intensity threshold ITL, as shown byintensity meter 530 inFIG. 5P , the size ofitem 534 decreases from the size ofitem 534 as shown inFIG. 5O to the size ofitem 534 as shown inFIG. 5P . - In some embodiments, in accordance with the second movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface, the device moves (718) the first item (e.g., item 534) by a first distance relative to a second item (e.g., item 536) that is adjacent to the first item to at least partially reveal a first item slot (e.g., item 558) associated with the first item on the display. For example, as shown in
FIGS. 5P-5R , in accordance with the movement of the contact ontouch screen 112 along the path indicated byarrow 556,item 534 moves relative toitem 536 to partially revealitem slot 558 associated with 534. - In some embodiments, moving the first item (e.g., item 534) by the first distance relative to the second item (e.g., item 536) that is adjacent to the first item includes (720), during an initial portion of the second movement of the contact (e.g., during the first 10 mm or 5 mm of the second movement of the contact after the intensity of the contact has reached above the first intensity threshold), moving the first item at a slower speed than the focus selector 550 to create a distance lag between the first item and the focus selector (e.g., the first item is dragged behind the focus selector with some inertia); and during a subsequent portion of the second movement of the contact following the initial portion of the second movement of the contact (e.g., after the first 10 mm or 5 mm of the second movement of the contact after the intensity of the contact has reached above the first intensity threshold), accelerating the movement of the first item to eliminate the distance lag between the first item and the focus selector (e.g., during the next 2 mm or 1 mm of the second movement of the contact after the initial portion of the second movement on the contact, the first item quickly snaps to the focus selector, and moves together with the focus selector for the remainder of the second movement). For example, during an initial portion of the movement of the contact along the path indicated by
arrow 556, as shown inFIGS. 5P-5Q ,item 534 moves at a slower speed than focus selector 550 (e.g., the position offocus selector 550 inFIG. 5P is different from the position offocus selector 550 inFIG. 5Q and the position ofitem 534 inFIG. 5P is the same as the position ofitem 534 inFIG. 5Q ). During a subsequent portion of the movement of the contact along the path indicated byarrow 556, as shown inFIGS. 5Q-5R , the movement ofitem 534 accelerates to eliminate the distance lag betweenitem 534 and focus selector 550 (e.g.,item 534 moves from a position as shown inFIG. 5Q withfocus selector 550 at the lower edge ofitem 534 to a position as shown inFIG. 5R withfocus selector 550 centered onitem 534, such thatitem 534 has “caught up” with focus selector 550). - In some embodiments, the device detects (722) a lift-off of the contact upon moving the first item (e.g., item 534) by the first distance relative to the second item (e.g., item 536) that is adjacent to the first item; and, in accordance with a determination that the first distance is smaller than a first threshold distance (e.g., half of a slot height), the device restores the first item into the first item slot (e.g. item slot 558) associated with the first item on the display (e.g., and reversing visual changes applied to the first item and/or other items in the list, such as restoring the size, transparency, etc. of the first item and/or other items in the list). For example,
item 534 is restored into item slot 558 (e.g. the location ofitem 534 beforeitem 534 detached from list 532), resulting in a user interface that displays alist 532 that is the same aslist 532 shown inFIG. 5N . - In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the first distance is greater than a first threshold distance (e.g., half of a slot height), the device moves (724) the second item into the first item slot associated with the first item to reveal a second item slot (e.g. item slot 560) associated with the second item (e.g., sliding the second item into a slot that was associated with the first item). For example, as shown in
FIG. 5S ,item 536 is moved into first item slot 558 (in whichitem 534 was previously located) and second item slot 560 (in whichitem 536 was previously located) is revealed. - In some embodiments, the device detects (726) a lift-off of the contact while the second item slot (e.g. item slot 560) associated with the second item (e.g., item 536) is revealed on the display; and in response to detecting the lift-off of the contact while the second item slot associated with the second item is revealed on the display, the device inserts the first item (e.g. 534) into the second item slot. For example, as shown in FIG. 5T1,
first item 534 is inserted into item slot 560 (that was previously occupied by item 536). - In some embodiments, during the second movement of the contact, for a plurality of other items besides the first item in the list of items, the device moves (728) a respective other item to a respective new item slot and reveals a respective previous item slot for the respective other item on the display. For example, as a movement of the contact that causes
item 534 to pass over multiple other items (e.g., overitems 536 and 538) occurs,item 536 is moved toitem slot 558 anditem slot 560 foritem 536 is revealed; and subsequentlyitem 538 is moved toitem slot 560 and a new item slot (not shown) is revealed. - In some embodiments, the device generates (730) a respective tactile output (e.g., thereby providing haptic feedback) as the respective other item moves to the respective new item slot and reveals the respective previous item slot (e.g., the tactile output is feedback indicating that the respective other item has snapped into a new slot). For example, as shown in
FIG. 5S , whenitem 536 moves toitem slot 558 anditem slot 560 is revealed, a tactile output, as indicated at 562, occurs. - In some embodiments, a respective movement of the respective other item changes (732) in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact during the second movement of the contact. For example, the movement of the respective other item slows down when the contact intensity increases. As a result, the scrolling of the other items in the list during the movement of the first item slows down when the intensity of the contact increases during the second movement of the contact.
- In some embodiments, the device detects (734) that the first item (e.g. item 534) has moved within a second threshold distance of a first end (e.g., top or bottom) of the displayed second portion of the list of items in accordance with the second movement of the contact; and, in response to detecting that the first item has moved within the second threshold distance of the first end of the displayed second portion of the list of items, the device scrolls the list of items toward a second end (e.g., bottom or top) of the displayed second portion of the list of items opposite the first end to display a third portion of the list of items. For example, as shown in FIG. 5T2,
item 534 moves along a path indicated byarrow 564 to a location within a threshold distance oflower edge 566 of the displayed portion oflist 532. The list ofitems 532 is scrolled towardupper edge 568, as shown in FIGS. 5T2-5U. In 5U,items scroll position indicator 554 is shown at a lower position in the user interface of 5U than the position ofscroll position indicator 554 in the user interface of 5T2. - In some embodiments, scrolling the list of
items 532 toward the second end (e.g., toward upper edge 568) of the displayed second portion of the list of items opposite the first end (e.g., lower edge 566) to display the third portion of the list of items includes (736): dynamically changing a scrolling speed of the scrolling toward the second end of the displayed second portion of the list of items in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact. In some embodiments, increasing the intensity of the contact causes the scrolling of the list of items to speed up, e.g., to quickly scroll to the desired location in the list for inserting the first item. In some embodiments, increasing the intensity of the contact causes the scrolling of the list of items to slow down, e.g., to allow the user to see more clearly which items are coming into view. - In some embodiments, the device applies (738) a transparency effect to the first item (e.g., making the first item semitransparent) while the first item (e.g. item 734) overlaps with another item in the list of items (e.g., item 736).
- It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in
FIGS. 7A-7C have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g.,methods method 700 described above with respect toFIGS. 7A-7C . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described above with reference tomethod 700 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g.,methods -
FIGS. 8A-8C are flow diagrams illustrating amethod 800 of navigating structured content in accordance with some embodiments. Themethod 800 is performed at an electronic device (e.g.,device 300,FIG. 3 , or portablemultifunction device 100,FIG. 1A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations inmethod 800 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. - As described below, the
method 800 provides an intuitive way to navigate structured content. The method reduces the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user when navigating structured content, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to navigate structured content faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. - The device presents (802) a first portion of
structured content 572 on the display, wherein the structuredcontent 572 includes a plurality of sections, and the first portion includes content from a first section of the plurality of sections. For example, structured content 572 (e.g., the book The Jungle Book by Rudyard Kipling), as illustrated inFIGS. 5V-5CC includes multiple sections (e.g., chapters).FIG. 5V shows a portion including content fromChapter 3 of structuredcontent 572. - The device detects (804) a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface while the first portion of the structured content is presented on the display. For example, as shown at
FIGS. 5W-5BB , a contact is received at a location indicated byfocus selector 574. - The device detects (806) an increase in a characteristic intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., an increase from below hint intensity threshold ITH to above ITH, as indicated at
FIGS. 5Y-5Z and/or an increase from below light press intensity threshold ITL to above ITL, as indicated atFIGS. 5Z-5AA ) and detects a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a movement along a path indicated byarrow 580 inFIGS. 5Z-5BB ). In some embodiments, detection of the movement of the contact is required before detection of the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact (e.g., to differentiate from a gesture for triggering a peek and pop response of the user interface). In some embodiments, detection of an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact is required before detection of the movement of the contact. In some embodiments there is no relative timing requirement for detecting the increase in contact intensity and detecting the movement of the contact. - In response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact and detecting the first movement of the first contact (808): in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., above intensity light press intensity threshold ITL, or another statically or dynamically determined threshold), the device translates the structured
content 572 to display a start of a second section adjacent to the first section of the structured content at a predefined location on the display (e.g., the device translates the structured content to display at the beginning of the UI window or the middle of the UI window). For example,FIGS. 5AA-5BB illustrate a translation of structuredcontent 572 from displaying a portion of a first section (Chapter 3, as shown inFIG. 5AA ) to displaying a start of an adjacent section (Chapter 4, as shown inFIG. 5BB ). In some embodiments, the predefined location on the display is chosen independent of the structured content and/or the movement of the contact. In accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact does not increase above the first intensity threshold (e.g., does not exceed light press intensity threshold ITL), the device translates the structuredcontent 572 in accordance with a magnitude of the movement (e.g., speed or distance) of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. For example, as shown inFIGS. 5W-5X , structuredcontent 572 is translated (e.g., from showing a first portion ofChapter 3, as shown inFIG. 5W , to showing a second portion ofChapter 3, as shown inFIG. 5X ) in accordance with a distance traversed byfocus selector 574 as the contact moves acrosstouch screen 112 along a path indicated byarrow 578. - In some embodiments, during the translating of the structured content to display the start of the second section adjacent to the first section on the display, a
focus selector 574 associated with the first contact is on (810) the structured content 572 (and not on an index or scroll bar presented on the display). For example, as shown inFIGS. 5AA-5BB , during the translating of the structured content to display the start of the second section (e.g., Chapter 4) adjacent to the first section (Chapter 3),focus selector 574 is located on thestructured content 572. - In some embodiments, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the first movement of the first contact (e.g., in response to detecting an increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact above the first intensity threshold, and the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface), the device applies (812) a visual effect on the first portion of the structured content on the display. In some embodiments, applying the visual effect includes shrinking the first portion of the structured content, and/or pushing the first portion of the structured content to a lower z-level on the display. For example, as shown in
FIGS. 5Y-5Z , the displayed portion ofstructured content 572 is reduced in size (e.g., from the size of the displayed portion ofstructured content 572 inFIG. 5Y to the size of the displayed portion ofstructured content 572 inFIG. 5Z ) and pushed to a lower z-level on the display. - In some embodiments, the device removes (814) the applied visual effect on the first portion of the structured content on the display during the translating of the structured content.
- In some embodiments, prior to the determination that the characteristic intensity of the first contact has increased above the first intensity threshold (816): the device detects an initial increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact (e.g., an increase above the first intensity threshold); and, in response to detecting the initial increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact, the device concurrently presents a scroll bar with the first portion of the structured
content 572 on the display, wherein the scroll bar includes ascroll position indicator 576 that indicates a respective position of the first portion of the structuredcontent 572 in the structuredcontent 572; and, in response to the determination that the characteristic intensity of the first contact has increased above the first intensity threshold (e.g., ITL), the device presents a plurality of section indicators (e.g. section indicators FIG. 5Z ) along with thescroll position indicator 576, wherein a relative ordering of thesection indicators scroll position indicator 576 corresponds to relative positions of the sections to the first portion of the structured content in the structuredcontent 572. - In some embodiments, presenting the plurality of section indicators with the scroll bar includes: presenting (818) an animation that shows the plurality of
section indicators scroll position indicator 576 and spreading out along the scroll bar. For example, as illustrated inFIGS. 5Z-5AA ,section indicators FIG. 5Z to spread positions as indicated inFIG. 5AA . In some embodiments, the animation shows the section indicators flying out from the scroll position indicator, overshooting, and then bouncing back to their respective final positions along the scroll bar. - In some embodiments, when translating of the structured content to display the start of the second section adjacent to the first section of the structured content, the device presents (820) an animation that shows the
scroll position indicator 576 hopping over a respective section indicator (e.g., section indicator 588) in the plurality of section indicators (e.g., the section indicator that is adjacent to the scroll position indicator in the scroll direction). For example, as shown inFIGS. 5AA-5BB , scrollposition indicator 576 hops from abovesection indicator 588, as shown inFIG. 5AA , to belowsection indicator 588, as shown inFIG. 5BB . - In some embodiments, the device detects (822) a lift-off of the first contact, and, in response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact, the device ceases to display the scroll bar, the scroll position indicator, and the plurality of section indicators. For example, as shown in
FIGS. 5BB-5CC , thescroll position indicator 576 andsection indicators FIG. 5BB are no longer visible when liftoff occurs as shown inFIG. 5CC . In some embodiments, the scroll bar, the scroll position indicator, and the plurality of section indicators are displayed in response to the determination that the characteristic intensity of the first contact has increased above the first intensity threshold, and if the first movement is detected after the characteristic intensity of the first contact has decreased below the first intensity threshold, the section scrolling mode is not entered, and the plurality of section indicators (and optionally, the scroll bar and the scroll position indicator) are removed from the display. - In some embodiments, in response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact, the device presents (824) an animation that shows the plurality of section indicators (
e.g. section indicators FIGS. 5AA-5BB ) moving (e.g., retracting) into thescroll position indicator 576 before ceasing the display thescroll position indicator 576. - In some embodiments, the
structured content 572 is translated (826) to display the start of the second section (e.g., Chapter 4) adjacent to the first section (e.g., Chapter 3) of the structured content at the predefined location on the display in accordance with a determination that the first movement of the first contact (e.g., along the path indicated by arrow 580) exceeds a first threshold distance. In some embodiments, if the first movement of the first contact does not exceed the first threshold distance, the structured content is not translated to display the start of the second section adjacent to the first section of the structured content at the predefined location on the display. Instead, the first portion of the structured content remains to be displayed at or is restored to its original location on the display after the first movement. - In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity of the first contact is below (828) the first intensity threshold (e.g., below ITL as indicated by intensity meter 530) after the first movement of the first contact (e.g., along the path indicated by arrow 580) exceeds the first threshold distance. For example, the user can release the pressure on the content (e.g., decrease the contact intensity) below the first intensity threshold after entering the section scrolling mode (e.g., entering the section scrolling mode with the increase in intensity above the first intensity threshold and moving the first contact by at least the first threshold distance). Upon reduction of the contact intensity, the device remains in the section scrolling mode, and further movement beyond the first threshold distance is used for continued section scrolling.
- In some embodiments, the sections in the structured content are mapped (830) to a plurality of vertical positions on the display (e.g., the plurality of sections correspond to an equal number of positions evenly distributed on the display in the scrolling direction (e.g., the vertical direction). In some embodiments, the vertical positions are represented by respective markers, e.g., section markers (such as
section indicators section 3 to the position corresponding tosection 5 causes the content to be scrolled fromsection 3 tosection 5, as opposed to causing the content to be scrolled by the amount determined in regular scrolling. In other words, regardless of how many pages are included insection 3 tosection 5, a physical movement from the position corresponding tosection 3 to the position corresponding tosection 5 on the display (e.g., a fixed physical distance), would cause scrolling fromsection 3 tosection 5 in the section scrolling mode. In contrast, in conventional scrolling, the physical distance of the movement of the contact is much more closely correlated with the amount of content scrolling (e.g., lines, pages, etc.) that is performed. - It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in
FIGS. 8A-8C have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described with respect to other methods described herein (e.g.,methods method 800 described above with respect toFIGS. 8A-8C . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, animations described above with reference tomethod 800 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g.,methods -
FIGS. 9A-9D are flow diagrams illustrating amethod 900 of moving content on a display in accordance with some embodiments. Themethod 900 is performed at an electronic device (e.g.,device 300,FIG. 3 , or portablemultifunction device 100,FIG. 1A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations inmethod 900 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. - As described below, the
method 900 provides an intuitive way to move content on a display. The method reduces the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user when moving content on a display, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to move content on a display faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. - The device presents (902) a first portion of content 592 (e.g., “The Raven” by Edgar Allan Poe) on a display (e.g., touch screen 112).
- While presenting the first portion of the
content 592 on the display, the device (904) detects a first contact on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch screen 112) and detects a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a movement offocus selector 594, such as a movement along a path indicated byarrow 598 ofFIGS. 5DD-5EE , a movement along a path indicated byarrow 5102 ofFIGS. 5HH-5II , or a movement along a path indicated byarrow 5108 ofFIGS. 5LL-5MM ). - In response to detecting the first movement of the first contact, the device scrolls (906) the
content 592 to present a second portion of the content on the display in accordance with the first movement of the first contact. For example,content 592 is scrolled from the first portion of the content displayed inFIG. 5DD to present a second portion of the content inFIG. 5EE . Scrolling to present a second portion of thecontent 592 is also described with regard toFIGS. 5II, and 5MM . - The device detects (908) an increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface. For example, as shown in
FIGS. 5DD-5EE , the intensity of the contact increases above contact detection intensity threshold IT0, as indicated byintensity meter 530, during movement of the contact along a path indicated byarrow 598. InFIGS. 5HH-5II , the intensity of the contact increases above light press intensity threshold ITL, as indicated byintensity meter 530, during movement of the contact along a path indicated byarrow 5102. InFIGS. 5LL-5MM , the intensity of the contact increases above light press intensity threshold ITL, as indicated byintensity meter 530, during movement of the contact along a path indicated byarrow 5108. - After detecting the increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, the device detects (910) a lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface. For example, lift-off of the contact is detected, as indicated at
FIG. 5FF , following the movement of the contact indicated inFIGS. 5DD-5EE . Lift-off of the contact is also detected, as indicated atFIG. 5JJ , following the movement of the contact indicated inFIGS. 5HH-5II . Lift-off of the contact is also detected, as indicated atFIG. 5NN , following the movement of the contact indicated inFIGS. 5LL-5MM . - In response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, the device moves (912) the
content 592 on the display by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic intensity of the first contact and a characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact. For example,content 592 moves in response to lift-off of the contact from a position as indicated atFIG. 5FF to a different position as indicated 5GG. Movement ofcontent 592 in response to lift-off is additionally illustrated atFIGS. 5JJ-5KK and 5NN-5OO . - In some embodiments, the characteristic speed of the first movement is a first speed and moving the
content 592 on the display by an amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes (914): in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity is a first intensity (e.g., a characteristic intensity of the contact below light press intensity threshold ITL, as indicated inFIGS. 5DD-5EE ), moving thecontent 592 by a first amount (e.g. movement ofcontent 592 from a position at lift-off as shown inFIG. 5FF to a moved position as shown inFIG. 5GG ); and in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity is a second intensity that is different from the first intensity (e.g., an characteristic intensity of the contact above light press intensity threshold ITL, as indicated inFIGS. 5HH-5II ), moving the content by a second amount that is different from the first amount (e.g. movement ofcontent 592 from a position at lift-off as shown inFIG. 5JJ to a moved position as shown inFIG. 5KK ). The amount of movement ofcontent 592 as shown inFIGS. 5FF-5GG is less than the amount of movement ofcontent 592 as shown inFIGS. 5JJ-5KK . - In some embodiments, the first intensity is greater than the second intensity and the first amount of movement is greater than the second amount of movement (916). For example, the first intensity has a characteristic intensity of the contact above a light press intensity threshold ITL (e.g., as indicated in
FIGS. 5HH-5II ), the second intensity characteristic intensity of the contact above hint intensity threshold ITH and below light press intensity threshold ITL (e.g., as indicated inFIGS. 5DD-5EE ), and the first amount of movement of content 592 (e.g., as indicated inFIGS. 5JJ-5KK ) is greater than the second amount of movement of content 593 (e.g., as indicated inFIGS. 5FF-5GG ). - In some embodiments, the first intensity is less than the second intensity and the first amount of movement is greater than the second amount of movement (918).
- In some embodiments, moving the
content 592 on the display by an amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes (920) setting a simulated friction based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact (e.g., decreasing the simulated friction for larger characteristic intensity values). For example, in accordance with a contact that has a characteristic intensity above light press intensity threshold ITL prior to lift-off (e.g., as indicated inFIGS. 5HH-5II ), a first simulated friction effect is set, causing a reduction in the velocity of the movement ofcontent 592 from velocity v3 (as indicated inFIG. 5JJ ) to velocity v1 (as indicated inFIG. 5KK ). In accordance with a contact that has a characteristic intensity above hint intensity threshold ITH and below light press intensity threshold ITL (e.g., as indicated inFIGS. 5DD-5EE ), a second simulated friction effect is set, causing a reduction in the velocity of the movement ofcontent 592 from velocity v1 (as indicated inFIG. 5FF ) to velocity v2 (as indicated inFIG. 5GG ). In some embodiments, the first simulated friction set when the larger characteristic intensity value ofFIG. 5HH-5II is detected is decreased in comparison with the second simulated friction set when the smaller characteristic intensity value of 5DD-5EE is detected. - In some embodiments, moving the
content 592 on the display by an amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes (922) setting a simulated inertia based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact (e.g., decreasing the simulated inertia for larger characteristic intensity values). - In some embodiments, moving the content on the display by an amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes (924) setting an initial speed of movement for moving the content based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact (e.g., increasing the initial speed for larger characteristic intensity values). For example, in accordance with a contact that has a characteristic intensity above light press intensity threshold ITL prior to lift-off (e.g., as indicated in
FIGS. 5HH-5II ), an initial speed is v3 (as indicated inFIG. 5JJ ). In accordance with a contact that has a characteristic intensity above hint intensity threshold ITH and below light press intensity threshold ITL prior to lift-off (e.g., as indicated inFIGS. 5DD-5EE ), an initial speed is v1 (as indicated inFIG. 5FF ). In some embodiments, in accordance with the larger characteristic intensity value ofFIGS. 5HH-5II compared with the characteristic intensity value ofFIGS. 5DD-5EE , v3 is greater than v1. - In some embodiments, moving the
content 592 on the display by an amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes (926): determining an initial speed (e.g., v1, v3, or v5 as indicated inFIGS. 5FF, 5JJ, and 5NN , respectively) for continued scrolling after the lift-off of the first contact based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact (e.g., as indicated by intensity meter 530) and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact and continuing the scrolling of thecontent 592 after the lift-off of the first contact with the initial speed determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity and the characteristic speed are intensity and speed detected a predefined time period before the lift-off. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is determined based on a filtered intensity profile (e.g., 5SS) and/or the characteristic speed is determined based on a filtered speed profile (e.g., 5TT). For example, the characteristic values are values on theprofiles 5116 and/or 5120 at tlift-off. - In some embodiments, in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, the device dynamically applies (928) a visual effect on the first portion of
content 592 on the display in accordance with a current intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface. For example, dynamically applying the visual effect includes dynamically resizing (e.g., shrinking) the content or changing a z-height (e.g., pushing the content away from the screen) of the content on the display in accordance the current intensity of the first contact. In some embodiments, the visual effect is applied only temporarily when the scroll speed is below a threshold speed (e.g., before the scrolling is started and when the scrolling is just started), and the visual effect is removed when the scrolling speed reaches the threshold speed. - In some embodiments, the device presents (930) a scroll bar on the display, wherein the scroll bar includes a
scroll position indicator 596 that indicates a respective position of a currently displayed portion of thecontent 592 in thecontent 592; and the device presents (932) ascroll enhancement indicator 5104 concurrently with thescroll position indicator 596, wherein an appearance of thescroll enhancement indicator 5104 varies dynamically with a current intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., scrollenhancement indicator 5104 is shown with a first length inFIG. 5HH , when a characteristic intensity of the contact is at above light press intensity threshold ITL, and scrollenhancement indicator 5104 is shown with a second length, greater than the first length inFIG. 5LL , when a characteristic intensity of the contact is further above light press intensity threshold ITL). For example, the scroll enhancement indicator is a shadow displayed on a side of the scroll position indicator that is opposite to the scrolling direction, and a length of the shadow dynamically changes in accordance with the intensity of the first contact, e.g., higher intensity leads to a longer shadow. In some embodiments, the length of the shadow also indirectly indicates the amount of deviation (e.g., how much greater an initial scrolling speed after lift-off of contact) as compared to the case in a regular scroll action. In some embodiments, the scroll bar is displayed with a normal touch intensity, and anything beyond the normal touch intensity causes the scroll enhancement indicator to appear as well. - In some embodiments, while moving the
content 592 on the display by the amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact, the device dynamically changes (934) the appearance of thescroll enhancement indicator 596 in accordance with a current scrolling speed. For example, scrollenhancement indicator 5104 is shown with a first length inFIG. 5NN , when a scrolling speed is v5, and scrollenhancement indicator 5104 is shown with a second length (shorter than the first length) inFIG. 5OO , when a scrolling speed is v6 (v6 is slower than v5, as indicated by the length ofarrow 5110 associated with v6 and with v5). For example, the length of the shadow also indirectly indicates the amount of deviation (e.g., how much greater the current scrolling speed is as compared to the case in a regular scroll action). - In some embodiments, the moving the
content 592 on the display by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic intensity of the first contact and a characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes (936): applying an intensity filter to an intensity profile (e.g., ofFIG. 5SS ) of the first contact, wherein the intensity filter shifts the intensity profile (e.g., as shown at 5116 ofFIG. 5SS ) by a first time shift past the lift-off of the first contact (e.g., the intensity filter is a function that skews and shifts the intensity profile to the right on a time-intensity profile) and determining an initial speed (e.g., e.g., v1, v3, or v5 as indicated inFIGS. 5FF, 5JJ, and 5NN , respectively) for moving the content on the display after the lift-off of the first contact based on a selected intensity value on the filteredintensity profile 5116. For example, the selected intensity value is the intensity value at the time of lift-off on the shifted intensity profile (e.g., IC on 5116 ofFIG. 5SS ). - In some embodiments, moving the content on the display by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic intensity of the first contact and a characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes (938): applying a speed filter to a speed profile (e.g., 5118 of
FIG. 5TT ) of the first contact, wherein the speed filter shifts the speed profile (e.g., as shown at 5120 ofFIG. 5TT ) by a second time shift past the lift-off of the first contact; determining an initial speed (e.g., v1, v3, or v5 as indicated inFIGS. 5FF, 5JJ, and 5NN , respectively) for moving the content on the display after the lift-off of the first contact based on a selected speed value on the shiftedspeed profile 5120; and moving the content on the display with the determined initial speed after the lift-off of the first contact. For example, the selected speed value is the speed value at the time of lift-off on the shifted speed profile (e.g., VC on 5120 ofFIG. 5TT ). In some embodiments, the selected speed value is greater than the maximum speed of the first contact during the first movement. - In some embodiments, prior to detecting the first movement of the first contact, the device detects (940) an earlier increase in intensity of the first contact while the first contact remains stationary on the touch-sensitive surface. In an example scenario, the device detects the first contact, and then detects an increase in intensity of the first contact while the first contact is stationary on the touch sensitive surface. In this example scenario, even if the device subsequently detects a movement of the first contact (e.g., the first movement of the first contact), as long as the earlier increase in intensity was not detected during the movement, the scrolling is performed in accordance with the first movement, without consideration of the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact while the first contact was stationary. When another increase in intensity is detected while the first contact is moving, then the increase in intensity detected during the movement of the first contact is taken into consideration for the inertia scrolling performed after the lift-off of the first contact, e.g., through the use of the characteristic intensity and characteristic speed of the first contact that were detected during the first movement.
- In some embodiments, detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact includes (942) detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above a first intensity threshold (e.g., a preview intensity threshold, such as hint intensity threshold ITH) while a
focus selector 594 is located on a first user interface element on the display, and the device performs a predefined operation associated with the first user interface element (e.g., presents a preview or a quick action menu associated with the first user interface element) in response to detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above the first intensity threshold (e.g., a preview intensity threshold) while the focus selector is located on the first user interface element on the display. In an example scenario, the device detects the first contact, and then detects an increase in intensity of the first contact above a first intensity threshold (e.g., a hint intensity threshold ITH or a preview intensity threshold) while the first contact is stationary on the touch sensitive surface 112 (and correspondingly, and while afocus selector 594 is located on a first user interface element (e.g., a user interface element that is configured to respond to different changes in contact intensity with different user interface responses (e.g., a web link or a representation of a contact, or an application icon) on the display), the device performs a predefined operation associated with the user interface element (e.g., presenting a preview of the webpage referred to in the web link, presenting a quick action menu associated with the contact, or presenting a quick action menu associated with the application icon). After the intensity of the first contact has decreased sufficiently (e.g., decreased below the hint intensity threshold or preview intensity threshold) and before the first contact starts to move, the preview or quick action menus are optionally removed and the user interface is restored to the same state as it was before the increase in contact intensity of the first contact was detected. At this point, the device will resume normal scrolling behavior in accordance with subsequent movement of the first contact (e.g., the first movement of the first contact) without consideration of the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact) detected while the first contact was stationary. When another increase in intensity is detected while the first contact is moving, then the increase in intensity detected during the movement of the first contact is taken into consideration of the inertia scrolling performed after the lift-off of the first contact, e.g., through the use of the characteristic intensity and characteristic speed of the first contact that were detected during the first movement. - It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in
FIGS. 9A-9D have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g.,methods method 900 described above with respect toFIGS. 9A-9D . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described above with reference tomethod 900 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g.,methods -
FIGS. 10A-10C are flow diagrams illustrating amethod 1000 of moving content on a display in accordance with some embodiments. Themethod 1000 is performed at an electronic device (e.g.,device 300,FIG. 3 , or portablemultifunction device 100,FIG. 1A ) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations inmethod 900 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed. - As described below, the
method 1000 provides an intuitive way to move content on a display. The method reduces the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user when moving content on a display, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to move content on a display faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges. - The device presents (1002) a first portion of content 592 (e.g., “The Raven” by Edgar Allan Poe) on a display (e.g., touch screen 112).
- While presenting the first portion of the content, the device (1004): detects a first contact (e.g., a contact at a location indicated by focus selector 594) on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch screen 112); and detects a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a movement of
focus selector 594, such as a movement along a path indicated byarrow 5112 ofFIGS. 5PP-5QQ ). - The device detects (1006) a lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface. For example, after the movement of the contact indicated by
FIGS. 5PP-5QQ , lift-off of the contact occurs as indicated in 5RR. - In response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface (1008): in accordance with a determination that the first contact had a characteristic intensity above a respective intensity threshold (e.g., a characteristic intensity above deep press intensity threshold ITD, or another statically or dynamically determined threshold) prior to the lift-off of the first contact, the device scrolls through the content to a predefined portion of the content (e.g., a beginning or an end of the content, or a next section or previous section of the content, depending on the direction of first movement). For example, as indicated in
FIGS. 5PP-5QQ , a characteristic intensity of the contact increased above deep press intensity threshold ITD, as indicated byintensity meter 530. Accordingly, inFIG. 5RR , in response to detection of lift-off of the contact,content 592 is scrolled to the end of the content (e.g., as indicated by scroll position indicator 596). In accordance with a determination that the first contact had a characteristic intensity below the respective intensity threshold prior to the lift-off of the first contact (e.g., an intensity of the first contact remains below the respective intensity threshold for an entire duration of the first contact), the device scrolls through the content by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic speed of the first contact during the first movement (e.g., scrolling by an amount that is determined based on an initial speed of the content on lift-off of the first contact and simulated inertia and friction). For example, as shown inFIGS. 5LL-5MM , a characteristic intensity of the contact does not increase above a deep press intensity threshold ITD, as indicated byintensity meter 530. AtFIGS. 5NN-5OO , in response to detection of lift-off of the contact,content 592 is scrolled (e.g., by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic speed of the contact during the movement along the path indicated byarrow 5108 inFIGS. 5LL-5MM ). In some embodiments, the initial speed of the content is optionally determined based on a speed of the contact at a predetermined time relative to the lift-off time of the contact. - In some embodiments, scrolling through the content to a predefined portion of the content includes (1010) accelerating scrolling of the content to display an end portion of the content on the display. In some embodiments, the accelerated scrolling to display the end portion of the content is independent of a movement speed of the first movement and/or the length of content that needs to be scrolled to reach the end portion.
- In some embodiments, the first movement corresponds (1012) to movement toward a top portion of the display (e.g., as shown in
FIG. 5QQ , the contact moves upward along a path indicated byarrow 5112 toward a top portion of display 112). - In some embodiments, scrolling through the content to a predefined portion of the content includes (1014) accelerating scrolling of the content to display a beginning portion of the content on the display. In some embodiments, the accelerated scrolling to display the beginning portion of the content is independent of a movement speed of the first movement and/or the length of content that needs to be scrolled to reach the beginning portion.
- In some embodiments, the first movement corresponds (1016) to movement toward a bottom portion of the display.
- In some embodiments, scrolling through the content by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic speed of the first contact during the first movement includes (1018): scrolling through the
content 592 by a first amount before the lift-off of the first contact (e.g., scrolling from a first position incontent 592, as shown inFIG. 5PP , to a second position incontent 592, as shown inFIG. 5QQ ); and continuing to scroll through the content by a second amount after the lift-off of the first contact (e.g., scrolling from the second position incontent 592, as shown inFIG. 5QQ , to a third position incontent 592, as shown inFIG. 5RR ), wherein the scrolling of the content after the lift-off of the first contact is continued at an initial speed that is determined based on the characteristic speed of the first contact during the first movement. For example, during the regular scrolling, how much scrolling actually happens depends on factors such as the amount of content that can be scrolled, and the movement speed of the first contact, and does not deterministically scroll to the end or the beginning of the content. - In some embodiments, the device detects (1020) the increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface above the respective intensity threshold during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., the device detects the increase in intensity above deep press intensity threshold ITD, as indicated at
intensity meter 530 inFIGS. 5PP-5QQ ); and in response to detecting the increase in intensity above the respective intensity threshold, the device applies a visual effect on the first portion of content on the display. In some embodiments, the visual effect is an enlargement of the content, or a change in z-height of the content relative to the display plane. - In some embodiments, the device removes (1022) the applied visual effect on the first portion of content on the display during the scrolling through the content to the predefined portion of the content (e.g., during the accelerated scrolling of the content on the display). For example, the visual effect is applied when the intensity is above the first intensity threshold, and during the period of time that the scrolling speed is accelerated to a steady state accelerated scrolling speed, and once the scrolling speed has reached the steady state accelerated scrolling speed, the previously applied visual effect is removed.
- In some embodiments, the device applies (1024) an intensity filter to an intensity profile (e.g., of
FIG. 5SS ) of the first contact, wherein the intensity filter shifts the intensity profile (e.g., as shown at 5116 ofFIG. 5SS ) by a first time shift past the lift-off of the first contact; and the device determines a steady state speed for the scrolling through the content to the predefined portion of the content based on a selected intensity value on the shiftedintensity profile 5116. For example, the selected intensity value is the intensity value at the time of lift-off on the shifted intensity profile (e.g., IC on 5116 ofFIG. 5SS ). - In some embodiments, the device scrolls (1026) through the content by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic speed of the first contact during the first movement includes scrolling through the content to display a second portion of the content, and the method includes: while displaying the second portion of the content, detecting a predefined input (e.g., a tap input on the touch-sensitive surface) while a focus selector is within a predefined region (e.g., a predefined top or bottom region of the user interface that is displaying the second portion of the content) on the display; and in response to detecting the predefined input while the focus selector is within the predefined region on the display, scrolling through the content to the predefined portion of the content (e.g., a beginning or an end of the content or a next section or previous section of the content depending on whether the predefined region invoked by the predefined input (e.g., a tap input) is at the top or the bottom of the user interface displaying the second portion of the content). In other words, in some embodiments, the user can quickly scroll to the predefined portion of the content either by a forced press and flick gesture anywhere in the displayed content, or by a tap gesture within the predefined region in the user interface, regardless of how long the content is, and where the displayed portion of the content is within the content.
- In some embodiments, prior to detecting the first movement of the first contact, the device detects (1028) an earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above the respective intensity threshold while the first contact remains stationary on the touch-sensitive surface; and the device determines that the first contact had a characteristic intensity below the respective intensity threshold prior to the lift-off of the first contact in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the first contact remained below the respective intensity threshold during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In an example scenario, the device detects the first contact, and before detecting the first movement of the first contact, the device detects an increase in intensity of the first contact above the first intensity threshold while the first contact is stationary on the touch sensitive surface. This earlier increase in intensity of the first contact does not affect the user interface responses that occur during or after subsequent movement of the first contact (e.g., the first movement) if the contact intensity had dropped below the first intensity threshold before the start of the movement. In other words, when the device detects a movement of the first contact (e.g., the first movement of the first contact), as long as any increase in intensity above the first intensity threshold was not detected during the movement, the scrolling is performed without consideration of any earlier increase(s) in intensity of the first contact while the first contact was stationary. When an increase in intensity above the first threshold is detected while the first contact is moving, then the device scrolls the content to the predefined portion (e.g., an end or beginning portion).
- In some embodiments, detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact includes (1030) detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above a first intensity threshold (e.g., a preview intensity threshold) while a focus selector is located on a first user interface element on the display, and the device performs a predefined operation associated with the first user interface element (e.g., presenting a preview or a quick action menu associated with the first user interface element) in response to detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above the first intensity threshold (e.g., a preview intensity threshold) while the focus selector is located on a first user interface element on the display. In an example scenario, the device detects the first contact, and then detects an increase in intensity of the first contact above a first intensity threshold (e.g., a hint intensity threshold or a preview intensity threshold) while the first contact is stationary on the touch sensitive surface (and correspondingly, and while a focus selector is located on a first user interface element (e.g., a user interface element that is configured to respond to different changes in contact intensity with different user interface responses (e.g., a web link or a representation of a contact, or an application icon) on the display). In response to this increase in intensity of the first contact above the first intensity threshold, the device performs a predefined operation associated with the user interface element (e.g., presenting a preview of the webpage referred to in the web link, presenting a quick action menu associated with the contact, or presenting a quick action menu associated with the application icon). Then, after the intensity of the first contact has decreased to below the first intensity threshold (e.g., decreased below the hint intensity threshold or preview intensity threshold) and before the first contact starts to move, the preview or quick action menus are optionally removed and the user interface is restored to the same state as it was before the increase in contact intensity of the first contact was detected. At this point, the device resumes its scrolling behavior in accordance with subsequent movement of the first contact (e.g., the first movement of the first contact) without consideration of the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact detected while the first contact was stationary. When an increase in intensity above the first threshold is detected while the first contact is moving, then the device scrolls the content to the predefined portion (e.g., an end or beginning portion).
- It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in
FIGS. 10A-10C have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g.,methods method 1000 described above with respect toFIGS. 10A-10C . For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, animations described above with reference tomethod 1000 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g.,methods - In accordance with some embodiments,
FIG. 11 shows a functional block diagram of anelectronic device 1100 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described inFIG. 11 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. - As shown in
FIG. 11 , an electronic device includes adisplay unit 1102 configured to display content items; a touch-sensitive surface unit 1104 configured to receive user inputs; one ormore sensor units 1106 configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104; and aprocessing unit 1108 coupled to thedisplay unit 1102, the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104 and the one ormore sensor units 1106. In some embodiments, theprocessing unit 1108 includes a detectingunit 1110, a determiningunit 1112, and adisplay enabling unit 1114. In some embodiments, theprocessing unit 1108 is configured to: enable display, on thedisplay unit 1102, of content of a first content item, wherein the first content item is one of a sequence of content items (e.g., with display enabling unit 1114); detect a user input that includes movement of a contact in a respective direction on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104 (e.g., with detecting unit 1110); in response to detecting the user input: in accordance with a determination that the user input meets item-switching criteria (e.g., with the determining unit 1112), enable thedisplay unit 1102 to replace display of the first content item with display of a second content item in the sequence of content items (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114), wherein the item-switching criteria include a criterion that is met when a characteristic intensity of the contact is above a first intensity threshold; and, in accordance with a determination that the user input does not meet the item-switching criteria (e.g., with the determining unit 1112), enable thedisplay unit 1102 to navigate through the content of the first content item in accordance with the movement of the contact (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114). - In some embodiments, the item-switching criteria includes a criterion that is met when the characteristic intensity of the contact exceeds the first intensity threshold after detecting at least a predetermined threshold amount of movement of the contact (e.g., with the detecting unit 1110).
- In some embodiments, the
processing unit 1108 is configured to: while enabling display of the first content item (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114), detect a second user input at a location that corresponds to a selectable affordance (e.g., with the detecting unit 1110), wherein the second user input includes a second contact that is stationary on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104; in response to detecting the second user input: in accordance with a determination that the user input occurs while a focus selector is at a location that corresponds to a selectable affordance and the movement of the contact is less than a predetermined amount (e.g., with the determining unit 1112), enable display of a preview area of content that corresponds to the selectable affordance overlaid on the first content item (e.g., with a display enabling unit 1114). - In some embodiments, the second content item is sequentially adjacent to the first content item and is selected based on the respective direction of the movement of the contact.
- In some embodiments, navigating through the content of the first content item includes: in accordance with a determination that the respective direction is a first direction on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104 (e.g., with the determining unit 1112), scrolling the content in a first direction on the display unit 1102 (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114); and in accordance with a determination that the respective direction is a second direction on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104 (e.g., with the determining unit 1112), scrolling the content in a second direction on the
display unit 1102 that is different from the first direction on the display unit 1102 (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114). - In some embodiments, navigating through the content of the first content item in accordance with the movement of the contact includes: maintaining display of a first portion of the first content item in a first user interface region on the
display unit 1102; and navigating through a second portion of the first content item in a second user interface region on the display unit 1102 (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114). - In some embodiments, replacing display of the first content item with the second content item includes displaying a transition between the first content item and the second content item (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114); and the transition includes reducing a size of the first content item.
- In some embodiments, replacing display of the first content item with the second content item includes displaying a transition between the first content item and the second content item (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114); and the transition includes increasing a size of the second content item.
- In some embodiments, the sequence of content items corresponds to a plurality of electronic messages in an electronic messaging application, a plurality of web browser windows in a web browser, a plurality of applications, a plurality of digital images in a set of images, or a plurality of sets of digital images.
- In some embodiments, the
processing unit 1108 is configured to: in accordance with a determination that the user input begins at a first edge of the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104 (e.g., with the determining unit 1112), perform an operation that is distinct from both replacing display of the first content item with the second content item and navigating through the content of the first content item (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114). - In some embodiments, the
processing unit 1108 is configured to: after replacing display of the first content item with the second content item in the sequence of content items, detect a second user input that includes movement of a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104 (e.g., with the detecting unit 1110); enable thedisplay unit 1102 to, in response to detecting the second user input: in accordance with a determination that the second user input meets the item-switching criteria, replace display of the second content item with a third content item in the sequence of content items (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114); and in accordance with a determination that the second user input does not meet the item-switching criteria, navigate through content of the second content item in accordance with the movement of the second contact (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1114). - The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to
FIGS. 1A and 3 ) or application specific chips. - The operations described above with reference to
FIGS. 6A-6B are, optionally, implemented by components depicted inFIGS. 1A-1B orFIG. 11 . For example, detection operation 606, and replace and navigation operations of operation 608 are, optionally, implemented byevent sorter 170,event recognizer 180, andevent handler 190. Event monitor 171 inevent sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, andevent dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. Arespective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information torespective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected,event recognizer 180 activates anevent handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event.Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or objectupdater 177 to update the applicationinternal state 192. In some embodiments,event handler 190 accesses arespective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted inFIGS. 1A-1B . - In accordance with some embodiments,
FIG. 12 shows a functional block diagram of anelectronic device 700 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described inFIG. 12 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. - As shown in
FIG. 12 , anelectronic device 1200 includes adisplay unit 1202 configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit 1204 configured to receive contacts, one ormore sensor units 1206 configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit 1204; and aprocessing unit 1208 coupled with thedisplay unit 1202, the touch-sensitive surface unit 1204 and the one ormore sensor units 1206. In some embodiments, theprocessing unit 1208 includes: a presentingunit 1210, a detectingunit 1212, ascrolling unit 1214, a movingunit 1216, adisplay enabling unit 1218, a changingunit 1220, an acceleratingunit 1222, a restoringunit 1224, an insertingunit 1226, agenerating unit 1228, and an applyingunit 1230. - The processing unit 1208 is configured to: present (e.g., with the presenting unit 1210) a first portion of a list of items on the display unit; detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1212) a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit while the first portion of the list of items is presented on the display unit; detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1212) a first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit while a characteristic intensity of the contact remains below a first intensity threshold; in response to detecting the first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit while the characteristic intensity of the contact remains below the first intensity threshold, scroll (e.g., with the scrolling unit 1214) the list of items to present a second portion of the list of items on the display unit in accordance with the first movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; while a focus selector associated with the contact is located on a first item in the second portion of the list of items presented on the display unit, detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1212) an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold followed by a second movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold followed by the second movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, move (e.g., with the moving unit 1216) the first item relative to other items in the second portion of the list of items presented on the display unit in accordance with the second movement of the contact.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact above the first intensity threshold followed by the second movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, while the focus selector associated with the contact is located on the first item in the second portion of the list of items, change (e.g., with the changing unit 1220) an appearance of the first item.
- In some embodiments, changing the appearance of the first item includes dynamically changing a size of the first item in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: in accordance with the second movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, move (e.g., with the moving unit 1216) the first item by a first distance relative to a second item that is adjacent to the first item to at least partially reveal a first item slot associated with the first item on the display unit.
- In some embodiments, moving the first item by the first distance relative to the second item that is adjacent to the first item includes: during an initial portion of the second movement of the contact, move (e.g., with the moving unit 1216) the first item at a slower speed than the focus selector to create a distance lag between the first item and the focus selector; and during a subsequent portion of the second movement of the contact following the initial portion of the second movement of the contact, accelerate (e.g., with the accelerating unit 1222) the movement of the first item to eliminate the distance lag between the first item and the focus selector.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1212) a lift-off of the contact upon moving the first item by the first distance relative to the second item that is adjacent to the first item; and, in accordance with a determination that the first distance is smaller than a first threshold distance, restore (e.g., with the restoring unit 1224) the first item into the first item slot associated with the first item on the display unit.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: in accordance with a determination that the first distance is greater than a first threshold distance, move (e.g., with the moving unit 1216) the second item into the first item slot associated with the first item to reveal a second item slot associated with the second item.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1212) a lift-off of the contact while the second item slot associated with the second item is revealed on the display unit; and in response to detecting the lift-off of the contact while the second item slot associated with the second item is revealed on the display unit, insert (e.g., with the inserting unit 1226) the first item into the second item slot.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: during the second movement of the contact, for a plurality of other items besides the first item in the list of items, move (e.g., with the moving unit 1216) a respective other item to a respective new item slot and revealing a respective previous item slot for the respective other item on the display unit.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: generate (e.g., with the generating unit 1228) a respective tactile output as the respective other item moves to the respective new item slot and reveals the respective previous item slot.
- In some embodiments, a respective movement of the respective other item changes in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact during the second movement of the contact.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1212) that the first item has moved within a second threshold distance of a first end of the displayed second portion of the list of items in accordance with the second movement of the contact; and, in response to detecting that the first item has moved within the second threshold distance of the first end of the displayed second portion of the list of items, scroll (e.g., with the scrolling unit 1214) the list of items toward a second end of the displayed second portion of the list of items opposite the first end to enable display (e.g., with the display enabling unit 1218) a third portion of the list of items.
- In some embodiments, scrolling the list of items toward the second end of the displayed second portion of the list of items opposite the first end to enable display the third portion of the list of items includes: dynamically changing (e.g., with the changing unit 1220) a scrolling speed of the scrolling toward the second end of the displayed second portion of the list of items in accordance with the characteristic intensity of the contact.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: apply (e.g., with the applying unit 1230) a transparency effect to the first item while the first item overlaps with another item in the list of items.
- The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to
FIGS. 1A and 3 ) or application specific chips. - The operations described above with reference to
FIGS. 7A-7C are, optionally, implemented by components depicted inFIGS. 1A-1B orFIG. 12 . For example,detection operations operation 708; and movingoperation 712 are, optionally, implemented byevent sorter 170,event recognizer 180, andevent handler 190. Event monitor 171 inevent sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, andevent dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. Arespective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information torespective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected,event recognizer 180 activates anevent handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event.Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or objectupdater 177 to update the applicationinternal state 192. In some embodiments,event handler 190 accesses arespective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted inFIGS. 1A-1B . - In accordance with some embodiments,
FIG. 13 shows a functional block diagram of anelectronic device 1300 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described inFIG. 13 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. - As shown in
FIG. 13 , anelectronic device 1300 includes adisplay unit 1302 configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit 1304 configured to receive contacts, one ormore sensor units 1306 configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit 1304; and aprocessing unit 1308 coupled with thedisplay unit 1302, the touch-sensitive surface unit 1304 and the one ormore sensor units 1306. In some embodiments, theprocessing unit 1308 includes: a presentingunit 1310, a detectingunit 1312, a translatingunit 1314, an applyingunit 1316, a removingunit 1318, and aceasing unit 1320. - The processing unit 1308 is configured to: present (e.g., with the presenting unit 1310) a first portion of structured content on the display unit, wherein the structured content includes a plurality of sections, and the first portion includes content from a first section of the plurality of sections; detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1312) a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit while the first portion of the structured content is presented on the display unit; detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1312) an increase in a characteristic intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit and detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1312) a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact and detecting the first movement of the first contact: in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a first intensity threshold, translate (e.g., with the translating unit 1314) the structured content to enable display of a start of a second section adjacent to the first section of the structured content at a predefined location on the display unit; and in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of the contact does not increase above the first intensity threshold, translate (e.g., with the translating unit 1314) the structured content in accordance with a magnitude of the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit.
- In some embodiments, during the translating of the structured content to enable display of the start of the second section adjacent to the first section on the display unit, a focus selector associated with the first contact is on the structured content.
- In some embodiments, in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the first movement of the first contact, the processing unit is configured to apply (e.g., with the applying unit 1316) a visual effect on the first portion of the structured content on the display unit.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: remove (e.g., with the removing unit 1318) the applied visual effect on the first portion of the structured content on the display unit during the translating of the structured content.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: prior to the determination that the characteristic intensity of the first contact has increased above the first intensity threshold: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1312) an initial increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact; and, in response to detecting the initial increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact, concurrently present (e.g., with the presenting unit 1310) a scroll bar with the first portion of the structured content on the display unit, wherein the scroll bar includes a scroll position indicator that indicates a respective position of the first portion of the structured content in the structured content; and, in response to the determination that the characteristic intensity of the first contact has increased above the first intensity threshold, present (e.g., with the presenting unit 1310) a plurality of section indicators along with the scroll position indicator, wherein a relative ordering of the section indicators to the scroll position indicator corresponds to relative positions of the sections to the first portion of the structured content in the structured content.
- In some embodiments, presenting the plurality of section indicators with the scroll bar includes: presenting an animation that shows the plurality of section indicators emerging from the scroll position indicator and spreading out along the scroll bar.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: when translating of the structured content to enable display of the start of the second section adjacent to the first section of the structured content, present (e.g., with the presenting unit 1310) an animation that shows the scroll position indicator hopping over a respective section indicator in the plurality of section indicators.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1312) a lift-off of the first contact, and, in response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact, cease (e.g., with the ceasing unit 1320) to display the scroll bar, the scroll position indicator, and the plurality of section indicators.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact, present (e.g., with the presenting unit 1310) an animation that shows the plurality of section indicators moving into the scroll position indicator before ceasing the display of the scroll position indicator.
- In some embodiments, the structured content is translated to enable display of the start of the second section adjacent to the first section of the structured content at the predefined location on the display unit in accordance with a determination that the first movement of the first contact exceeds a first threshold distance.
- In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity of the first contact is below the first intensity threshold after the first movement of the first contact exceeds the first threshold distance.
- In some embodiments, the sections in the structured content are mapped to a plurality of vertical positions on the display unit, and the first movement of the first contact from a first position of the plurality of positions to a second position of the plurality of positions results in a translation of the structured content from one section of the structured document that corresponds to the first position on the display unit to another section of the structured content that corresponds to the second position on the display unit.
- The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to
FIGS. 1A and 3 ) or application specific chips. - The operations described above with reference to
FIGS. 8A-8C are, optionally, implemented by components depicted inFIGS. 1A-1B orFIG. 13 . For example,detection operations translation operations 808 are, optionally, implemented byevent sorter 170,event recognizer 180, andevent handler 190. Event monitor 171 inevent sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, andevent dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. Arespective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information torespective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected,event recognizer 180 activates anevent handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event.Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or objectupdater 177 to update the applicationinternal state 192. In some embodiments,event handler 190 accesses arespective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted inFIGS. 1A-1B . - In accordance with some embodiments,
FIG. 14 shows a functional block diagram of anelectronic device 1400 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described inFIG. 14 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. - As shown in
FIG. 14 , anelectronic device 1400 includes adisplay unit 1402 configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit 1404 configured to receive contacts, one ormore sensor units 1406 configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit 1404; and aprocessing unit 1408 coupled with thedisplay unit 1402, the touch-sensitive surface unit 1404 and the one ormore sensor units 1406. In some embodiments, theprocessing unit 1408 includes: a presentingunit 1410, a detectingunit 1412, ascrolling unit 1414, a movingunit 1416, an applyingunit 1418, a changingunit 1420, and aperforming unit 1422. - The processing unit 1408 is configured to: present (e.g., with the presenting unit 1410) a first portion of content on the display unit; while presenting the first portion of the content on the display unit: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1412) a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1412) a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; in response to detecting the first movement of the first contact, scroll (e.g., with the scrolling unit 1414) the content to present a second portion of the content on the display unit in accordance with the first movement of the first contact; detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1412) an increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; after detecting the increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1412) a lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and, in response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, move (e.g., with the moving unit 1416) the content on the display unit by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic intensity of the first contact and a characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact.
- In some embodiments, the characteristic speed of the first movement is a first speed and moving the content on the display unit by an amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes: in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity is a first intensity, moving (e.g., with the moving unit 1416) the content by a first amount; and, in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity is a second intensity that is different from the first intensity, moving (e.g., with the moving unit 1416) the content by a second amount that is different from the first amount.
- In some embodiments, the first intensity is greater than the second intensity and the first amount of movement is greater than the second amount of movement.
- In some embodiments, the first intensity is less than the second intensity and the first amount of movement is greater than the second amount of movement.
- In some embodiments, moving the content on the display unit by an amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes setting a simulated friction based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact.
- In some embodiments, moving the content on the display unit by an amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes setting a simulated inertia based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact.
- In some embodiments, moving the content on the display unit by an amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes setting an initial speed of movement for moving the content based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact.
- In some embodiments, moving the content on the display unit by an amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes: determining an initial speed for continued scrolling after the lift-off of the first contact based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact; and continuing the scrolling of the content after the lift-off of the first contact with the initial speed determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, dynamically apply (e.g., with the applying unit 1418) a visual effect on the first portion of content on the display unit in accordance with a current intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: present (e.g., with the presenting unit 1418) a scroll bar on the display unit, wherein the scroll bar includes a scroll position indicator that indicates a respective position of a currently displayed portion of the content in the content; and present (e.g., with the presenting unit 1418) a scroll enhancement indicator concurrently with the scroll position indicator, wherein an appearance of the scroll enhancement indicator varies dynamically with a current intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: while moving the content on the display unit by the amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact, dynamically change (e.g., with the changing unit 1420) the appearance of the scroll enhancement indicator in accordance with a current scrolling speed.
- In some embodiments, moving the content on the display unit by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic intensity of the first contact and a characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes: applying an intensity filter to an intensity profile of the first contact, wherein the intensity filter shifts the intensity profile by a first time shift past the lift-off of the first contact; and determining an initial speed for moving the content on the display unit after the lift-off of the first contact based on a selected intensity value on the filtered intensity profile.
- In some embodiments, moving the content on the display unit by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic intensity of the first contact and a characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes: applying a speed filter to a speed profile of the first contact, wherein the speed filter shifts the speed profile by a second time shift past the lift-off of the first contact; determining an initial speed for moving the content on the display unit after the lift-off of the first contact based on a selected speed value on the shifted speed profile; and moving the content on the display unit with the determined initial speed after the lift-off of the first contact.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: prior to detecting the first movement of the first contact, detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1412) an earlier increase in intensity of the first contact while the first contact remains stationary on the touch-sensitive surface unit.
- In some embodiments, detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact includes detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above a first intensity threshold while a focus selector is located on a first user interface element on the display unit, and the processing unit is configured to perform (e.g., with the performing unit 1422) a predefined operation associated with the first user interface element in response to detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above the first intensity threshold while the focus selector is located on the first user interface element on the display unit.
- The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to
FIGS. 1A and 3 ) or application specific chips. - The operations described above with reference to
FIGS. 9A-9D are, optionally, implemented by components depicted inFIGS. 1A-1B orFIG. 14 . For example,detection operations operation 906, and movingoperation 912 are, optionally, implemented byevent sorter 170,event recognizer 180, andevent handler 190. Event monitor 171 inevent sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, andevent dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. Arespective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information torespective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected,event recognizer 180 activates anevent handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event.Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or objectupdater 177 to update the applicationinternal state 192. In some embodiments,event handler 190 accesses arespective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted inFIGS. 1A-1B . - In accordance with some embodiments,
FIG. 15 shows a functional block diagram of anelectronic device 1500 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described inFIG. 15 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. - As shown in
FIG. 15 , anelectronic device 1500 includes adisplay unit 1402 configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit 1504 configured to receive contacts, one ormore sensor units 1506 configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit 1504; and aprocessing unit 1508 coupled with thedisplay unit 1502, the touch-sensitive surface unit 1504 and the one ormore sensor units 1506. In some embodiments, theprocessing unit 1508 includes: a presentingunit 1510, a detectingunit 1512, scrollingunit 1514, an applyingunit 1516, a removingunit 1518, a determiningunit 1520, and a performing unit 1522. - The processing unit 1508 is configured to: present (e.g., with the presenting unit 1510); a first portion of content on the display unit; while presenting the first portion of the content: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1512) a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1512) a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1512) a lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and, in response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit: in accordance with a determination that the first contact had a characteristic intensity above a respective intensity threshold prior to the lift-off of the first contact, scroll (e.g., with the scrolling unit 1514) through the content to a predefined portion of the content; and in accordance with a determination that the first contact had a characteristic intensity below the respective intensity threshold prior to the lift-off of the first contact, scroll (e.g., with the scrolling unit 1514) through the content by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic speed of the first contact during the first movement.
- In some embodiments, scrolling through the content to a predefined portion of the content includes accelerating scrolling of the content to enable display of an end portion of the content on the display unit.
- In some embodiments, the first movement corresponds to movement toward a top portion of the display unit.
- In some embodiments, scrolling through the content to a predefined portion of the content includes accelerating scrolling of the content to enable display of a beginning portion of the content on the display unit.
- In some embodiments, the first movement corresponds to movement toward a bottom portion of the display unit.
- In some embodiments, scrolling through the content by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic speed of the first contact during the first movement includes: scrolling through the content by a first amount before the lift-off of the first contact; and continuing to scroll through the content by a second amount after the lift-off of the first contact, wherein the scrolling of the content after the lift-off of the first contact is continued at an initial speed that is determined based on the characteristic speed of the first contact during the first movement.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1512) the increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit above the respective intensity threshold during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and in response to detecting the increase in intensity above the respective intensity threshold, apply (e.g., with the applying unit 1516) a visual effect on the first portion of content on the display unit.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to remove (e.g., with the removing unit 1518) the applied visual effect on the first portion of content on the display unit during the scrolling through the content to the predefined portion of the content.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: apply (e.g., with the applying unit 1516) an intensity filter to an intensity profile of the first contact, wherein the intensity filter shifts the intensity profile by a first time shift past the lift-off of the first contact; and determine (e.g., with the determining unit 1520) a steady state speed for the scrolling through the content to the predefined portion of the content based on a selected intensity value on the shifted intensity profile.
- In some embodiments, scrolling through the content by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic speed of the first contact during the first movement includes scrolling through the content to enable display of a second portion of the content, and the processing unit is configured to: while displaying the second portion of the content, detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1512) a predefined input while a focus selector is within a predefined region on the display unit; and in response to detecting the predefined input while the focus selector is within the predefined region on the display unit, scroll (e.g., with the scrolling unit 1514) through the content to the predefined portion of the content.
- In some embodiments, the processing unit is configured to: prior to detecting the first movement of the first contact, detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 1512) an earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above the respective intensity threshold while the first contact remains stationary on the touch-sensitive surface unit; and determine (e.g., with the determining unit 1520) that the first contact had a characteristic intensity below the respective intensity threshold prior to the lift-off of the first contact in accordance with a determination that the intensity of the first contact remained below the respective intensity threshold during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit.
- In some embodiments, detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact includes detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above a first intensity threshold while a focus selector is located on a first user interface element on the display unit, and the processing unit is configured to perform (e.g., with the performing unit 1522) a predefined operation associated with the first user interface element in response to detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above the first intensity threshold while the focus selector is located on a first user interface element on the display unit.
- The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to
FIGS. 1A and 3 ) or application specific chips. - The operations described above with reference to
FIGS. 10A-10C are, optionally, implemented by components depicted inFIGS. 1A-1B orFIG. 15 . For example,detection operations operations 1008 are, optionally, implemented byevent sorter 170,event recognizer 180, andevent handler 190. Event monitor 171 inevent sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, andevent dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. Arespective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information torespective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected,event recognizer 180 activates anevent handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event.Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or objectupdater 177 to update the applicationinternal state 192. In some embodiments,event handler 190 accesses arespective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted inFIGS. 1A-1B . - The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in view of the above teachings. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the invention and its practical applications, to thereby enable others skilled in the art to best use the invention and various described embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated.
Claims (20)
1. A method, comprising:
at an electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface, a display, and one or more sensors to detect an intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface:
presenting a first portion of content on the display;
while presenting the first portion of the content on the display:
detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; and
detecting a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface;
in response to detecting the first movement of the first contact, scrolling the content to present a second portion of the content on the display in accordance with the first movement of the first contact;
detecting an increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface;
after detecting the increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, detecting a lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; and,
in response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, moving the content on the display by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic intensity of the first contact and a characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact.
2. The method of claim 1 , wherein the characteristic speed of the first movement is a first speed and moving the content on the display by the amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes:
in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity is a first intensity, moving the content by a first amount; and
in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity is a second intensity that is different from the first intensity, moving the content by a second amount that is different from the first amount.
3. The method of claim 2 , wherein the first intensity is greater than the second intensity and the first amount of movement is greater than the second amount of movement.
4. The method of claim 2 , wherein the first intensity is less than the second intensity and the first amount of movement is greater than the second amount of movement.
5. The method of claim 2 , wherein moving the content on the display by the amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes setting a simulated friction based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact.
6. The method of claim 2 , wherein moving the content on the display by the amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes setting a simulated inertia based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact.
7. The method of claim 2 , wherein moving the content on the display by the amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes setting an initial speed of movement for moving the content based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact.
8. The method of claim 1 , wherein moving the content on the display by the amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes:
determining an initial speed for continued scrolling after the lift-off of the first contact based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact; and
continuing the scrolling of the content after the lift-off of the first contact with the initial speed determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact.
9. The method of claim 1 , including:
in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, dynamically applying a visual effect on the first portion of content on the display in accordance with a current intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
10. The method of claim 1 , including:
presenting a scroll bar on the display, wherein the scroll bar includes a scroll position indicator that indicates a respective position of a currently displayed portion of the content in the content; and
presenting a scroll enhancement indicator concurrently with the scroll position indicator, wherein an appearance of the scroll enhancement indicator varies dynamically with a current intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface.
11. The method of claim 10 , including:
while moving the content on the display by the amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact, dynamically changing the appearance of the scroll enhancement indicator in accordance with a current scrolling speed.
12. The method of claim 1 , wherein moving the content on the display by the amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes:
applying an intensity filter to an intensity profile of the first contact, wherein the intensity filter shifts the intensity profile by a first time shift past the lift-off of the first contact; and
determining an initial speed for moving the content on the display after the lift-off of the first contact based on a selected intensity value on the filtered intensity profile.
13. The method of claim 1 , wherein moving the content on the display by the amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes:
applying a speed filter to a speed profile of the first contact, wherein the speed filter shifts the speed profile by a second time shift past the lift-off of the first contact;
determining an initial speed for moving the content on the display after the lift-off of the first contact based on a selected speed value on the shifted speed profile; and
moving the content on the display with the determined initial speed after the lift-off of the first contact.
14. The method of claim 1 , including:
prior to detecting the first movement of the first contact, detecting an earlier increase in intensity of the first contact while the first contact remains stationary on the touch-sensitive surface.
15. The method of claim 14 , wherein:
detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact includes detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above a first intensity threshold while a focus selector is located on a first user interface element on the display, and
the method includes performing a predefined operation associated with the first user interface element in response to detecting the earlier increase in intensity of the first contact above the first intensity threshold while the focus selector is located on the first user interface element on the display.
16. An electronic device, comprising:
a display;
a touch-sensitive surface;
one or more sensors to detect an intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface;
one or more processors;
memory; and
one or more programs, wherein the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs including instructions for:
presenting a first portion of content on the display;
while presenting the first portion of the content on the display:
detecting a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; and
detecting a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface;
in response to detecting the first movement of the first contact, scrolling the content to present a second portion of the content on the display in accordance with the first movement of the first contact;
detecting an increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface;
after detecting the increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, detecting a lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; and,
in response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, moving the content on the display by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic intensity of the first contact and a characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact.
17. The electronic device of claim 16 , wherein the characteristic speed of the first movement is a first speed and moving the content on the display by the amount that is determined based on the characteristic intensity of the first contact and the characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact includes:
in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity is a first intensity, moving the content by a first amount; and
in accordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity is a second intensity that is different from the first intensity, moving the content by a second amount that is different from the first amount.
18. The electronic device of claim 17 , wherein the first intensity is greater than the second intensity and the first amount of movement is greater than the second amount of movement.
19. The electronic device of claim 17 , wherein the first intensity is less than the second intensity and the first amount of movement is greater than the second amount of movement.
20. A computer readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs comprising instructions, which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect an intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface, cause the electronic device to:
present a first portion of content on the display;
while presenting the first portion of the content on the display:
detect a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; and
detect a first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface;
in response to detecting the first movement of the first contact, scroll the content to present a second portion of the content on the display in accordance with the first movement of the first contact;
detect an increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface;
after detecting the increase in intensity of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface during the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, detect a lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface; and,
in response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact following the first movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface, move the content on the display by an amount that is determined based on a characteristic intensity of the first contact and a characteristic speed of the first movement detected prior to the lift-off of the first contact.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US17/138,676 US20210117054A1 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2020-12-30 | Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for Content Navigation and Manipulation |
Applications Claiming Priority (5)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US201562203387P | 2015-08-10 | 2015-08-10 | |
US201562235490P | 2015-09-30 | 2015-09-30 | |
US15/009,688 US10235035B2 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2016-01-28 | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for content navigation and manipulation |
US16/354,035 US10884608B2 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2019-03-14 | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for content navigation and manipulation |
US17/138,676 US20210117054A1 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2020-12-30 | Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for Content Navigation and Manipulation |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US16/354,035 Continuation US10884608B2 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2019-03-14 | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for content navigation and manipulation |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20210117054A1 true US20210117054A1 (en) | 2021-04-22 |
Family
ID=56738244
Family Applications (3)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US15/009,688 Active 2036-08-20 US10235035B2 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2016-01-28 | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for content navigation and manipulation |
US16/354,035 Active US10884608B2 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2019-03-14 | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for content navigation and manipulation |
US17/138,676 Abandoned US20210117054A1 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2020-12-30 | Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for Content Navigation and Manipulation |
Family Applications Before (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US15/009,688 Active 2036-08-20 US10235035B2 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2016-01-28 | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for content navigation and manipulation |
US16/354,035 Active US10884608B2 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2019-03-14 | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for content navigation and manipulation |
Country Status (4)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (3) | US10235035B2 (en) |
EP (1) | EP3335100B1 (en) |
CN (1) | CN107924249B (en) |
WO (1) | WO2017027625A2 (en) |
Cited By (10)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US11112957B2 (en) | 2015-03-08 | 2021-09-07 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for interacting with a control object while dragging another object |
US11182017B2 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2021-11-23 | Apple Inc. | Devices and methods for processing touch inputs based on their intensities |
US11221675B2 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2022-01-11 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for providing tactile feedback for operations performed in a user interface |
US11231831B2 (en) | 2015-06-07 | 2022-01-25 | Apple Inc. | Devices and methods for content preview based on touch input intensity |
US11240424B2 (en) | 2015-06-07 | 2022-02-01 | Apple Inc. | Devices and methods for capturing and interacting with enhanced digital images |
US11314407B2 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2022-04-26 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for providing feedback for changing activation states of a user interface object |
US11327648B2 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2022-05-10 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for manipulating user interface objects with visual and/or haptic feedback |
US11354033B2 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2022-06-07 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for managing icons in a user interface region |
US11550471B2 (en) | 2015-03-19 | 2023-01-10 | Apple Inc. | Touch input cursor manipulation |
US11921975B2 (en) | 2015-03-08 | 2024-03-05 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for manipulating user interface objects with visual and/or haptic feedback |
Families Citing this family (63)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US9417754B2 (en) | 2011-08-05 | 2016-08-16 | P4tents1, LLC | User interface system, method, and computer program product |
WO2013169842A2 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2013-11-14 | Yknots Industries Llc | Device, method, and graphical user interface for selecting object within a group of objects |
WO2013169849A2 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2013-11-14 | Industries Llc Yknots | Device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying user interface objects corresponding to an application |
KR101823288B1 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2018-01-29 | 애플 인크. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for transitioning between display states in response to gesture |
WO2013169877A2 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2013-11-14 | Yknots Industries Llc | Device, method, and graphical user interface for selecting user interface objects |
WO2013169865A2 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2013-11-14 | Yknots Industries Llc | Device, method, and graphical user interface for moving a user interface object based on an intensity of a press input |
CN108052264B (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2021-04-27 | 苹果公司 | Device, method and graphical user interface for moving and placing user interface objects |
WO2013169851A2 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2013-11-14 | Yknots Industries Llc | Device, method, and graphical user interface for facilitating user interaction with controls in a user interface |
WO2013169843A1 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2013-11-14 | Yknots Industries Llc | Device, method, and graphical user interface for manipulating framed graphical objects |
WO2014105277A2 (en) | 2012-12-29 | 2014-07-03 | Yknots Industries Llc | Device, method, and graphical user interface for moving a cursor according to a change in an appearance of a control icon with simulated three-dimensional characteristics |
EP2939098B1 (en) | 2012-12-29 | 2018-10-10 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for transitioning between touch input to display output relationships |
EP3467634B1 (en) | 2012-12-29 | 2020-09-23 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for navigating user interface hierarchies |
WO2014105279A1 (en) | 2012-12-29 | 2014-07-03 | Yknots Industries Llc | Device, method, and graphical user interface for switching between user interfaces |
CN104903835B (en) | 2012-12-29 | 2018-05-04 | 苹果公司 | For abandoning equipment, method and the graphic user interface of generation tactile output for more contact gestures |
KR102001332B1 (en) | 2012-12-29 | 2019-07-17 | 애플 인크. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for determining whether to scroll or select contents |
US10521188B1 (en) | 2012-12-31 | 2019-12-31 | Apple Inc. | Multi-user TV user interface |
US10545657B2 (en) | 2013-09-03 | 2020-01-28 | Apple Inc. | User interface for manipulating user interface objects |
CN110850705B (en) | 2013-09-03 | 2021-06-29 | 苹果公司 | Crown input for wearable electronic device |
US11068128B2 (en) | 2013-09-03 | 2021-07-20 | Apple Inc. | User interface object manipulations in a user interface |
USD766253S1 (en) * | 2013-09-25 | 2016-09-13 | Google Inc. | Display panel or portion thereof with a graphical user interface component |
WO2015200890A2 (en) | 2014-06-27 | 2015-12-30 | Apple Inc. | Reduced size user interface |
US20160062571A1 (en) | 2014-09-02 | 2016-03-03 | Apple Inc. | Reduced size user interface |
WO2016036509A1 (en) | 2014-09-02 | 2016-03-10 | Apple Inc. | Electronic mail user interface |
WO2016036416A1 (en) | 2014-09-02 | 2016-03-10 | Apple Inc. | Button functionality |
CN106797493A (en) | 2014-09-02 | 2017-05-31 | 苹果公司 | Music user interface |
US10365807B2 (en) | 2015-03-02 | 2019-07-30 | Apple Inc. | Control of system zoom magnification using a rotatable input mechanism |
US10048757B2 (en) | 2015-03-08 | 2018-08-14 | Apple Inc. | Devices and methods for controlling media presentation |
US9990107B2 (en) | 2015-03-08 | 2018-06-05 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for displaying and using menus |
US9645732B2 (en) | 2015-03-08 | 2017-05-09 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for displaying and using menus |
US10067653B2 (en) | 2015-04-01 | 2018-09-04 | Apple Inc. | Devices and methods for processing touch inputs based on their intensities |
US10346030B2 (en) | 2015-06-07 | 2019-07-09 | Apple Inc. | Devices and methods for navigating between user interfaces |
US10200598B2 (en) | 2015-06-07 | 2019-02-05 | Apple Inc. | Devices and methods for capturing and interacting with enhanced digital images |
US9891811B2 (en) | 2015-06-07 | 2018-02-13 | Apple Inc. | Devices and methods for navigating between user interfaces |
US10416800B2 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2019-09-17 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for adjusting user interface objects |
US10248308B2 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2019-04-02 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for manipulating user interfaces with physical gestures |
US10235035B2 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2019-03-19 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for content navigation and manipulation |
USD842874S1 (en) * | 2016-02-25 | 2019-03-12 | Mitsubishi Electric Corporation | Display screen with graphical user interface |
JP6855170B2 (en) * | 2016-04-13 | 2021-04-07 | キヤノン株式会社 | Electronic devices and their control methods |
USD824936S1 (en) | 2016-07-22 | 2018-08-07 | Xiaofeng Li | Display screen with graphical user interface for operating an electronic candle |
USD821440S1 (en) * | 2016-07-22 | 2018-06-26 | Xiaofeng Li | Display screen with transitional graphical user interface for controlling an electronic candle |
USD853417S1 (en) | 2016-07-11 | 2019-07-09 | Xiaofeng Li | Display screen with graphical user interface for operating an electronic candle |
CN107807775B (en) | 2016-09-09 | 2021-08-03 | 佳能株式会社 | Display control device, control method thereof, and storage medium storing control program thereof |
JP6840571B2 (en) * | 2017-02-28 | 2021-03-10 | キヤノン株式会社 | Image processing device, control method of image processing device, and program |
CN110945467B (en) * | 2018-04-20 | 2022-02-18 | 华为技术有限公司 | Disturbance-free method and terminal |
US11797150B2 (en) | 2018-05-07 | 2023-10-24 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for navigating between user interfaces, displaying a dock, and displaying system user interface elements |
DK180116B1 (en) | 2018-05-07 | 2020-05-13 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for navigating between user interfaces and displaying a dock |
AU2019100488B4 (en) * | 2018-05-07 | 2019-08-22 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for navigating between user interfaces, displaying a dock, and displaying system user interface elements |
CN110096157B (en) * | 2018-09-11 | 2021-05-11 | 苹果公司 | Content-based haptic output |
US11435830B2 (en) | 2018-09-11 | 2022-09-06 | Apple Inc. | Content-based tactile outputs |
US10712824B2 (en) | 2018-09-11 | 2020-07-14 | Apple Inc. | Content-based tactile outputs |
CN111475088B (en) * | 2019-01-23 | 2021-07-20 | 百度在线网络技术(北京)有限公司 | Page scrolling method and device, storage medium and terminal equipment |
US11057682B2 (en) * | 2019-03-24 | 2021-07-06 | Apple Inc. | User interfaces including selectable representations of content items |
US11962836B2 (en) | 2019-03-24 | 2024-04-16 | Apple Inc. | User interfaces for a media browsing application |
US11863837B2 (en) | 2019-05-31 | 2024-01-02 | Apple Inc. | Notification of augmented reality content on an electronic device |
WO2020243645A1 (en) | 2019-05-31 | 2020-12-03 | Apple Inc. | User interfaces for a podcast browsing and playback application |
US10996761B2 (en) | 2019-06-01 | 2021-05-04 | Apple Inc. | User interfaces for non-visual output of time |
USD921024S1 (en) * | 2019-11-19 | 2021-06-01 | Johnson Systems Inc. | Display screen with graphical user interface |
CN111026313B (en) * | 2019-12-16 | 2021-01-22 | 深圳介子云图空间科技有限公司 | Visual list sorting method and device |
US11145397B1 (en) * | 2020-01-31 | 2021-10-12 | Express Scripts Strategie Development, Inc. | System and method for augmented reality detection of loose pharmacy items |
US11843838B2 (en) | 2020-03-24 | 2023-12-12 | Apple Inc. | User interfaces for accessing episodes of a content series |
US11899895B2 (en) | 2020-06-21 | 2024-02-13 | Apple Inc. | User interfaces for setting up an electronic device |
US11934640B2 (en) | 2021-01-29 | 2024-03-19 | Apple Inc. | User interfaces for record labels |
US20220283791A1 (en) * | 2021-03-08 | 2022-09-08 | Charles Amashta | Systems and Methods For Cascading Style Sheets in Native Mobile Applications |
Family Cites Families (1135)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPS58182746A (en) | 1982-04-20 | 1983-10-25 | Fujitsu Ltd | Touch type input device |
JPS6074003A (en) | 1983-09-30 | 1985-04-26 | Ryozo Setoguchi | Shape creating device |
US5184120A (en) | 1991-04-04 | 1993-02-02 | Motorola, Inc. | Menu selection using adaptive force sensing resistor |
EP0574213B1 (en) | 1992-06-08 | 1999-03-24 | Synaptics, Inc. | Object position detector |
JP2994888B2 (en) | 1992-11-25 | 1999-12-27 | シャープ株式会社 | Input processing device and input processing method |
US5428730A (en) | 1992-12-15 | 1995-06-27 | International Business Machines Corporation | Multimedia system having software mechanism providing standardized interfaces and controls for the operation of multimedia devices |
US5555354A (en) | 1993-03-23 | 1996-09-10 | Silicon Graphics Inc. | Method and apparatus for navigation within three-dimensional information landscape |
JPH0798769A (en) | 1993-06-18 | 1995-04-11 | Hitachi Ltd | Information processor and its screen editing method |
US5463722A (en) | 1993-07-23 | 1995-10-31 | Apple Computer, Inc. | Automatic alignment of objects in two-dimensional and three-dimensional display space using an alignment field gradient |
BE1007462A3 (en) | 1993-08-26 | 1995-07-04 | Philips Electronics Nv | Data processing device with touch sensor and power. |
JPH07151512A (en) | 1993-10-05 | 1995-06-16 | Mitsutoyo Corp | Operating device of three dimensional measuring machine |
JPH07104915A (en) | 1993-10-06 | 1995-04-21 | Toshiba Corp | Graphic user interface device |
AU6019194A (en) | 1993-10-29 | 1995-05-22 | Taligent, Inc. | Graphic editor framework system |
EP0661620B1 (en) | 1993-12-30 | 2001-03-21 | Xerox Corporation | Apparatus and method for executing multiple concatenated command gestures in a gesture based input system |
US5526478A (en) | 1994-06-30 | 1996-06-11 | Silicon Graphics, Inc. | Three dimensional model with three dimensional pointers and multimedia functions linked to the pointers |
US5559301A (en) | 1994-09-15 | 1996-09-24 | Korg, Inc. | Touchscreen interface having pop-up variable adjustment displays for controllers and audio processing systems |
WO1996009579A1 (en) | 1994-09-22 | 1996-03-28 | Izak Van Cruyningen | Popup menus with directional gestures |
US5805144A (en) | 1994-12-14 | 1998-09-08 | Dell Usa, L.P. | Mouse pointing device having integrated touchpad |
JPH08227341A (en) | 1995-02-22 | 1996-09-03 | Mitsubishi Electric Corp | User interface |
US5657246A (en) | 1995-03-07 | 1997-08-12 | Vtel Corporation | Method and apparatus for a video conference user interface |
US5793360A (en) | 1995-05-05 | 1998-08-11 | Wacom Co., Ltd. | Digitizer eraser system and method |
US5717438A (en) | 1995-08-25 | 1998-02-10 | International Business Machines Corporation | Multimedia document using time box diagrams |
US5844560A (en) | 1995-09-29 | 1998-12-01 | Intel Corporation | Graphical user interface control element |
US5825308A (en) | 1996-11-26 | 1998-10-20 | Immersion Human Interface Corporation | Force feedback interface having isotonic and isometric functionality |
US5793377A (en) | 1995-11-22 | 1998-08-11 | Autodesk, Inc. | Method and apparatus for polar coordinate snap in a computer implemented drawing tool |
US5801692A (en) | 1995-11-30 | 1998-09-01 | Microsoft Corporation | Audio-visual user interface controls |
US6750877B2 (en) | 1995-12-13 | 2004-06-15 | Immersion Corporation | Controlling haptic feedback for enhancing navigation in a graphical environment |
US5825352A (en) | 1996-01-04 | 1998-10-20 | Logitech, Inc. | Multiple fingers contact sensing method for emulating mouse buttons and mouse operations on a touch sensor pad |
US5946647A (en) | 1996-02-01 | 1999-08-31 | Apple Computer, Inc. | System and method for performing an action on a structure in computer-generated data |
JPH09269883A (en) | 1996-03-29 | 1997-10-14 | Seiko Epson Corp | Information processor and method therefor |
US5819293A (en) | 1996-06-06 | 1998-10-06 | Microsoft Corporation | Automatic Spreadsheet forms |
JP4484255B2 (en) | 1996-06-11 | 2010-06-16 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Information processing apparatus having touch panel and information processing method |
US6208329B1 (en) | 1996-08-13 | 2001-03-27 | Lsi Logic Corporation | Supplemental mouse button emulation system, method and apparatus for a coordinate based data input device |
JP2000517445A (en) | 1996-08-28 | 2000-12-26 | ヴィーア・インコーポレイテッド | Touch screen device and method |
EP0859307A1 (en) | 1997-02-18 | 1998-08-19 | International Business Machines Corporation | Control mechanism for graphical user interface |
US6031989A (en) | 1997-02-27 | 2000-02-29 | Microsoft Corporation | Method of formatting and displaying nested documents |
US7091948B2 (en) | 1997-04-25 | 2006-08-15 | Immersion Corporation | Design of force sensations for haptic feedback computer interfaces |
US6073036A (en) | 1997-04-28 | 2000-06-06 | Nokia Mobile Phones Limited | Mobile station with touch input having automatic symbol magnification function |
US6806893B1 (en) | 1997-08-04 | 2004-10-19 | Parasoft Corporation | System and method for displaying simulated three dimensional buttons in a graphical user interface |
US6002397A (en) | 1997-09-30 | 1999-12-14 | International Business Machines Corporation | Window hatches in graphical user interface |
US6088019A (en) | 1998-06-23 | 2000-07-11 | Immersion Corporation | Low cost force feedback device with actuator for non-primary axis |
US6448977B1 (en) | 1997-11-14 | 2002-09-10 | Immersion Corporation | Textures and other spatial sensations for a relative haptic interface device |
US6088027A (en) | 1998-01-08 | 2000-07-11 | Macromedia, Inc. | Method and apparatus for screen object manipulation |
JPH11203044A (en) | 1998-01-16 | 1999-07-30 | Sony Corp | Information processing system |
US9292111B2 (en) | 1998-01-26 | 2016-03-22 | Apple Inc. | Gesturing with a multipoint sensing device |
US7614008B2 (en) | 2004-07-30 | 2009-11-03 | Apple Inc. | Operation of a computer with touch screen interface |
US7760187B2 (en) | 2004-07-30 | 2010-07-20 | Apple Inc. | Visual expander |
US8479122B2 (en) | 2004-07-30 | 2013-07-02 | Apple Inc. | Gestures for touch sensitive input devices |
US6219034B1 (en) | 1998-02-23 | 2001-04-17 | Kristofer E. Elbing | Tactile computer interface |
US6208340B1 (en) | 1998-05-26 | 2001-03-27 | International Business Machines Corporation | Graphical user interface including a drop-down widget that permits a plurality of choices to be selected in response to a single selection of the drop-down widget |
JPH11355617A (en) | 1998-06-05 | 1999-12-24 | Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd | Camera with image display device |
US6563487B2 (en) | 1998-06-23 | 2003-05-13 | Immersion Corporation | Haptic feedback for directional control pads |
US6429846B2 (en) | 1998-06-23 | 2002-08-06 | Immersion Corporation | Haptic feedback for touchpads and other touch controls |
US6243080B1 (en) | 1998-07-14 | 2001-06-05 | Ericsson Inc. | Touch-sensitive panel with selector |
US6111575A (en) | 1998-09-24 | 2000-08-29 | International Business Machines Corporation | Graphical undo/redo manager and method |
DE19849460B4 (en) | 1998-10-28 | 2009-11-05 | Völckers, Oliver | Numeric digital telephone keypad for a telephone device with a display and method for quick text selection from a list using the numeric telephone keypad |
US6252594B1 (en) | 1998-12-11 | 2001-06-26 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system for aiding a user in scrolling through a document using animation, voice cues and a dockable scroll bar |
US7469381B2 (en) | 2007-01-07 | 2008-12-23 | Apple Inc. | List scrolling and document translation, scaling, and rotation on a touch-screen display |
EP1028583A1 (en) | 1999-02-12 | 2000-08-16 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Digital camera with sound recording |
JP2001034775A (en) | 1999-05-17 | 2001-02-09 | Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd | History image display method |
US6396523B1 (en) | 1999-07-29 | 2002-05-28 | Interlink Electronics, Inc. | Home entertainment device remote control |
US6489978B1 (en) | 1999-08-06 | 2002-12-03 | International Business Machines Corporation | Extending the opening time of state menu items for conformations of multiple changes |
JP2001078137A (en) | 1999-09-01 | 2001-03-23 | Olympus Optical Co Ltd | Electronic camera |
US6459442B1 (en) | 1999-09-10 | 2002-10-01 | Xerox Corporation | System for applying application behaviors to freeform data |
US8482535B2 (en) | 1999-11-08 | 2013-07-09 | Apple Inc. | Programmable tactile touch screen displays and man-machine interfaces for improved vehicle instrumentation and telematics |
US7434177B1 (en) | 1999-12-20 | 2008-10-07 | Apple Inc. | User interface for providing consolidation and access |
US7362331B2 (en) | 2000-01-05 | 2008-04-22 | Apple Inc. | Time-based, non-constant translation of user interface objects between states |
US6664991B1 (en) | 2000-01-06 | 2003-12-16 | Microsoft Corporation | Method and apparatus for providing context menus on a pen-based device |
JP2001202192A (en) | 2000-01-18 | 2001-07-27 | Sony Corp | Information processor, its method and program storage medium |
US6661438B1 (en) | 2000-01-18 | 2003-12-09 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Display apparatus and portable information processing apparatus |
US6822635B2 (en) | 2000-01-19 | 2004-11-23 | Immersion Corporation | Haptic interface for laptop computers and other portable devices |
US6512530B1 (en) | 2000-01-19 | 2003-01-28 | Xerox Corporation | Systems and methods for mimicking an image forming or capture device control panel control element |
US7138983B2 (en) | 2000-01-31 | 2006-11-21 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Method and apparatus for detecting and interpreting path of designated position |
JP3845738B2 (en) | 2000-02-09 | 2006-11-15 | カシオ計算機株式会社 | Object moving device and recording medium |
WO2001061483A2 (en) | 2000-02-14 | 2001-08-23 | Geophoenix, Inc. | System and method for graphical programming |
JP2001265481A (en) | 2000-03-21 | 2001-09-28 | Nec Corp | Method and device for displaying page information and storage medium with program for displaying page information stored |
JP2001306207A (en) | 2000-04-27 | 2001-11-02 | Just Syst Corp | Recording medium with program for supporting drag and drop processing recorded |
US6583798B1 (en) | 2000-07-21 | 2003-06-24 | Microsoft Corporation | On-object user interface |
JP4501243B2 (en) | 2000-07-24 | 2010-07-14 | ソニー株式会社 | Television receiver and program execution method |
US20020015064A1 (en) | 2000-08-07 | 2002-02-07 | Robotham John S. | Gesture-based user interface to multi-level and multi-modal sets of bit-maps |
JP3949912B2 (en) | 2000-08-08 | 2007-07-25 | 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ | Portable electronic device, electronic device, vibration generator, notification method by vibration and notification control method |
US6906697B2 (en) | 2000-08-11 | 2005-06-14 | Immersion Corporation | Haptic sensations for tactile feedback interface devices |
US6577296B2 (en) | 2000-11-14 | 2003-06-10 | Vega Vista, Inc. | Fixed cursor |
US6590568B1 (en) | 2000-11-20 | 2003-07-08 | Nokia Corporation | Touch screen drag and drop input technique |
US6943778B1 (en) | 2000-11-20 | 2005-09-13 | Nokia Corporation | Touch screen input technique |
DE10059906A1 (en) | 2000-12-01 | 2002-06-06 | Bs Biometric Systems Gmbh | Pressure-sensitive surface for use with a screen or a display linked to a computer displays fields sensitive to touch pressure for triggering a computer program function related to the appropriate field. |
GB2370739A (en) | 2000-12-27 | 2002-07-03 | Nokia Corp | Flashlight cursor for set-top boxes |
US20050183017A1 (en) | 2001-01-31 | 2005-08-18 | Microsoft Corporation | Seekbar in taskbar player visualization mode |
FI20010616A (en) * | 2001-03-26 | 2002-09-27 | Nokia Corp | Method and arrangement for retrieving an entry from an indexed memory |
US7012595B2 (en) | 2001-03-30 | 2006-03-14 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Handheld electronic device with touch pad |
TW502180B (en) | 2001-03-30 | 2002-09-11 | Ulead Systems Inc | Previewing method of editing multimedia effect |
US8125492B1 (en) | 2001-05-18 | 2012-02-28 | Autodesk, Inc. | Parameter wiring |
TW521205B (en) | 2001-06-05 | 2003-02-21 | Compal Electronics Inc | Touch screen capable of controlling amplification with pressure |
US20020186257A1 (en) | 2001-06-08 | 2002-12-12 | Cadiz Jonathan J. | System and process for providing dynamic communication access and information awareness in an interactive peripheral display |
US7190379B2 (en) | 2001-06-29 | 2007-03-13 | Contex A/S | Method for resizing and moving an object on a computer screen |
US8001490B2 (en) | 2001-07-10 | 2011-08-16 | Nvidia International, Inc. | System, method and computer program product for a content publisher for wireless devices |
US20050134578A1 (en) | 2001-07-13 | 2005-06-23 | Universal Electronics Inc. | System and methods for interacting with a control environment |
US7103848B2 (en) | 2001-09-13 | 2006-09-05 | International Business Machines Corporation | Handheld electronic book reader with annotation and usage tracking capabilities |
US6965645B2 (en) | 2001-09-25 | 2005-11-15 | Microsoft Corporation | Content-based characterization of video frame sequences |
US20030206169A1 (en) | 2001-09-26 | 2003-11-06 | Michael Springer | System, method and computer program product for automatically snapping lines to drawing elements |
CN102609088B (en) | 2001-11-01 | 2015-12-16 | 意美森公司 | For providing the method and system of sense of touch |
JP2003157131A (en) | 2001-11-22 | 2003-05-30 | Nippon Telegr & Teleph Corp <Ntt> | Input method, display method, media information composite display method, input device, media information composite display device, input program, media information composite display program, and recording medium where those programs are recorded |
JP2003186597A (en) | 2001-12-13 | 2003-07-04 | Samsung Yokohama Research Institute Co Ltd | Portable terminal device |
US20030112269A1 (en) | 2001-12-17 | 2003-06-19 | International Business Machines Corporation | Configurable graphical element for monitoring dynamic properties of a resource coupled to a computing environment |
US7346855B2 (en) | 2001-12-21 | 2008-03-18 | Microsoft Corporation | Method and system for switching between multiple computer applications |
CN1356493A (en) | 2001-12-30 | 2002-07-03 | 王森 | Upper cylinder for pressure steam boiler |
US7043701B2 (en) | 2002-01-07 | 2006-05-09 | Xerox Corporation | Opacity desktop with depth perception |
US20030184574A1 (en) | 2002-02-12 | 2003-10-02 | Phillips James V. | Touch screen interface with haptic feedback device |
US6888537B2 (en) | 2002-02-13 | 2005-05-03 | Siemens Technology-To-Business Center, Llc | Configurable industrial input devices that use electrically conductive elastomer |
EP1483653B1 (en) | 2002-03-08 | 2006-05-31 | Revelations in Design, LP | Electric device control apparatus |
TWI234115B (en) | 2002-04-03 | 2005-06-11 | Htc Corp | Method and device of setting threshold pressure for touch panel |
US20030189647A1 (en) | 2002-04-05 | 2003-10-09 | Kang Beng Hong Alex | Method of taking pictures |
JP2004062648A (en) | 2002-07-30 | 2004-02-26 | Kyocera Corp | Display control device and display control program for use in the same |
US20030222915A1 (en) | 2002-05-30 | 2003-12-04 | International Business Machines Corporation | Data processor controlled display system with drag and drop movement of displayed items from source to destination screen positions and interactive modification of dragged items during the movement |
US11275405B2 (en) | 2005-03-04 | 2022-03-15 | Apple Inc. | Multi-functional hand-held device |
JP2004054861A (en) | 2002-07-16 | 2004-02-19 | Sanee Denki Kk | Touch type mouse |
US20040015662A1 (en) | 2002-07-22 | 2004-01-22 | Aron Cummings | Memory card, memory card controller, and software therefor |
US20040056849A1 (en) | 2002-07-25 | 2004-03-25 | Andrew Lohbihler | Method and apparatus for powering, detecting and locating multiple touch input devices on a touch screen |
JP4115198B2 (en) | 2002-08-02 | 2008-07-09 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Display device with touch panel |
JP4500485B2 (en) | 2002-08-28 | 2010-07-14 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Display device with touch panel |
US20040138849A1 (en) | 2002-09-30 | 2004-07-15 | Albrecht Schmidt | Load sensing surface as pointing device |
EP1406150A1 (en) | 2002-10-01 | 2004-04-07 | Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB | Tactile feedback method and device and portable device incorporating same |
JP2004152217A (en) | 2002-11-01 | 2004-05-27 | Canon Electronics Inc | Display device with touch panel |
US20050114785A1 (en) | 2003-01-07 | 2005-05-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Active content wizard execution with improved conspicuity |
US7224362B2 (en) | 2003-01-30 | 2007-05-29 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | Systems and methods for providing visualization and network diagrams |
US7685538B2 (en) | 2003-01-31 | 2010-03-23 | Wacom Co., Ltd. | Method of triggering functions in a computer application using a digitizer having a stylus and a digitizer system |
US7185291B2 (en) | 2003-03-04 | 2007-02-27 | Institute For Information Industry | Computer with a touch screen |
US20040219968A1 (en) | 2003-05-01 | 2004-11-04 | Fiden Daniel P. | Gaming machine with interactive pop-up windows |
GB0312465D0 (en) | 2003-05-30 | 2003-07-09 | Therefore Ltd | A data input method for a computing device |
US7051282B2 (en) | 2003-06-13 | 2006-05-23 | Microsoft Corporation | Multi-layer graphical user interface |
US20040267823A1 (en) | 2003-06-24 | 2004-12-30 | Microsoft Corporation | Reconcilable and undoable file system |
US8682097B2 (en) | 2006-02-14 | 2014-03-25 | DigitalOptics Corporation Europe Limited | Digital image enhancement with reference images |
JP2005031786A (en) | 2003-07-08 | 2005-02-03 | Fujitsu Ten Ltd | Character input device |
US8373660B2 (en) | 2003-07-14 | 2013-02-12 | Matt Pallakoff | System and method for a portable multimedia client |
US7036088B2 (en) | 2003-07-24 | 2006-04-25 | Sap Ag | Multi-modal method for application swapping |
US7721228B2 (en) | 2003-08-05 | 2010-05-18 | Yahoo! Inc. | Method and system of controlling a context menu |
JP4003742B2 (en) | 2003-08-21 | 2007-11-07 | カシオ計算機株式会社 | Electronic camera |
US9024884B2 (en) | 2003-09-02 | 2015-05-05 | Apple Inc. | Touch-sensitive electronic apparatus for media applications, and methods therefor |
JP2005092386A (en) | 2003-09-16 | 2005-04-07 | Sony Corp | Image selection apparatus and method |
US7411575B2 (en) | 2003-09-16 | 2008-08-12 | Smart Technologies Ulc | Gesture recognition method and touch system incorporating the same |
US7702733B2 (en) | 2003-09-18 | 2010-04-20 | Vulcan Portals Inc. | Low power email functionality for an electronic device |
US7554689B2 (en) | 2003-10-15 | 2009-06-30 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Document layout method |
US20050091604A1 (en) | 2003-10-22 | 2005-04-28 | Scott Davis | Systems and methods that track a user-identified point of focus |
JP2005135106A (en) | 2003-10-29 | 2005-05-26 | Sony Corp | Unit and method for display image control |
US8164573B2 (en) | 2003-11-26 | 2012-04-24 | Immersion Corporation | Systems and methods for adaptive interpretation of input from a touch-sensitive input device |
JP2005157842A (en) | 2003-11-27 | 2005-06-16 | Fujitsu Ltd | Browser program, browsing method, and browsing device |
ATE371335T1 (en) | 2003-12-01 | 2007-09-15 | Sony Ericsson Mobile Comm Ab | CAMERA FOR RECORDING AN IMAGE SEQUENCE |
CA2727763C (en) | 2003-12-01 | 2013-09-10 | Research In Motion Limited | Previewing a new event on a small screen device |
US7454713B2 (en) | 2003-12-01 | 2008-11-18 | Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab | Apparatus, methods and computer program products providing menu expansion and organization functions |
US20050125742A1 (en) | 2003-12-09 | 2005-06-09 | International Business Machines Corporation | Non-overlapping graphical user interface workspace |
US7774721B2 (en) | 2003-12-15 | 2010-08-10 | Microsoft Corporation | Intelligent backward resource navigation |
DE602004013116T2 (en) | 2004-01-20 | 2009-07-02 | Sony Deutschland Gmbh | Haptic key-controlled data entry |
US20050190280A1 (en) | 2004-02-27 | 2005-09-01 | Haas William R. | Method and apparatus for a digital camera scrolling slideshow |
US20050204295A1 (en) | 2004-03-09 | 2005-09-15 | Freedom Scientific, Inc. | Low Vision Enhancement for Graphic User Interface |
GB2412831A (en) | 2004-03-30 | 2005-10-05 | Univ Newcastle | Highlighting important information by blurring less important information |
US20050223338A1 (en) | 2004-04-05 | 2005-10-06 | Nokia Corporation | Animated user-interface in electronic devices |
US20050229112A1 (en) | 2004-04-13 | 2005-10-13 | Clay Timothy M | Method and system for conveying an image position |
US7787026B1 (en) | 2004-04-28 | 2010-08-31 | Media Tek Singapore Pte Ltd. | Continuous burst mode digital camera |
EP1745355A2 (en) | 2004-05-05 | 2007-01-24 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Browsing media items |
JP4063246B2 (en) | 2004-05-11 | 2008-03-19 | 日本電気株式会社 | Page information display device |
CA2567280A1 (en) | 2004-05-21 | 2005-12-01 | Pressco Technology Inc. | Graphical re-inspection user setup interface |
JP4869568B2 (en) | 2004-06-14 | 2012-02-08 | ソニー株式会社 | Input device and electronic device |
US8453065B2 (en) | 2004-06-25 | 2013-05-28 | Apple Inc. | Preview and installation of user interface elements in a display environment |
US8281241B2 (en) | 2004-06-28 | 2012-10-02 | Nokia Corporation | Electronic device and method for providing extended user interface |
US7743348B2 (en) | 2004-06-30 | 2010-06-22 | Microsoft Corporation | Using physical objects to adjust attributes of an interactive display application |
US20060001657A1 (en) | 2004-07-02 | 2006-01-05 | Logitech Europe S.A. | Scrolling device |
US20060020904A1 (en) | 2004-07-09 | 2006-01-26 | Antti Aaltonen | Stripe user interface |
US20060012577A1 (en) | 2004-07-16 | 2006-01-19 | Nokia Corporation | Active keypad lock for devices equipped with touch screen |
US8381135B2 (en) | 2004-07-30 | 2013-02-19 | Apple Inc. | Proximity detector in handheld device |
US20080094367A1 (en) | 2004-08-02 | 2008-04-24 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. | Pressure-Controlled Navigating in a Touch Screen |
DE602005023897D1 (en) | 2004-08-02 | 2010-11-11 | Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv | TOUCH SCREEN WITH PRESSURE-RELATED VISUAL RETURN |
US7178111B2 (en) | 2004-08-03 | 2007-02-13 | Microsoft Corporation | Multi-planar three-dimensional user interface |
US7724242B2 (en) | 2004-08-06 | 2010-05-25 | Touchtable, Inc. | Touch driven method and apparatus to integrate and display multiple image layers forming alternate depictions of same subject matter |
US7728821B2 (en) | 2004-08-06 | 2010-06-01 | Touchtable, Inc. | Touch detecting interactive display |
GB2417176A (en) | 2004-08-12 | 2006-02-15 | Ibm | Mouse cursor display |
FR2874432A1 (en) | 2004-08-20 | 2006-02-24 | Gervais Danone Sa | PROCESS FOR ANALYZING FOOD, COSMETICS AND / OR HYGIENE INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS, MEASUREMENT INTERFACE FOR IMPLEMENTING THE METHOD AND ELECTRONIC SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING THE INTERFACE |
CN101019092A (en) | 2004-09-15 | 2007-08-15 | 诺基亚公司 | Handling and scrolling of content on screen |
JP2006091446A (en) | 2004-09-24 | 2006-04-06 | Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd | Camera |
JP4860625B2 (en) | 2004-10-08 | 2012-01-25 | イマージョン コーポレーション | Haptic feedback for simulating buttons and scrolling motion on touch input devices |
KR100832355B1 (en) | 2004-10-12 | 2008-05-26 | 니폰 덴신 덴와 가부시끼가이샤 | 3d pointing method, 3d display control method, 3d pointing device, 3d display control device, 3d pointing program, and 3d display control program |
US8677274B2 (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2014-03-18 | Apple Inc. | Highlighting items for search results |
FR2878344B1 (en) | 2004-11-22 | 2012-12-21 | Sionnest Laurent Guyot | DATA CONTROLLER AND INPUT DEVICE |
US7847789B2 (en) | 2004-11-23 | 2010-12-07 | Microsoft Corporation | Reducing accidental touch-sensitive device activation |
US20060136834A1 (en) | 2004-12-15 | 2006-06-22 | Jiangen Cao | Scrollable toolbar with tool tip on small screens |
US7458038B2 (en) | 2004-12-20 | 2008-11-25 | Microsoft Corporation | Selection indication fields |
US7629966B2 (en) | 2004-12-21 | 2009-12-08 | Microsoft Corporation | Hard tap |
US7619616B2 (en) | 2004-12-21 | 2009-11-17 | Microsoft Corporation | Pressure sensitive controls |
US7683889B2 (en) | 2004-12-21 | 2010-03-23 | Microsoft Corporation | Pressure based selection |
US7552397B2 (en) | 2005-01-18 | 2009-06-23 | Microsoft Corporation | Multiple window behavior system |
US8341541B2 (en) | 2005-01-18 | 2012-12-25 | Microsoft Corporation | System and method for visually browsing of open windows |
US7574434B2 (en) | 2005-02-25 | 2009-08-11 | Sony Corporation | Method and system for navigating and selecting media from large data sets |
AU2006218381B8 (en) | 2005-03-04 | 2012-02-16 | Apple Inc. | Multi-functional hand-held device |
JP4166229B2 (en) | 2005-03-14 | 2008-10-15 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Display device with touch panel |
US20060213754A1 (en) | 2005-03-17 | 2006-09-28 | Microsoft Corporation | Method and system for computer application program task switching via a single hardware button |
US7454702B2 (en) | 2005-03-21 | 2008-11-18 | Microsoft Corporation | Tool for selecting ink and other objects in an electronic document |
US7478339B2 (en) | 2005-04-01 | 2009-01-13 | Microsoft Corporation | Method and apparatus for application window grouping and management |
US8023568B2 (en) | 2005-04-15 | 2011-09-20 | Avid Technology, Inc. | Capture, editing and encoding of motion pictures encoded with repeating fields or frames |
US7355595B2 (en) | 2005-04-15 | 2008-04-08 | Microsoft Corporation | Tactile device for scrolling |
US7471284B2 (en) | 2005-04-15 | 2008-12-30 | Microsoft Corporation | Tactile scroll bar with illuminated document position indicator |
US7609178B2 (en) | 2006-04-20 | 2009-10-27 | Pressure Profile Systems, Inc. | Reconfigurable tactile sensor input device |
US9569093B2 (en) | 2005-05-18 | 2017-02-14 | Power2B, Inc. | Displays and information input devices |
US20070024646A1 (en) | 2005-05-23 | 2007-02-01 | Kalle Saarinen | Portable electronic apparatus and associated method |
US7797641B2 (en) | 2005-05-27 | 2010-09-14 | Nokia Corporation | Mobile communications terminal and method therefore |
US9141718B2 (en) | 2005-06-03 | 2015-09-22 | Apple Inc. | Clipview applications |
US7710397B2 (en) | 2005-06-03 | 2010-05-04 | Apple Inc. | Mouse with improved input mechanisms using touch sensors |
JP2006345209A (en) | 2005-06-08 | 2006-12-21 | Sony Corp | Input device, information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program |
US7903090B2 (en) | 2005-06-10 | 2011-03-08 | Qsi Corporation | Force-based input device |
TWI296395B (en) | 2005-06-24 | 2008-05-01 | Benq Corp | Method for zooming image on touch screen |
BRPI0615536A2 (en) | 2005-07-22 | 2011-05-17 | Matt Pallakoff | handheld device that has a touch screen display capable of implementing a virtual keyboard user interface for entering keystrokes by a user, touch screen-based user interface (ui) system on a handheld device, thumb-optimized touch screen-based user interface (UI) on a handheld device, thumb driven virtual UI system for searching information, thumb driven virtual UI system for selecting items virtual selectable pages on a web page displayed on a touchscreen display of a handheld device, a handheld device that has a touchscreen display capable of running a virtual keyboard to enter keystrokes by a user, method for implementing the input selection by a user of the items displayed on a touch screen of a handheld device and method for a virtual interface of the keyboard user interacts with web pages on a handheld display device that has a touch screen display |
US8049731B2 (en) | 2005-07-29 | 2011-11-01 | Interlink Electronics, Inc. | System and method for implementing a control function via a sensor having a touch sensitive control input surface |
EP1920408A2 (en) | 2005-08-02 | 2008-05-14 | Ipifini, Inc. | Input device having multifunctional keys |
TW200715192A (en) | 2005-10-07 | 2007-04-16 | Elan Microelectronics Corp | Method for a window to generate different moving speed |
JP2007116384A (en) | 2005-10-20 | 2007-05-10 | Funai Electric Co Ltd | Electronic program guide information display system |
US7725839B2 (en) | 2005-11-15 | 2010-05-25 | Microsoft Corporation | Three-dimensional active file explorer |
US7331245B2 (en) | 2005-11-22 | 2008-02-19 | Avago Technologies Ecbu Ip Pte Ltd | Pressure distribution sensor and sensing method |
US7834850B2 (en) | 2005-11-29 | 2010-11-16 | Navisense | Method and system for object control |
JP2007148927A (en) | 2005-11-29 | 2007-06-14 | Alps Electric Co Ltd | Input device and scrolling control method using the same |
JP4777055B2 (en) | 2005-11-29 | 2011-09-21 | 京セラ株式会社 | Display device and control method |
WO2007068091A1 (en) | 2005-12-12 | 2007-06-21 | Audiokinetic Inc. | Method and system for multi-version digital authoring |
JP2007163891A (en) | 2005-12-14 | 2007-06-28 | Sony Corp | Display apparatus |
US8325398B2 (en) | 2005-12-22 | 2012-12-04 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Image editing system, image management apparatus, and image editing program |
US20070152959A1 (en) | 2005-12-29 | 2007-07-05 | Sap Ag | Pressure-sensitive button |
CN101379461A (en) | 2005-12-30 | 2009-03-04 | 苹果公司 | Portable electronic device with multi-touch input |
US7509588B2 (en) | 2005-12-30 | 2009-03-24 | Apple Inc. | Portable electronic device with interface reconfiguration mode |
US7797642B1 (en) | 2005-12-30 | 2010-09-14 | Google Inc. | Method, system, and graphical user interface for meeting-spot-related contact lists |
US20070168369A1 (en) | 2006-01-04 | 2007-07-19 | Companionlink Software, Inc. | User interface for a portable electronic device |
US7603633B2 (en) | 2006-01-13 | 2009-10-13 | Microsoft Corporation | Position-based multi-stroke marking menus |
US7486282B2 (en) | 2006-01-27 | 2009-02-03 | Microsoft Corporation | Size variant pressure eraser |
US8510669B2 (en) | 2006-02-06 | 2013-08-13 | Yahoo! Inc. | Method and system for presenting photos on a website |
US7536654B2 (en) | 2006-02-06 | 2009-05-19 | Microsoft Corporation | Photo browse and zoom |
US8139514B2 (en) | 2006-02-24 | 2012-03-20 | Yahoo! Inc. | Method and system for communicating with multiple users via a map over the internet |
KR100744400B1 (en) | 2006-03-07 | 2007-07-30 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus and method of providing fast menus in menu screen of a mobile communication terminal |
US7532837B2 (en) | 2006-03-09 | 2009-05-12 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Multifunction peripheral with template registration and template registration method |
KR100746874B1 (en) | 2006-03-16 | 2007-08-07 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for providing of service using the touch pad in a mobile station |
GB0605587D0 (en) | 2006-03-20 | 2006-04-26 | British Broadcasting Corp | Graphical user interface methods and systems |
US8405618B2 (en) | 2006-03-24 | 2013-03-26 | Northwestern University | Haptic device with indirect haptic feedback |
JP2007264808A (en) | 2006-03-27 | 2007-10-11 | Nikon Corp | Display input device and imaging apparatus |
US8780139B2 (en) | 2006-03-27 | 2014-07-15 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Resolution monitoring when using visual manipulation tools |
US7656413B2 (en) | 2006-03-29 | 2010-02-02 | Autodesk, Inc. | Large display attention focus system |
US7538760B2 (en) | 2006-03-30 | 2009-05-26 | Apple Inc. | Force imaging input device and system |
US8040142B1 (en) | 2006-03-31 | 2011-10-18 | Cypress Semiconductor Corporation | Touch detection techniques for capacitive touch sense systems |
US7607088B2 (en) | 2006-04-18 | 2009-10-20 | International Business Machines Corporation | Computer program product, apparatus and method for displaying a plurality of entities in a tooltip for a cell of a table |
EP2010999A4 (en) | 2006-04-21 | 2012-11-21 | Google Inc | System for organizing and visualizing display objects |
KR100771626B1 (en) | 2006-04-25 | 2007-10-31 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Terminal device and method for inputting instructions thereto |
JP4737539B2 (en) | 2006-05-03 | 2011-08-03 | 株式会社ソニー・コンピュータエンタテインメント | Multimedia playback apparatus and background image display method |
US20070299923A1 (en) | 2006-06-16 | 2007-12-27 | Skelly George J | Methods and systems for managing messaging |
US7921116B2 (en) | 2006-06-16 | 2011-04-05 | Microsoft Corporation | Highly meaningful multimedia metadata creation and associations |
US7880728B2 (en) | 2006-06-29 | 2011-02-01 | Microsoft Corporation | Application switching via a touch screen interface |
JP2008009759A (en) | 2006-06-29 | 2008-01-17 | Toyota Motor Corp | Touch panel device |
JP4751780B2 (en) | 2006-07-07 | 2011-08-17 | 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ | Key input device |
EP1882902A1 (en) | 2006-07-27 | 2008-01-30 | Aisin AW Co., Ltd. | Navigation apparatus and method for providing guidance to a vehicle user using a touch screen |
JP2008033739A (en) | 2006-07-31 | 2008-02-14 | Sony Corp | Touch screen interaction method and apparatus based on tactile force feedback and pressure measurement |
US20080024454A1 (en) | 2006-07-31 | 2008-01-31 | Paul Everest | Three-dimensional touch pad input device |
US8255815B2 (en) | 2006-08-04 | 2012-08-28 | Apple Inc. | Motion picture preview icons |
US20080051989A1 (en) | 2006-08-25 | 2008-02-28 | Microsoft Corporation | Filtering of data layered on mapping applications |
US8564544B2 (en) | 2006-09-06 | 2013-10-22 | Apple Inc. | Touch screen device, method, and graphical user interface for customizing display of content category icons |
US8106856B2 (en) | 2006-09-06 | 2012-01-31 | Apple Inc. | Portable electronic device for photo management |
US8842074B2 (en) | 2006-09-06 | 2014-09-23 | Apple Inc. | Portable electronic device performing similar operations for different gestures |
US8564543B2 (en) | 2006-09-11 | 2013-10-22 | Apple Inc. | Media player with imaged based browsing |
US7930650B2 (en) | 2006-09-11 | 2011-04-19 | Apple Inc. | User interface with menu abstractions and content abstractions |
US7743338B2 (en) | 2006-09-11 | 2010-06-22 | Apple Inc. | Image rendering with image artifact along a multidimensional path |
US20080094398A1 (en) | 2006-09-19 | 2008-04-24 | Bracco Imaging, S.P.A. | Methods and systems for interacting with a 3D visualization system using a 2D interface ("DextroLap") |
US8245154B2 (en) | 2006-11-03 | 2012-08-14 | International Business Machines Corporation | Most-recently-used task switching among parent and child windows |
US20080106523A1 (en) | 2006-11-07 | 2008-05-08 | Conrad Richard H | Ergonomic lift-clicking method and apparatus for actuating home switches on computer input devices |
WO2008064142A2 (en) | 2006-11-20 | 2008-05-29 | Pham Don N | Interactive sequential key system to input characters on small keypads |
KR20080048837A (en) | 2006-11-29 | 2008-06-03 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus and method for outputting tactile feedback on display device |
JP2008146453A (en) | 2006-12-12 | 2008-06-26 | Sony Corp | Picture signal output device and operation input processing method |
KR20080058121A (en) | 2006-12-21 | 2008-06-25 | 삼성전자주식회사 | An apparatus and a method for providing a haptic user interface in a mobile terminal |
US20080163119A1 (en) | 2006-12-28 | 2008-07-03 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method for providing menu and multimedia device using the same |
US7956847B2 (en) | 2007-01-05 | 2011-06-07 | Apple Inc. | Gestures for controlling, manipulating, and editing of media files using touch sensitive devices |
US7877707B2 (en) | 2007-01-06 | 2011-01-25 | Apple Inc. | Detecting and interpreting real-world and security gestures on touch and hover sensitive devices |
US20080168395A1 (en) | 2007-01-07 | 2008-07-10 | Bas Ording | Positioning a Slider Icon on a Portable Multifunction Device |
US8519963B2 (en) | 2007-01-07 | 2013-08-27 | Apple Inc. | Portable multifunction device, method, and graphical user interface for interpreting a finger gesture on a touch screen display |
US8091045B2 (en) | 2007-01-07 | 2012-01-03 | Apple Inc. | System and method for managing lists |
US8082523B2 (en) | 2007-01-07 | 2011-12-20 | Apple Inc. | Portable electronic device with graphical user interface supporting application switching |
KR101524015B1 (en) | 2007-01-11 | 2015-05-29 | 코닌클리케 필립스 엔.브이. | Method and apparatus for providing an undo/redo mechanism |
JP2008191086A (en) | 2007-02-07 | 2008-08-21 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Navigation system |
CN101241397B (en) | 2007-02-07 | 2012-03-07 | 罗伯特·博世有限公司 | Keyboard possessing mouse function and its input method |
GB2446702A (en) | 2007-02-13 | 2008-08-20 | Qrg Ltd | Touch Control Panel with Pressure Sensor |
US8650505B2 (en) | 2007-02-28 | 2014-02-11 | Rpx Corporation | Multi-state unified pie user interface |
EP2129111B1 (en) | 2007-03-06 | 2013-01-09 | Panasonic Corporation | Imaging device, edition device, image processing method, and program |
WO2008109172A1 (en) | 2007-03-07 | 2008-09-12 | Wiklof Christopher A | Recorder with retrospective capture |
US8352881B2 (en) | 2007-03-08 | 2013-01-08 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method, apparatus and program storage device for providing customizable, immediate and radiating menus for accessing applications and actions |
US7895533B2 (en) | 2007-03-13 | 2011-02-22 | Apple Inc. | Interactive image thumbnails |
US20080244448A1 (en) | 2007-04-01 | 2008-10-02 | Katharina Goering | Generation of menu presentation relative to a given menu orientation |
US20080259046A1 (en) | 2007-04-05 | 2008-10-23 | Joseph Carsanaro | Pressure sensitive touch pad with virtual programmable buttons for launching utility applications |
US7973778B2 (en) | 2007-04-16 | 2011-07-05 | Microsoft Corporation | Visual simulation of touch pressure |
CN101290553A (en) | 2007-04-17 | 2008-10-22 | 索尼(中国)有限公司 | Electronic equipment possessing display screen |
US8140996B2 (en) | 2007-04-17 | 2012-03-20 | QNX Software Systems Limtied | System for endless loop scrolling and display |
WO2008131544A1 (en) | 2007-04-26 | 2008-11-06 | University Of Manitoba | Pressure augmented mouse |
JP2008283629A (en) | 2007-05-14 | 2008-11-20 | Sony Corp | Imaging device, imaging signal processing method, and program |
US8621348B2 (en) | 2007-05-25 | 2013-12-31 | Immersion Corporation | Customizing haptic effects on an end user device |
KR20100017440A (en) | 2007-05-29 | 2010-02-16 | 가부시키가이샤 아쿠세스 | Terminal, history management method, and computer usable recording medium for history management |
US7801950B2 (en) | 2007-06-01 | 2010-09-21 | Clustrmaps Ltd. | System for analyzing and visualizing access statistics for a web site |
JP2008305174A (en) | 2007-06-07 | 2008-12-18 | Sony Corp | Information processor, information processing method, and program |
US8667418B2 (en) | 2007-06-08 | 2014-03-04 | Apple Inc. | Object stack |
US20080303795A1 (en) | 2007-06-08 | 2008-12-11 | Lowles Robert J | Haptic display for a handheld electronic device |
US20080307359A1 (en) | 2007-06-08 | 2008-12-11 | Apple Inc. | Grouping Graphical Representations of Objects in a User Interface |
US8302033B2 (en) | 2007-06-22 | 2012-10-30 | Apple Inc. | Touch screen device, method, and graphical user interface for providing maps, directions, and location-based information |
US9772751B2 (en) | 2007-06-29 | 2017-09-26 | Apple Inc. | Using gestures to slide between user interfaces |
US20090015563A1 (en) | 2007-07-11 | 2009-01-15 | John Thomas Sadler | Stylized interactive icon for portable mobile communications device |
US20090046110A1 (en) | 2007-08-16 | 2009-02-19 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and apparatus for manipulating a displayed image |
US20110210931A1 (en) | 2007-08-19 | 2011-09-01 | Ringbow Ltd. | Finger-worn device and interaction methods and communication methods |
KR20090019161A (en) | 2007-08-20 | 2009-02-25 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Electronic device and method for operating the same |
KR101424259B1 (en) | 2007-08-22 | 2014-07-31 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for providing input feedback in portable terminal |
US8826132B2 (en) | 2007-09-04 | 2014-09-02 | Apple Inc. | Methods and systems for navigating content on a portable device |
US8825802B2 (en) | 2007-09-04 | 2014-09-02 | Sony Computer Entertainment America Llc | System and method for identifying compatible users |
US9477395B2 (en) | 2007-09-04 | 2016-10-25 | Apple Inc. | Audio file interface |
US8619038B2 (en) | 2007-09-04 | 2013-12-31 | Apple Inc. | Editing interface |
US20090089293A1 (en) | 2007-09-28 | 2009-04-02 | Bccg Ventures, Llc | Selfish data browsing |
US8098235B2 (en) | 2007-09-28 | 2012-01-17 | Immersion Corporation | Multi-touch device having dynamic haptic effects |
US8125458B2 (en) | 2007-09-28 | 2012-02-28 | Microsoft Corporation | Detecting finger orientation on a touch-sensitive device |
TWI417764B (en) | 2007-10-01 | 2013-12-01 | Giga Byte Comm Inc | A control method and a device for performing a switching function of a touch screen of a hand-held electronic device |
KR20090036877A (en) | 2007-10-10 | 2009-04-15 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and system for managing objects in multiple projection windows environment, based on standard ruler |
CN101414231B (en) | 2007-10-17 | 2011-09-21 | 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 | Touch screen apparatus and image display method thereof |
US20090102805A1 (en) | 2007-10-18 | 2009-04-23 | Microsoft Corporation | Three-dimensional object simulation using audio, visual, and tactile feedback |
DE102007052008A1 (en) | 2007-10-26 | 2009-04-30 | Andreas Steinhauser | Single- or multitouch-capable touchscreen or touchpad consisting of an array of pressure sensors and production of such sensors |
JP4974236B2 (en) | 2007-10-30 | 2012-07-11 | アズビル株式会社 | Information linkage window system and program |
JP2009129171A (en) | 2007-11-22 | 2009-06-11 | Denso It Laboratory Inc | Information processor loaded in mobile body |
TW200923758A (en) | 2007-11-27 | 2009-06-01 | Wistron Corp | A key-in method and a content display method of an electronic device, and the application thereof |
US8245155B2 (en) | 2007-11-29 | 2012-08-14 | Sony Corporation | Computer implemented display, graphical user interface, design and method including scrolling features |
US20090140985A1 (en) | 2007-11-30 | 2009-06-04 | Eric Liu | Computing device that determines and uses applied pressure from user interaction with an input interface |
US9513765B2 (en) | 2007-12-07 | 2016-12-06 | Sony Corporation | Three-dimensional sliding object arrangement method and system |
US20090167507A1 (en) | 2007-12-07 | 2009-07-02 | Nokia Corporation | User interface |
US8140974B2 (en) | 2007-12-14 | 2012-03-20 | Microsoft Corporation | Presenting secondary media objects to a user |
JP4605214B2 (en) | 2007-12-19 | 2011-01-05 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program |
TW200930009A (en) | 2007-12-21 | 2009-07-01 | Inventec Appliances Corp | Procedure of acting personally hot function setting |
US8233671B2 (en) | 2007-12-27 | 2012-07-31 | Intel-Ge Care Innovations Llc | Reading device with hierarchal navigation |
US9170649B2 (en) | 2007-12-28 | 2015-10-27 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Audio and tactile feedback based on visual environment |
US8373549B2 (en) | 2007-12-31 | 2013-02-12 | Apple Inc. | Tactile feedback in an electronic device |
US9857872B2 (en) | 2007-12-31 | 2018-01-02 | Apple Inc. | Multi-touch display screen with localized tactile feedback |
US9274612B2 (en) | 2008-01-04 | 2016-03-01 | Tactus Technology, Inc. | User interface system |
US20090174679A1 (en) | 2008-01-04 | 2009-07-09 | Wayne Carl Westerman | Selective Rejection of Touch Contacts in an Edge Region of a Touch Surface |
US9063627B2 (en) | 2008-01-04 | 2015-06-23 | Tactus Technology, Inc. | User interface and methods |
JP5001182B2 (en) | 2008-01-10 | 2012-08-15 | パナソニック株式会社 | Display control apparatus, electronic device, display control method, and program |
US8196042B2 (en) | 2008-01-21 | 2012-06-05 | Microsoft Corporation | Self-revelation aids for interfaces |
US9665197B2 (en) | 2008-01-30 | 2017-05-30 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Apparatus and method for enabling user input |
US8504945B2 (en) | 2008-02-01 | 2013-08-06 | Gabriel Jakobson | Method and system for associating content with map zoom function |
US8314801B2 (en) | 2008-02-29 | 2012-11-20 | Microsoft Corporation | Visual state manager for control skinning |
US8645827B2 (en) | 2008-03-04 | 2014-02-04 | Apple Inc. | Touch event model |
US8201109B2 (en) * | 2008-03-04 | 2012-06-12 | Apple Inc. | Methods and graphical user interfaces for editing on a portable multifunction device |
US20090276730A1 (en) | 2008-03-04 | 2009-11-05 | Alexandre Aybes | Techniques for navigation of hierarchically-presented data |
US8650507B2 (en) | 2008-03-04 | 2014-02-11 | Apple Inc. | Selecting of text using gestures |
US8717305B2 (en) | 2008-03-04 | 2014-05-06 | Apple Inc. | Touch event model for web pages |
JP4650699B2 (en) | 2008-03-06 | 2011-03-16 | Necインフロンティア株式会社 | Input device, input method, and program |
KR101012300B1 (en) | 2008-03-07 | 2011-02-08 | 삼성전자주식회사 | User interface apparatus of mobile station having touch screen and method thereof |
JP4670879B2 (en) | 2008-03-11 | 2011-04-13 | ブラザー工業株式会社 | Contact input type information processing apparatus, contact input type information processing method, and information processing program |
KR101007045B1 (en) | 2008-03-12 | 2011-01-12 | 주식회사 애트랩 | Touch sensor device and the method of determining coordinates of pointing thereof |
US20090237374A1 (en) | 2008-03-20 | 2009-09-24 | Motorola, Inc. | Transparent pressure sensor and method for using |
US20090247112A1 (en) | 2008-03-28 | 2009-10-01 | Sprint Communications Company L.P. | Event disposition control for mobile communications device |
US8612888B2 (en) | 2008-04-01 | 2013-12-17 | Litl, Llc | Method and apparatus for managing digital media content |
GB0806183D0 (en) | 2008-04-04 | 2008-05-14 | Picsel Res Ltd | Presentation of objects in 3D displays |
JP5200641B2 (en) | 2008-04-10 | 2013-06-05 | ソニー株式会社 | List display device and list display method |
US8209628B1 (en) | 2008-04-11 | 2012-06-26 | Perceptive Pixel, Inc. | Pressure-sensitive manipulation of displayed objects |
US8259208B2 (en) | 2008-04-15 | 2012-09-04 | Sony Corporation | Method and apparatus for performing touch-based adjustments within imaging devices |
JP5428189B2 (en) | 2008-04-17 | 2014-02-26 | 三洋電機株式会社 | Navigation device |
US20090267906A1 (en) | 2008-04-25 | 2009-10-29 | Nokia Corporation | Touch sensitive apparatus |
US20090271731A1 (en) | 2008-04-27 | 2009-10-29 | Htc Corporation | Electronic device and user interface display method thereof |
JP4792058B2 (en) | 2008-04-28 | 2011-10-12 | 株式会社東芝 | Information processing apparatus, control method, and program |
KR101461954B1 (en) | 2008-05-08 | 2014-11-14 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Terminal and method for controlling the same |
US20090280860A1 (en) | 2008-05-12 | 2009-11-12 | Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab | Mobile phone with directional force feedback and method |
US20090284478A1 (en) | 2008-05-15 | 2009-11-19 | Microsoft Corporation | Multi-Contact and Single-Contact Input |
US8174503B2 (en) | 2008-05-17 | 2012-05-08 | David H. Cain | Touch-based authentication of a mobile device through user generated pattern creation |
US7958447B2 (en) | 2008-05-23 | 2011-06-07 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and system for page navigating user interfaces for electronic devices |
US20090295739A1 (en) | 2008-05-27 | 2009-12-03 | Wes Albert Nagara | Haptic tactile precision selection |
US20090307633A1 (en) | 2008-06-06 | 2009-12-10 | Apple Inc. | Acceleration navigation of media device displays |
CN101604208A (en) | 2008-06-12 | 2009-12-16 | 欧蜀平 | A kind of wieldy keyboard and software thereof |
KR101498623B1 (en) | 2008-06-25 | 2015-03-04 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile Terminal Capable of Previewing Different Channel |
WO2009155981A1 (en) | 2008-06-26 | 2009-12-30 | Uiq Technology Ab | Gesture on touch sensitive arrangement |
JP4896932B2 (en) | 2008-06-26 | 2012-03-14 | 京セラ株式会社 | Input device |
US8504946B2 (en) | 2008-06-27 | 2013-08-06 | Apple Inc. | Portable device, method, and graphical user interface for automatically scrolling to display the top of an electronic document |
WO2009158549A2 (en) | 2008-06-28 | 2009-12-30 | Apple Inc. | Radial menu selection |
JP4938733B2 (en) | 2008-06-30 | 2012-05-23 | 株式会社ソニー・コンピュータエンタテインメント | Menu screen display method and menu screen display device |
US8477228B2 (en) | 2008-06-30 | 2013-07-02 | Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. | Camera data management and user interface apparatuses, systems, and methods |
KR101540779B1 (en) | 2008-07-01 | 2015-07-29 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile terminal and control method thereof |
EP3258361B1 (en) | 2008-07-01 | 2020-08-12 | LG Electronics Inc. -1- | Mobile terminal using pressure sensor and method of controlling the mobile terminal |
US20100013613A1 (en) | 2008-07-08 | 2010-01-21 | Jonathan Samuel Weston | Haptic feedback projection system |
US10095375B2 (en) | 2008-07-09 | 2018-10-09 | Apple Inc. | Adding a contact to a home screen |
JP4198190B1 (en) | 2008-07-11 | 2008-12-17 | 任天堂株式会社 | Image communication system, image communication apparatus, and image communication program |
EP2313820B1 (en) | 2008-07-15 | 2017-04-05 | Immersion Corporation | Systems and methods for physics-based tactile messaging |
US8274484B2 (en) | 2008-07-18 | 2012-09-25 | Microsoft Corporation | Tracking input in a screen-reflective interface environment |
KR101495559B1 (en) | 2008-07-21 | 2015-02-27 | 삼성전자주식회사 | The method for inputing user commond and the electronic apparatus thereof |
KR20100010860A (en) | 2008-07-23 | 2010-02-02 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile terminal and event control method thereof |
JP5100556B2 (en) | 2008-07-30 | 2012-12-19 | キヤノン株式会社 | Information processing method and apparatus |
US10983665B2 (en) | 2008-08-01 | 2021-04-20 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Electronic apparatus and method for implementing user interface |
CN101650615B (en) | 2008-08-13 | 2011-01-26 | 怡利电子工业股份有限公司 | Automatic switching method of cursor controller and keyboard of push type touchpad |
US8604364B2 (en) | 2008-08-15 | 2013-12-10 | Lester F. Ludwig | Sensors, algorithms and applications for a high dimensional touchpad |
JP4600548B2 (en) | 2008-08-27 | 2010-12-15 | ソニー株式会社 | REPRODUCTION DEVICE, REPRODUCTION METHOD, AND PROGRAM |
US10375223B2 (en) | 2008-08-28 | 2019-08-06 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Notifying a user of events in a computing device |
JP4636146B2 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2011-02-23 | ソニー株式会社 | Image processing method, image processing apparatus, program, and image processing system |
US8913176B2 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2014-12-16 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Mobile terminal and method of performing multi-focusing and photographing image including plurality of objects using the same |
JP5346941B2 (en) | 2008-09-16 | 2013-11-20 | パナソニック株式会社 | Data display apparatus, integrated circuit, data display method, data display program, and recording medium |
WO2010032598A1 (en) | 2008-09-17 | 2010-03-25 | 日本電気株式会社 | Input unit, method for controlling same, and electronic device provided with input unit |
US20100070908A1 (en) | 2008-09-18 | 2010-03-18 | Sun Microsystems, Inc. | System and method for accepting or rejecting suggested text corrections |
US9041650B2 (en) | 2008-09-18 | 2015-05-26 | Apple Inc. | Using measurement of lateral force for a tracking input device |
US8769427B2 (en) | 2008-09-19 | 2014-07-01 | Google Inc. | Quick gesture input |
US8359547B2 (en) | 2008-10-01 | 2013-01-22 | Nintendo Co., Ltd. | Movable user interface indicator of at least one parameter that is adjustable with different operations for increasing and decreasing the parameter and/or methods of providing the same |
US8462107B2 (en) | 2008-10-03 | 2013-06-11 | International Business Machines Corporation | Pointing device and method with error prevention features |
EP3654141A1 (en) | 2008-10-06 | 2020-05-20 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and apparatus for displaying graphical user interface depending on a user's contact pattern |
US9442648B2 (en) | 2008-10-07 | 2016-09-13 | Blackberry Limited | Portable electronic device and method of controlling same |
EP2175349A1 (en) | 2008-10-08 | 2010-04-14 | Research in Motion Limited | Method and system for displaying an image on a handheld electronic communication device |
US20100085314A1 (en) | 2008-10-08 | 2010-04-08 | Research In Motion Limited | Portable electronic device and method of controlling same |
EP2175359A3 (en) | 2008-10-08 | 2011-07-06 | Research In Motion Limited | An electronic device having a state aware touchscreen |
EP2175343A1 (en) | 2008-10-08 | 2010-04-14 | Research in Motion Limited | A method and handheld electronic device having a graphical user interface which arranges icons dynamically |
EP2175357B1 (en) | 2008-10-08 | 2012-11-21 | Research In Motion Limited | Portable electronic device and method of controlling same |
JP2010097353A (en) | 2008-10-15 | 2010-04-30 | Access Co Ltd | Information terminal |
KR101510738B1 (en) | 2008-10-20 | 2015-04-10 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus and method for composing idle screen in a portable terminal |
KR101569176B1 (en) | 2008-10-30 | 2015-11-20 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and Apparatus for executing an object |
US20100110082A1 (en) | 2008-10-31 | 2010-05-06 | John David Myrick | Web-Based Real-Time Animation Visualization, Creation, And Distribution |
US8704775B2 (en) | 2008-11-11 | 2014-04-22 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Biometric adjustments for touchscreens |
US20100123686A1 (en) | 2008-11-19 | 2010-05-20 | Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab | Piezoresistive force sensor integrated in a display |
JP4752900B2 (en) | 2008-11-19 | 2011-08-17 | ソニー株式会社 | Image processing apparatus, image display method, and image display program |
EP2368170B1 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2017-11-01 | BlackBerry Limited | Touch-sensitive display method and apparatus |
US20100138776A1 (en) | 2008-11-30 | 2010-06-03 | Nokia Corporation | Flick-scrolling |
JP5231571B2 (en) | 2008-12-04 | 2013-07-10 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Display input device and navigation device |
CN102239069B (en) | 2008-12-04 | 2014-03-26 | 三菱电机株式会社 | Display input device |
US20100146507A1 (en) | 2008-12-05 | 2010-06-10 | Kang Dong-Oh | System and method of delivery of virtual machine using context information |
US8638311B2 (en) | 2008-12-08 | 2014-01-28 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Display device and data displaying method thereof |
JP2010165337A (en) | 2008-12-15 | 2010-07-29 | Sony Corp | Information processing apparatus, information processing method and program |
US8707170B2 (en) | 2008-12-15 | 2014-04-22 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Gesture based edit mode |
US8711011B2 (en) | 2008-12-16 | 2014-04-29 | Dell Products, Lp | Systems and methods for implementing pressure sensitive keyboards |
US9246487B2 (en) | 2008-12-16 | 2016-01-26 | Dell Products Lp | Keyboard with user configurable granularity scales for pressure sensitive keys |
US20100149096A1 (en) | 2008-12-17 | 2010-06-17 | Migos Charles J | Network management using interaction with display surface |
KR101352264B1 (en) | 2008-12-18 | 2014-01-17 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Apparatus and method for sensing muliti-touch |
WO2010071187A1 (en) | 2008-12-18 | 2010-06-24 | 日本電気株式会社 | Slide bar display control apparatus and slide bar display control method |
US8331992B2 (en) | 2008-12-19 | 2012-12-11 | Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. | Interactive locked state mobile communication device |
US8289286B2 (en) | 2008-12-19 | 2012-10-16 | Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. | Zooming keyboard/keypad |
US8453057B2 (en) | 2008-12-22 | 2013-05-28 | Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. | Stage interaction for mobile device |
JP4975722B2 (en) | 2008-12-22 | 2012-07-11 | 京セラ株式会社 | Input device and control method of input device |
US8451236B2 (en) | 2008-12-22 | 2013-05-28 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company L.P. | Touch-sensitive display screen with absolute and relative input modes |
US8686952B2 (en) | 2008-12-23 | 2014-04-01 | Apple Inc. | Multi touch with multi haptics |
US20100156823A1 (en) | 2008-12-23 | 2010-06-24 | Research In Motion Limited | Electronic device including touch-sensitive display and method of controlling same to provide tactile feedback |
JP4885938B2 (en) | 2008-12-25 | 2012-02-29 | 京セラ株式会社 | Input device |
JP4746085B2 (en) | 2008-12-25 | 2011-08-10 | 京セラ株式会社 | Input device |
JP4683126B2 (en) | 2008-12-26 | 2011-05-11 | ブラザー工業株式会社 | Input device |
CN102160371A (en) | 2008-12-30 | 2011-08-17 | Lg电子株式会社 | Image display apparatus and method for controlling same |
US8219927B2 (en) | 2009-01-06 | 2012-07-10 | Microsoft Corporation | Revealing of truncated content on scrollable grid |
US8446376B2 (en) | 2009-01-13 | 2013-05-21 | Microsoft Corporation | Visual response to touch inputs |
JP2010176174A (en) | 2009-01-27 | 2010-08-12 | Fujifilm Corp | Electronic apparatus, method and program for controlling operation input of electronic apparatus |
JP5173870B2 (en) | 2009-01-28 | 2013-04-03 | 京セラ株式会社 | Input device |
EP2214087B1 (en) | 2009-01-30 | 2015-07-08 | BlackBerry Limited | A handheld electronic device having a touchscreen and a method of using a touchscreen of a handheld electronic device |
JP4723656B2 (en) | 2009-02-03 | 2011-07-13 | 京セラ株式会社 | Input device |
JP5174704B2 (en) | 2009-02-03 | 2013-04-03 | 株式会社ゼンリンデータコム | Image processing apparatus and image processing method |
US9152292B2 (en) | 2009-02-05 | 2015-10-06 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Image collage authoring |
US9176747B2 (en) | 2009-02-17 | 2015-11-03 | Sandisk Il Ltd. | User-application interface |
US20100214239A1 (en) | 2009-02-23 | 2010-08-26 | Compal Electronics, Inc. | Method and touch panel for providing tactile feedback |
JP5734546B2 (en) | 2009-02-25 | 2015-06-17 | 京セラ株式会社 | Object display device |
CN101498979B (en) | 2009-02-26 | 2010-12-29 | 苏州瀚瑞微电子有限公司 | Method for implementing virtual keyboard by utilizing condenser type touch screen |
KR100993064B1 (en) | 2009-03-02 | 2010-11-08 | 주식회사 팬택 | Method for Music Selection Playback in Touch Screen Adopted Music Playback Apparatus |
JP5157969B2 (en) | 2009-03-09 | 2013-03-06 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, threshold setting method and program thereof |
JP5267229B2 (en) | 2009-03-09 | 2013-08-21 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and information processing program |
WO2010105006A1 (en) | 2009-03-12 | 2010-09-16 | Immersion Corporation | Systems and methods for interfaces featuring surface-based haptic effects |
KR102003426B1 (en) | 2009-03-12 | 2019-07-24 | 임머숀 코퍼레이션 | Systems and methods for a texture engine |
US9684521B2 (en) | 2010-01-26 | 2017-06-20 | Apple Inc. | Systems having discrete and continuous gesture recognizers |
US8285499B2 (en) | 2009-03-16 | 2012-10-09 | Apple Inc. | Event recognition |
US9875013B2 (en) | 2009-03-16 | 2018-01-23 | Apple Inc. | Methods and graphical user interfaces for editing on a multifunction device with a touch screen display |
US9852761B2 (en) | 2009-03-16 | 2017-12-26 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for editing an audio or video attachment in an electronic message |
US9262071B2 (en) | 2009-03-16 | 2016-02-16 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Direct manipulation of content |
US8689128B2 (en) | 2009-03-16 | 2014-04-01 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for moving a current position in content at a variable scrubbing rate |
KR101549558B1 (en) | 2009-03-18 | 2015-09-03 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile terminal and control method thereof |
US8499243B2 (en) | 2009-03-23 | 2013-07-30 | Panasonic Corporation | Information processing device, information processing method, recording medium, and integrated circuit |
JP5252378B2 (en) | 2009-03-26 | 2013-07-31 | ヤマハ株式会社 | MIXER DEVICE WINDOW CONTROL METHOD, MIXER DEVICE, AND MIXER DEVICE WINDOW CONTROL PROGRAM |
US8175653B2 (en) | 2009-03-30 | 2012-05-08 | Microsoft Corporation | Chromeless user interface |
US8355698B2 (en) | 2009-03-30 | 2013-01-15 | Microsoft Corporation | Unlock screen |
JP4904375B2 (en) | 2009-03-31 | 2012-03-28 | 京セラ株式会社 | User interface device and portable terminal device |
US8884925B2 (en) | 2009-04-05 | 2014-11-11 | Radion Engineering Co. Ltd. | Display system and method utilizing optical sensors |
US20100271312A1 (en) | 2009-04-22 | 2010-10-28 | Rachid Alameh | Menu Configuration System and Method for Display on an Electronic Device |
JP5325979B2 (en) | 2009-04-24 | 2013-10-23 | 京セラ株式会社 | Input device |
JP4801228B2 (en) | 2009-04-24 | 2011-10-26 | 京セラ株式会社 | Input device |
KR20100118458A (en) | 2009-04-28 | 2010-11-05 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for processing image and mobile terminal having camera thereof |
US9354795B2 (en) | 2009-04-29 | 2016-05-31 | Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd | Refining manual input interpretation on touch surfaces |
US8418082B2 (en) | 2009-05-01 | 2013-04-09 | Apple Inc. | Cross-track edit indicators and edit selections |
US8627207B2 (en) | 2009-05-01 | 2014-01-07 | Apple Inc. | Presenting an editing tool in a composite display area |
US8669945B2 (en) | 2009-05-07 | 2014-03-11 | Microsoft Corporation | Changing of list views on mobile device |
US8427503B2 (en) | 2009-05-18 | 2013-04-23 | Nokia Corporation | Method, apparatus and computer program product for creating graphical objects with desired physical features for usage in animation |
KR101640463B1 (en) | 2009-05-19 | 2016-07-18 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Operation Method And Apparatus For Portable Device |
US20140078318A1 (en) | 2009-05-22 | 2014-03-20 | Motorola Mobility Llc | Electronic Device with Sensing Assembly and Method for Interpreting Consecutive Gestures |
US8549432B2 (en) | 2009-05-29 | 2013-10-01 | Apple Inc. | Radial menus |
KR101560718B1 (en) | 2009-05-29 | 2015-10-15 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile terminal and method for displaying information thereof |
US9148618B2 (en) | 2009-05-29 | 2015-09-29 | Apple Inc. | Systems and methods for previewing newly captured image content and reviewing previously stored image content |
KR20100129424A (en) | 2009-06-01 | 2010-12-09 | 한국표준과학연구원 | Method and apparatus to provide user interface using touch screen based on location and intensity |
US9372536B2 (en) | 2009-06-05 | 2016-06-21 | Empire Technology Development Llc | Touch screen with tactile feedback |
US9086875B2 (en) | 2009-06-05 | 2015-07-21 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Controlling power consumption of a mobile device based on gesture recognition |
US8493344B2 (en) | 2009-06-07 | 2013-07-23 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for accessibility using a touch-sensitive surface |
US9405456B2 (en) | 2009-06-08 | 2016-08-02 | Xerox Corporation | Manipulation of displayed objects by virtual magnetism |
US8621387B2 (en) | 2009-06-08 | 2013-12-31 | Apple Inc. | User interface for multiple display regions |
US20100313158A1 (en) | 2009-06-08 | 2010-12-09 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method for editing data in mobile terminal and mobile terminal using the same |
US8823749B2 (en) | 2009-06-10 | 2014-09-02 | Qualcomm Incorporated | User interface methods providing continuous zoom functionality |
KR101598335B1 (en) | 2009-06-11 | 2016-02-29 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Operating a Mobile Termianl |
US8593415B2 (en) | 2009-06-19 | 2013-11-26 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method for processing touch signal in mobile terminal and mobile terminal using the same |
US9330503B2 (en) | 2009-06-19 | 2016-05-03 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Presaging and surfacing interactivity within data visualizations |
CN101609380A (en) | 2009-06-23 | 2009-12-23 | 苏州瀚瑞微电子有限公司 | A kind of on touch-screen the file method of operating |
WO2010150893A1 (en) | 2009-06-26 | 2010-12-29 | 京セラ株式会社 | Communication device and electronic device |
US20100328229A1 (en) | 2009-06-30 | 2010-12-30 | Research In Motion Limited | Method and apparatus for providing tactile feedback |
CN105260110A (en) | 2009-07-03 | 2016-01-20 | 泰克图斯科技公司 | User interface enhancement system |
US20110010626A1 (en) | 2009-07-09 | 2011-01-13 | Jorge Fino | Device and Method for Adjusting a Playback Control with a Finger Gesture |
KR101608764B1 (en) | 2009-07-14 | 2016-04-04 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile terminal and method for controlling display thereof |
US9305232B2 (en) | 2009-07-22 | 2016-04-05 | Blackberry Limited | Display orientation change for wireless devices |
US8378798B2 (en) | 2009-07-24 | 2013-02-19 | Research In Motion Limited | Method and apparatus for a touch-sensitive display |
JP2011028635A (en) | 2009-07-28 | 2011-02-10 | Sony Corp | Display control apparatus, display control method and computer program |
JP5197521B2 (en) | 2009-07-29 | 2013-05-15 | 京セラ株式会社 | Input device |
US9740340B1 (en) | 2009-07-31 | 2017-08-22 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Visually consistent arrays including conductive mesh |
KR101276749B1 (en) | 2009-08-03 | 2013-06-19 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Electrophoretic display device and method of fabricating the same |
CN101630230A (en) | 2009-08-04 | 2010-01-20 | 苏州瀚瑞微电子有限公司 | Method for controlling zoom ratio by induction |
JP5398408B2 (en) | 2009-08-07 | 2014-01-29 | オリンパスイメージング株式会社 | CAMERA, CAMERA CONTROL METHOD, DISPLAY CONTROL DEVICE, AND DISPLAY CONTROL METHOD |
KR101608532B1 (en) | 2009-08-11 | 2016-04-01 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for displaying data and mobile terminal thereof |
US20110039602A1 (en) * | 2009-08-13 | 2011-02-17 | Mcnamara Justin | Methods And Systems For Interacting With Content On A Mobile Device |
US8243983B2 (en) | 2009-08-14 | 2012-08-14 | Microsoft Corporation | Graphically encoded data copy and paste |
US20110055135A1 (en) | 2009-08-26 | 2011-03-03 | International Business Machines Corporation | Deferred Teleportation or Relocation in Virtual Worlds |
US20110070342A1 (en) | 2009-08-26 | 2011-03-24 | Wilkens Patrick J | Method for evaluating and orientating baked product |
JP5310389B2 (en) | 2009-08-27 | 2013-10-09 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program |
JP2011048669A (en) | 2009-08-27 | 2011-03-10 | Kyocera Corp | Input device |
JP2011048686A (en) | 2009-08-27 | 2011-03-10 | Kyocera Corp | Input apparatus |
US8363020B2 (en) | 2009-08-27 | 2013-01-29 | Symbol Technologies, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for pressure-based manipulation of content on a touch screen |
JP5304544B2 (en) | 2009-08-28 | 2013-10-02 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program |
JP5593655B2 (en) | 2009-08-31 | 2014-09-24 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program |
US8390583B2 (en) | 2009-08-31 | 2013-03-05 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Pressure sensitive user interface for mobile devices |
JP5267388B2 (en) | 2009-08-31 | 2013-08-21 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program |
KR20110023977A (en) | 2009-09-01 | 2011-03-09 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for managing widget in mobile terminal |
US9262063B2 (en) | 2009-09-02 | 2016-02-16 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Touch-screen user interface |
JP5182260B2 (en) | 2009-09-02 | 2013-04-17 | ソニー株式会社 | Operation control device, operation control method, and computer program |
JP2011053971A (en) | 2009-09-02 | 2011-03-17 | Sony Corp | Apparatus, method and program for processing information |
US8451238B2 (en) | 2009-09-02 | 2013-05-28 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Touch-screen user interface |
JP2011053974A (en) | 2009-09-02 | 2011-03-17 | Sony Corp | Device and method for controlling operation, and computer program |
JP5310403B2 (en) | 2009-09-02 | 2013-10-09 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program |
TW201109990A (en) | 2009-09-04 | 2011-03-16 | Higgstec Inc | Touch gesture detecting method of a touch panel |
JP5278259B2 (en) | 2009-09-07 | 2013-09-04 | ソニー株式会社 | Input device, input method, and program |
KR101150545B1 (en) | 2009-09-07 | 2012-06-11 | 주식회사 팬택앤큐리텔 | Mobile communucation terminal and screen display change method thereof |
EP2302496A1 (en) | 2009-09-10 | 2011-03-30 | Research In Motion Limited | Dynamic sizing of identifier on a touch-sensitive display |
US20110057886A1 (en) | 2009-09-10 | 2011-03-10 | Oliver Ng | Dynamic sizing of identifier on a touch-sensitive display |
KR20110028834A (en) | 2009-09-14 | 2011-03-22 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for providing user interface using touch pressure on touch screen of mobile station |
EP3855297A3 (en) | 2009-09-22 | 2021-10-27 | Apple Inc. | Device method and graphical user interface for manipulating user interface objects |
US8264471B2 (en) | 2009-09-22 | 2012-09-11 | Sony Mobile Communications Ab | Miniature character input mechanism |
JP5393377B2 (en) | 2009-09-25 | 2014-01-22 | 京セラ株式会社 | Input device |
US8421762B2 (en) | 2009-09-25 | 2013-04-16 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for manipulation of user interface objects with activation regions |
US8780055B2 (en) | 2009-10-02 | 2014-07-15 | Blackberry Limited | Low power wakeup detection circuit and a portable electronic device having a low power wakeup detection circuit |
US8436806B2 (en) | 2009-10-02 | 2013-05-07 | Research In Motion Limited | Method of synchronizing data acquisition and a portable electronic device configured to perform the same |
US9141260B2 (en) | 2009-10-08 | 2015-09-22 | Red Hat, Inc. | Workspace management tool |
US20110084910A1 (en) | 2009-10-13 | 2011-04-14 | Research In Motion Limited | Portable electronic device including touch-sensitive display and method of controlling same |
KR101092592B1 (en) | 2009-10-14 | 2011-12-13 | 주식회사 팬택 | Mobile communication terminal and method for providing touch interface thereof |
US10068728B2 (en) | 2009-10-15 | 2018-09-04 | Synaptics Incorporated | Touchpad with capacitive force sensing |
CA2680602C (en) | 2009-10-19 | 2011-07-26 | Ibm Canada Limited - Ibm Canada Limitee | System and method for generating and displaying hybrid context menus |
US20110102829A1 (en) | 2009-10-30 | 2011-05-05 | Jourdan Arlene T | Image size warning |
US8677284B2 (en) | 2009-11-04 | 2014-03-18 | Alpine Electronics, Inc. | Method and apparatus for controlling and displaying contents in a user interface |
JP5328611B2 (en) | 2009-11-05 | 2013-10-30 | シャープ株式会社 | Portable information terminal |
US20110109617A1 (en) | 2009-11-12 | 2011-05-12 | Microsoft Corporation | Visualizing Depth |
KR101725888B1 (en) | 2009-11-13 | 2017-04-13 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for providing image in camera or remote-controller for camera |
CA2780765A1 (en) | 2009-11-13 | 2011-05-19 | Google Inc. | Live wallpaper |
JP2011107823A (en) | 2009-11-13 | 2011-06-02 | Canon Inc | Display controller and display control method |
KR101611440B1 (en) | 2009-11-16 | 2016-04-11 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for processing image |
US8665227B2 (en) | 2009-11-19 | 2014-03-04 | Motorola Mobility Llc | Method and apparatus for replicating physical key function with soft keys in an electronic device |
KR101620058B1 (en) | 2009-11-23 | 2016-05-24 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus for switching screen between virtual machines and method thereof |
US8799816B2 (en) | 2009-12-07 | 2014-08-05 | Motorola Mobility Llc | Display interface and method for displaying multiple items arranged in a sequence |
US9268466B2 (en) | 2009-12-09 | 2016-02-23 | Citrix Systems, Inc. | Methods and systems for updating a dock with a user interface element representative of a remote application |
US9557735B2 (en) | 2009-12-10 | 2017-01-31 | Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. | Methods and apparatus to manage process control status rollups |
US8633916B2 (en) | 2009-12-10 | 2014-01-21 | Apple, Inc. | Touch pad with force sensors and actuator feedback |
JP5490508B2 (en) | 2009-12-11 | 2014-05-14 | 京セラ株式会社 | Device having touch sensor, tactile sensation presentation method, and tactile sensation presentation program |
US8358281B2 (en) | 2009-12-15 | 2013-01-22 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for management and manipulation of user interface elements |
US8381125B2 (en) | 2009-12-16 | 2013-02-19 | Apple Inc. | Device and method for resizing user interface content while maintaining an aspect ratio via snapping a perimeter to a gridline |
US8274592B2 (en) | 2009-12-22 | 2012-09-25 | Eastman Kodak Company | Variable rate browsing of an image collection |
US8510677B2 (en) | 2010-01-06 | 2013-08-13 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for navigating through a range of values |
US8525839B2 (en) | 2010-01-06 | 2013-09-03 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for providing digital content products |
US8698762B2 (en) | 2010-01-06 | 2014-04-15 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for navigating and displaying content in context |
KR101616875B1 (en) | 2010-01-07 | 2016-05-02 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Touch panel and electronic device including the touch panel |
US20110175826A1 (en) | 2010-01-15 | 2011-07-21 | Bradford Allen Moore | Automatically Displaying and Hiding an On-screen Keyboard |
US9715332B1 (en) | 2010-08-26 | 2017-07-25 | Cypress Lake Software, Inc. | Methods, systems, and computer program products for navigating between visual components |
US10007393B2 (en) | 2010-01-19 | 2018-06-26 | Apple Inc. | 3D view of file structure |
JP5636678B2 (en) | 2010-01-19 | 2014-12-10 | ソニー株式会社 | Display control apparatus, display control method, and display control program |
JP2011170834A (en) | 2010-01-19 | 2011-09-01 | Sony Corp | Information processing apparatus, operation prediction method, and operation prediction program |
US20110179381A1 (en) | 2010-01-21 | 2011-07-21 | Research In Motion Limited | Portable electronic device and method of controlling same |
US8914732B2 (en) | 2010-01-22 | 2014-12-16 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Displaying home screen profiles on a mobile terminal |
KR101304321B1 (en) | 2010-01-22 | 2013-09-11 | 전자부품연구원 | Method for providing UI according to single touch pressure and electronic device using the same |
JP2011176794A (en) | 2010-01-26 | 2011-09-08 | Canon Inc | Imaging apparatus and imaging method |
US8683363B2 (en) | 2010-01-26 | 2014-03-25 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for managing user interface content and user interface elements |
JP5635274B2 (en) | 2010-01-27 | 2014-12-03 | 京セラ株式会社 | Tactile sensation presentation apparatus and tactile sensation presentation method |
US8261213B2 (en) | 2010-01-28 | 2012-09-04 | Microsoft Corporation | Brush, carbon-copy, and fill gestures |
US20110185299A1 (en) | 2010-01-28 | 2011-07-28 | Microsoft Corporation | Stamp Gestures |
US20110191675A1 (en) | 2010-02-01 | 2011-08-04 | Nokia Corporation | Sliding input user interface |
US20110193881A1 (en) | 2010-02-05 | 2011-08-11 | Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab | Regulation of navigation speed among displayed items and tilt angle thereof responsive to user applied pressure |
US8988367B2 (en) | 2010-02-05 | 2015-03-24 | Broadcom Corporation | Systems and methods for providing enhanced touch sensing |
US8839150B2 (en) | 2010-02-10 | 2014-09-16 | Apple Inc. | Graphical objects that respond to touch or motion input |
KR101673918B1 (en) | 2010-02-11 | 2016-11-09 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for providing plural informations in a portable terminal |
US9417787B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2016-08-16 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Distortion effects to indicate location in a movable data collection |
US8782556B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2014-07-15 | Microsoft Corporation | User-centric soft keyboard predictive technologies |
US20110202853A1 (en) | 2010-02-15 | 2011-08-18 | Research In Motion Limited | Contact objects |
EP2360570A3 (en) | 2010-02-15 | 2012-05-16 | Research In Motion Limited | Graphical context short menu |
JP2011170538A (en) | 2010-02-17 | 2011-09-01 | Sony Corp | Information processor, information processing method and program |
JP2011197848A (en) | 2010-03-18 | 2011-10-06 | Rohm Co Ltd | Touch-panel input device |
US8799827B2 (en) | 2010-02-19 | 2014-08-05 | Microsoft Corporation | Page manipulations using on and off-screen gestures |
US9965165B2 (en) | 2010-02-19 | 2018-05-08 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Multi-finger gestures |
US9367205B2 (en) | 2010-02-19 | 2016-06-14 | Microsoft Technolgoy Licensing, Llc | Radial menus with bezel gestures |
US9310994B2 (en) | 2010-02-19 | 2016-04-12 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Use of bezel as an input mechanism |
US9274682B2 (en) | 2010-02-19 | 2016-03-01 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Off-screen gestures to create on-screen input |
EP2360507B1 (en) | 2010-02-22 | 2014-11-05 | DST Innovations Limited | Display elements |
US20130328770A1 (en) | 2010-02-23 | 2013-12-12 | Muv Interactive Ltd. | System for projecting content to a display surface having user-controlled size, shape and location/direction and apparatus and methods useful in conjunction therewith |
JP4891463B2 (en) | 2010-02-23 | 2012-03-07 | 京セラ株式会社 | Electronics |
US8751970B2 (en) | 2010-02-25 | 2014-06-10 | Microsoft Corporation | Multi-screen synchronous slide gesture |
US20120324471A1 (en) | 2010-02-26 | 2012-12-20 | Nec Corporation | Control device, management device, data processing method of control device, and program |
US9361018B2 (en) | 2010-03-01 | 2016-06-07 | Blackberry Limited | Method of providing tactile feedback and apparatus |
JP5413250B2 (en) | 2010-03-05 | 2014-02-12 | ソニー株式会社 | Image processing apparatus, image processing method, and program |
US8941600B2 (en) | 2010-03-05 | 2015-01-27 | Mckesson Financial Holdings | Apparatus for providing touch feedback for user input to a touch sensitive surface |
US20110221684A1 (en) | 2010-03-11 | 2011-09-15 | Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab | Touch-sensitive input device, mobile device and method for operating a touch-sensitive input device |
JP2011192215A (en) | 2010-03-16 | 2011-09-29 | Kyocera Corp | Device, method and program for inputting character |
JP2011192179A (en) | 2010-03-16 | 2011-09-29 | Kyocera Corp | Device, method and program for inputting character |
CA2734427C (en) | 2010-03-19 | 2018-05-08 | Xavier Pierre-Emmanuel Saynac | Systems and methods for determining the location and pressure of a touchload applied to a touchpad |
US8756522B2 (en) | 2010-03-19 | 2014-06-17 | Blackberry Limited | Portable electronic device and method of controlling same |
US9069416B2 (en) | 2010-03-25 | 2015-06-30 | Google Inc. | Method and system for selecting content using a touchscreen |
US9383887B1 (en) | 2010-03-26 | 2016-07-05 | Open Invention Network Llc | Method and apparatus of providing a customized user interface |
US8725706B2 (en) | 2010-03-26 | 2014-05-13 | Nokia Corporation | Method and apparatus for multi-item searching |
WO2011121375A1 (en) | 2010-03-31 | 2011-10-06 | Nokia Corporation | Apparatuses, methods and computer programs for a virtual stylus |
US8826184B2 (en) | 2010-04-05 | 2014-09-02 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Mobile terminal and image display controlling method thereof |
JP2011221640A (en) | 2010-04-06 | 2011-11-04 | Sony Corp | Information processor, information processing method and program |
US10788976B2 (en) | 2010-04-07 | 2020-09-29 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for managing folders with multiple pages |
US8423911B2 (en) | 2010-04-07 | 2013-04-16 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for managing folders |
US9823831B2 (en) | 2010-04-07 | 2017-11-21 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for managing concurrently open software applications |
US20110252376A1 (en) | 2010-04-07 | 2011-10-13 | Imran Chaudhri | Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Managing Concurrently Open Software Applications |
US9417695B2 (en) | 2010-04-08 | 2016-08-16 | Blackberry Limited | Tactile feedback method and apparatus |
EP2375309A1 (en) | 2010-04-08 | 2011-10-12 | Research in Motion Limited | Handheld device with localized delays for triggering tactile feedback |
EP2375314A1 (en) | 2010-04-08 | 2011-10-12 | Research in Motion Limited | Touch-sensitive device and method of control |
US20110248948A1 (en) | 2010-04-08 | 2011-10-13 | Research In Motion Limited | Touch-sensitive device and method of control |
EP2378406B1 (en) | 2010-04-13 | 2018-08-22 | LG Electronics Inc. | Mobile terminal and method of controlling operation of the mobile terminal |
JP5459031B2 (en) | 2010-04-13 | 2014-04-02 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program |
US9026932B1 (en) | 2010-04-16 | 2015-05-05 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Edge navigation user interface |
US9285988B2 (en) | 2010-04-20 | 2016-03-15 | Blackberry Limited | Portable electronic device having touch-sensitive display with variable repeat rate |
KR101704531B1 (en) | 2010-04-22 | 2017-02-08 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for displaying text information in mobile terminal |
JP2011242386A (en) | 2010-04-23 | 2011-12-01 | Immersion Corp | Transparent compound piezoelectric material aggregate of contact sensor and tactile sense actuator |
JP2011232947A (en) | 2010-04-27 | 2011-11-17 | Lenovo Singapore Pte Ltd | Information processor, window display method thereof and computer executable program |
JP2011238125A (en) | 2010-05-12 | 2011-11-24 | Sony Corp | Image processing device, method and program |
US8451255B2 (en) | 2010-05-14 | 2013-05-28 | Arnett Ryan Weber | Method of providing tactile feedback and electronic device |
EP2386935B1 (en) | 2010-05-14 | 2015-02-11 | BlackBerry Limited | Method of providing tactile feedback and electronic device |
US8466889B2 (en) | 2010-05-14 | 2013-06-18 | Research In Motion Limited | Method of providing tactile feedback and electronic device |
US20110285656A1 (en) | 2010-05-19 | 2011-11-24 | Google Inc. | Sliding Motion To Change Computer Keys |
JP4983961B2 (en) | 2010-05-25 | 2012-07-25 | 株式会社ニコン | Imaging device |
US8860672B2 (en) | 2010-05-26 | 2014-10-14 | T-Mobile Usa, Inc. | User interface with z-axis interaction |
US20110296351A1 (en) | 2010-05-26 | 2011-12-01 | T-Mobile Usa, Inc. | User Interface with Z-axis Interaction and Multiple Stacks |
US8669946B2 (en) | 2010-05-28 | 2014-03-11 | Blackberry Limited | Electronic device including touch-sensitive display and method of controlling same |
KR101626301B1 (en) * | 2010-05-28 | 2016-06-01 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Electronic device and operation control method thereof |
US20130120280A1 (en) | 2010-05-28 | 2013-05-16 | Tim Kukulski | System and Method for Evaluating Interoperability of Gesture Recognizers |
JP5190560B2 (en) | 2010-05-28 | 2013-04-24 | 楽天株式会社 | Content output apparatus, content output method, content output program, and recording medium on which content output program is recorded |
EP2390772A1 (en) | 2010-05-31 | 2011-11-30 | Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB | User interface with three dimensional user input |
EP2577436A4 (en) | 2010-06-01 | 2016-03-30 | Nokia Technologies Oy | A method, a device and a system for receiving user input |
US9329767B1 (en) | 2010-06-08 | 2016-05-03 | Google Inc. | User-specific customization based on characteristics of user-interaction |
JP2011257941A (en) | 2010-06-08 | 2011-12-22 | Panasonic Corp | Character input device, character decoration method and character decoration program |
US20120089951A1 (en) | 2010-06-10 | 2012-04-12 | Cricket Communications, Inc. | Method and apparatus for navigation within a multi-level application |
US20110304577A1 (en) | 2010-06-11 | 2011-12-15 | Sp Controls, Inc. | Capacitive touch screen stylus |
US20110304559A1 (en) | 2010-06-11 | 2011-12-15 | Research In Motion Limited | Portable electronic device including touch-sensitive display and method of changing tactile feedback |
US9106194B2 (en) | 2010-06-14 | 2015-08-11 | Sony Corporation | Regulation of audio volume and/or rate responsive to user applied pressure and related methods |
US20110319136A1 (en) | 2010-06-23 | 2011-12-29 | Motorola, Inc. | Method of a Wireless Communication Device for Managing Status Components for Global Call Control |
US8477109B1 (en) | 2010-06-24 | 2013-07-02 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Surfacing reference work entries on touch-sensitive displays |
US8542205B1 (en) | 2010-06-24 | 2013-09-24 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Refining search results based on touch gestures |
KR20120002727A (en) | 2010-07-01 | 2012-01-09 | 주식회사 팬택 | Apparatus for displaying 3d ui |
GB201011146D0 (en) | 2010-07-02 | 2010-08-18 | Vodafone Ip Licensing Ltd | Mobile computing device |
US8972903B2 (en) | 2010-07-08 | 2015-03-03 | Apple Inc. | Using gesture to navigate hierarchically ordered user interface screens |
JP5589625B2 (en) | 2010-07-08 | 2014-09-17 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program |
US20120013541A1 (en) | 2010-07-14 | 2012-01-19 | Research In Motion Limited | Portable electronic device and method of controlling same |
US20120013542A1 (en) | 2010-07-16 | 2012-01-19 | Research In Motion Limited | Portable electronic device and method of determining a location of a touch |
US8854316B2 (en) | 2010-07-16 | 2014-10-07 | Blackberry Limited | Portable electronic device with a touch-sensitive display and navigation device and method |
EP2410413B1 (en) | 2010-07-19 | 2018-12-12 | Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) | Method for text input, apparatus, and computer program |
KR20120009564A (en) | 2010-07-19 | 2012-02-02 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus and method for generating 3 dimentional mouse pointer |
US20120019448A1 (en) | 2010-07-22 | 2012-01-26 | Nokia Corporation | User Interface with Touch Pressure Level Sensing |
JP2012027875A (en) | 2010-07-28 | 2012-02-09 | Sony Corp | Electronic apparatus, processing method and program |
JP5529663B2 (en) | 2010-07-28 | 2014-06-25 | 京セラ株式会社 | Input device |
JP5494337B2 (en) | 2010-07-30 | 2014-05-14 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and information processing program |
US8402533B2 (en) | 2010-08-06 | 2013-03-19 | Google Inc. | Input to locked computing device |
US8593418B2 (en) | 2010-08-08 | 2013-11-26 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and system for adjusting display content |
WO2012019285A1 (en) | 2010-08-09 | 2012-02-16 | Intelligent Mechatronic Systems Inc. | Interface for mobile device and computing device |
US8698765B1 (en) | 2010-08-17 | 2014-04-15 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Associating concepts within content items |
US8576184B2 (en) | 2010-08-19 | 2013-11-05 | Nokia Corporation | Method and apparatus for browsing content files |
JP5625612B2 (en) | 2010-08-19 | 2014-11-19 | 株式会社リコー | Operation display device and operation display method |
JP5510185B2 (en) | 2010-08-20 | 2014-06-04 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, program, and display control method |
JP5573487B2 (en) * | 2010-08-20 | 2014-08-20 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, program, and operation control method |
US8751838B2 (en) | 2010-08-23 | 2014-06-10 | Nokia Corporation | Method, apparatus and computer program product for presentation of information in a low power mode |
JP2011048832A (en) | 2010-08-27 | 2011-03-10 | Kyocera Corp | Input device |
JP5813301B2 (en) | 2010-09-01 | 2015-11-17 | 京セラ株式会社 | Display device |
JP5732783B2 (en) | 2010-09-02 | 2015-06-10 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, input control method for information processing apparatus, and program |
US8954427B2 (en) | 2010-09-07 | 2015-02-10 | Google Inc. | Search result previews |
KR101739054B1 (en) | 2010-09-08 | 2017-05-24 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Motion control method and apparatus in a device |
US10645344B2 (en) | 2010-09-10 | 2020-05-05 | Avigilion Analytics Corporation | Video system with intelligent visual display |
US20120066648A1 (en) | 2010-09-14 | 2012-03-15 | Xerox Corporation | Move and turn touch screen interface for manipulating objects in a 3d scene |
US9164670B2 (en) | 2010-09-15 | 2015-10-20 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Flexible touch-based scrolling |
JP6049990B2 (en) | 2010-09-15 | 2016-12-21 | 京セラ株式会社 | Portable electronic device, screen control method, and screen control program |
KR101657122B1 (en) | 2010-09-15 | 2016-09-30 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same |
EP2431870B1 (en) | 2010-09-17 | 2019-11-27 | LG Electronics Inc. | Mobile terminal and control method thereof |
GB201015720D0 (en) | 2010-09-20 | 2010-10-27 | Gammons Richard | Findability of data elements |
GB2497388B (en) | 2010-09-24 | 2019-03-06 | Ontario Inc 2236008 | Portable electronic device and method of controlling same |
CA2750352C (en) | 2010-09-24 | 2019-03-05 | Research In Motion Limited | Method for conserving power on a portable electronic device and a portable electronic device configured for the same |
JP5959797B2 (en) | 2010-09-28 | 2016-08-02 | 京セラ株式会社 | Input device and control method of input device |
US9030419B1 (en) | 2010-09-28 | 2015-05-12 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Touch and force user interface navigation |
JP5725533B2 (en) | 2010-09-29 | 2015-05-27 | Necカシオモバイルコミュニケーションズ株式会社 | Information processing apparatus and input method |
US20120084644A1 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2012-04-05 | Julien Robert | Content preview |
KR101685991B1 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2016-12-13 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile terminal and control method for mobile terminal |
US8817053B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2014-08-26 | Apple Inc. | Methods and systems for opening a file |
US9323442B2 (en) | 2010-09-30 | 2016-04-26 | Apple Inc. | Managing items in a user interface |
US8713474B2 (en) | 2010-10-05 | 2014-04-29 | Citrix Systems, Inc. | Providing user interfaces and window previews for hosted applications |
US20120089942A1 (en) | 2010-10-07 | 2012-04-12 | Research In Motion Limited | Method and portable electronic device for presenting text |
EP2447818A1 (en) | 2010-10-07 | 2012-05-02 | Research in Motion Limited | Method and portable electronic device for presenting text |
JP5664103B2 (en) | 2010-10-08 | 2015-02-04 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program |
KR20130052743A (en) | 2010-10-15 | 2013-05-23 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method for selecting menu item |
KR101726607B1 (en) | 2010-10-19 | 2017-04-13 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for controlling screen in mobile terminal |
US20120102437A1 (en) | 2010-10-22 | 2012-04-26 | Microsoft Corporation | Notification Group Touch Gesture Dismissal Techniques |
JP5710934B2 (en) | 2010-10-25 | 2015-04-30 | シャープ株式会社 | Content display device and content display method |
US8706172B2 (en) | 2010-10-26 | 2014-04-22 | Miscrosoft Corporation | Energy efficient continuous sensing for communications devices |
US8655085B2 (en) | 2010-10-28 | 2014-02-18 | Microsoft Corporation | Burst mode image compression and decompression |
US20120105367A1 (en) | 2010-11-01 | 2012-05-03 | Impress Inc. | Methods of using tactile force sensing for intuitive user interface |
US9262002B2 (en) | 2010-11-03 | 2016-02-16 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Force sensing touch screen |
US8648823B2 (en) | 2010-11-05 | 2014-02-11 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for manipulating soft keyboards |
US9760241B1 (en) | 2010-11-05 | 2017-09-12 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Tactile interaction with content |
US8587547B2 (en) | 2010-11-05 | 2013-11-19 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for manipulating soft keyboards |
US20130215079A1 (en) | 2010-11-09 | 2013-08-22 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | User interface with haptic feedback |
US9645722B1 (en) | 2010-11-19 | 2017-05-09 | A9.Com, Inc. | Preview search results |
JP5719205B2 (en) | 2010-11-22 | 2015-05-13 | シャープ株式会社 | Electronic device and display control method |
US8560960B2 (en) | 2010-11-23 | 2013-10-15 | Apple Inc. | Browsing and interacting with open windows |
JP2012118825A (en) | 2010-12-01 | 2012-06-21 | Fujitsu Ten Ltd | Display device |
US9069452B2 (en) | 2010-12-01 | 2015-06-30 | Apple Inc. | Morphing a user-interface control object |
US9223445B2 (en) | 2010-12-02 | 2015-12-29 | Atmel Corporation | Position-sensing and force detection panel |
US10503255B2 (en) | 2010-12-02 | 2019-12-10 | Immersion Corporation | Haptic feedback assisted text manipulation |
JP5700783B2 (en) | 2010-12-07 | 2015-04-15 | 任天堂株式会社 | Information processing program, information processing apparatus, information processing system, and information processing method |
US9223461B1 (en) | 2010-12-08 | 2015-12-29 | Wendell Brown | Graphical user interface |
US8660978B2 (en) | 2010-12-17 | 2014-02-25 | Microsoft Corporation | Detecting and responding to unintentional contact with a computing device |
US9244606B2 (en) | 2010-12-20 | 2016-01-26 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for navigation of concurrently open software applications |
WO2012087939A1 (en) | 2010-12-20 | 2012-06-28 | Apple Inc. | Event recognition |
US9354804B2 (en) | 2010-12-29 | 2016-05-31 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Touch event anticipation in a computing device |
JP5698529B2 (en) | 2010-12-29 | 2015-04-08 | 任天堂株式会社 | Display control program, display control device, display control system, and display control method |
US9423951B2 (en) * | 2010-12-31 | 2016-08-23 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Content-based snap point |
US9423878B2 (en) | 2011-01-06 | 2016-08-23 | Blackberry Limited | Electronic device and method of displaying information in response to a gesture |
US20120179967A1 (en) | 2011-01-06 | 2012-07-12 | Tivo Inc. | Method and Apparatus for Gesture-Based Controls |
US20120180001A1 (en) | 2011-01-06 | 2012-07-12 | Research In Motion Limited | Electronic device and method of controlling same |
US9471145B2 (en) | 2011-01-06 | 2016-10-18 | Blackberry Limited | Electronic device and method of displaying information in response to a gesture |
KR101892630B1 (en) | 2011-01-10 | 2018-08-28 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Touch display apparatus and method for displaying thereof |
US20120185787A1 (en) | 2011-01-13 | 2012-07-19 | Microsoft Corporation | User interface interaction behavior based on insertion point |
US20120183271A1 (en) | 2011-01-17 | 2012-07-19 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Pressure-based video recording |
US9519418B2 (en) | 2011-01-18 | 2016-12-13 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Method and apparatus for providing a multi-stage device transition mechanism initiated based on a touch gesture |
US20120192108A1 (en) | 2011-01-26 | 2012-07-26 | Google Inc. | Gesture-based menu controls |
US20120218203A1 (en) | 2011-02-10 | 2012-08-30 | Kanki Noriyoshi | Touch drawing display apparatus and operation method thereof, image display apparatus allowing touch-input, and controller for the display apparatus |
JP5452738B2 (en) | 2011-02-10 | 2014-03-26 | 京セラ株式会社 | Input device |
US9557816B2 (en) | 2011-02-10 | 2017-01-31 | Kyocera Corporation | Input device |
EP3734407A1 (en) | 2011-02-10 | 2020-11-04 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Portable device comprising a touch-screen display, and method for controlling same |
US8780140B2 (en) | 2011-02-16 | 2014-07-15 | Sony Corporation | Variable display scale control device and variable playing speed control device |
US8756503B2 (en) | 2011-02-21 | 2014-06-17 | Xerox Corporation | Query generation from displayed text documents using virtual magnets |
US9727177B2 (en) | 2011-02-23 | 2017-08-08 | Kyocera Corporation | Electronic device with a touch sensor |
US8593420B1 (en) | 2011-03-04 | 2013-11-26 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Providing tactile output and interaction |
EP2686758B1 (en) | 2011-03-17 | 2020-09-30 | Laubach, Kevin | Input device user interface enhancements |
US8479110B2 (en) | 2011-03-20 | 2013-07-02 | William J. Johnson | System and method for summoning user interface objects |
US20120249853A1 (en) | 2011-03-28 | 2012-10-04 | Marc Krolczyk | Digital camera for reviewing related images |
US11580155B2 (en) | 2011-03-28 | 2023-02-14 | Kodak Alaris Inc. | Display device for displaying related digital images |
US20120256846A1 (en) | 2011-04-05 | 2012-10-11 | Research In Motion Limited | Electronic device and method of controlling same |
US8872773B2 (en) | 2011-04-05 | 2014-10-28 | Blackberry Limited | Electronic device and method of controlling same |
US20120256857A1 (en) | 2011-04-05 | 2012-10-11 | Mak Genevieve Elizabeth | Electronic device and method of controlling same |
US20120256829A1 (en) | 2011-04-05 | 2012-10-11 | Qnx Software Systems Limited | Portable electronic device and method of controlling same |
US20120260220A1 (en) | 2011-04-06 | 2012-10-11 | Research In Motion Limited | Portable electronic device having gesture recognition and a method for controlling the same |
US9733708B2 (en) | 2011-04-06 | 2017-08-15 | Kyocera Corporation | Electronic device, operation control method, and operation control program |
US8736716B2 (en) | 2011-04-06 | 2014-05-27 | Apple Inc. | Digital camera having variable duration burst mode |
CN102752441A (en) | 2011-04-22 | 2012-10-24 | 比亚迪股份有限公司 | Mobile terminal with touch screen and control method thereof |
US20120274578A1 (en) | 2011-04-26 | 2012-11-01 | Research In Motion Limited | Electronic device and method of controlling same |
US10222974B2 (en) | 2011-05-03 | 2019-03-05 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Method and apparatus for providing quick access to device functionality |
CN103518176B (en) | 2011-05-12 | 2016-03-02 | 阿尔卑斯电气株式会社 | Input media and use the loading testing method of multiple points of described input media |
US8952987B2 (en) | 2011-05-19 | 2015-02-10 | Qualcomm Incorporated | User interface elements augmented with force detection |
US9152288B2 (en) | 2011-05-19 | 2015-10-06 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Remote multi-touch |
EP2710486B1 (en) | 2011-05-20 | 2021-06-30 | Citrix Systems, Inc. | Shell integration on a mobile device for an application executing remotely on a server |
EP2715499B1 (en) | 2011-05-23 | 2020-09-02 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, LLC | Invisible control |
US9104307B2 (en) | 2011-05-27 | 2015-08-11 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Multi-application environment |
US20120304132A1 (en) | 2011-05-27 | 2012-11-29 | Chaitanya Dev Sareen | Switching back to a previously-interacted-with application |
US9104440B2 (en) | 2011-05-27 | 2015-08-11 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Multi-application environment |
US9658766B2 (en) | 2011-05-27 | 2017-05-23 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Edge gesture |
WO2012164895A1 (en) | 2011-05-27 | 2012-12-06 | 京セラ株式会社 | Electronic device |
KR101802759B1 (en) | 2011-05-30 | 2017-11-29 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile terminal and Method for controlling display thereof |
US9032338B2 (en) * | 2011-05-30 | 2015-05-12 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for navigating and editing text |
KR101290145B1 (en) | 2011-05-31 | 2013-07-26 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Control method and apparatus for touch screen, computer-reable recording medium, and terminal apparatus |
US8661339B2 (en) | 2011-05-31 | 2014-02-25 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for document manipulation |
US8508494B2 (en) | 2011-06-01 | 2013-08-13 | Motorola Mobility Llc | Using pressure differences with a touch-sensitive display screen |
US8587542B2 (en) | 2011-06-01 | 2013-11-19 | Motorola Mobility Llc | Using pressure differences with a touch-sensitive display screen |
US9310958B2 (en) | 2011-06-02 | 2016-04-12 | Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | Dock for favorite applications |
US20120311504A1 (en) | 2011-06-03 | 2012-12-06 | Van Os Marcel | Extensible architecture for navigating a hierarchy |
WO2012162895A1 (en) | 2011-06-03 | 2012-12-06 | Google Inc. | Gestures for selecting text |
US9513799B2 (en) | 2011-06-05 | 2016-12-06 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for providing control of a touch-based user interface absent physical touch capabilities |
US8661337B2 (en) | 2011-06-05 | 2014-02-25 | Apple Inc. | Techniques for use of snapshots with browsing transitions |
KR20120135723A (en) | 2011-06-07 | 2012-12-17 | 김연수 | Touch panel type signal input device |
JP5265819B2 (en) | 2011-06-07 | 2013-08-14 | パナソニック株式会社 | Electronics |
CN105718192B (en) | 2011-06-07 | 2023-05-02 | 联想(北京)有限公司 | Mobile terminal and touch input method thereof |
US20140123080A1 (en) | 2011-06-07 | 2014-05-01 | Beijing Lenovo Software Ltd. | Electrical Device, Touch Input Method And Control Method |
TWI431516B (en) | 2011-06-21 | 2014-03-21 | Quanta Comp Inc | Method and electronic device for tactile feedback |
US9304668B2 (en) | 2011-06-28 | 2016-04-05 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Method and apparatus for customizing a display screen of a user interface |
WO2013002779A1 (en) | 2011-06-29 | 2013-01-03 | Research In Motion Limited | Character preview method and apparatus |
EP2713251A4 (en) | 2011-07-04 | 2014-08-06 | Huawei Device Co Ltd | Method and electronic device for virtual handwritten input |
US20130014057A1 (en) | 2011-07-07 | 2013-01-10 | Thermal Matrix USA, Inc. | Composite control for a graphical user interface |
CN103620541B (en) | 2011-07-11 | 2017-05-24 | Kddi株式会社 | User interface device and method |
US9158455B2 (en) | 2011-07-12 | 2015-10-13 | Apple Inc. | Multifunctional environment for image cropping |
JP5325943B2 (en) | 2011-07-12 | 2013-10-23 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program |
US20130016042A1 (en) | 2011-07-12 | 2013-01-17 | Ville Makinen | Haptic device with touch gesture interface |
US9086794B2 (en) | 2011-07-14 | 2015-07-21 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Determining gestures on context based menus |
JP5799628B2 (en) | 2011-07-15 | 2015-10-28 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program |
US20130212515A1 (en) | 2012-02-13 | 2013-08-15 | Syntellia, Inc. | User interface for text input |
WO2013015070A1 (en) | 2011-07-22 | 2013-01-31 | Kddi株式会社 | User interface device capable of image scrolling not accompanying finger movement, image scrolling method, and program |
CN102243662A (en) | 2011-07-27 | 2011-11-16 | 北京风灵创景科技有限公司 | Method for displaying browser interface on mobile equipment |
US8713482B2 (en) | 2011-07-28 | 2014-04-29 | National Instruments Corporation | Gestures for presentation of different views of a system diagram |
JP5295328B2 (en) | 2011-07-29 | 2013-09-18 | Kddi株式会社 | User interface device capable of input by screen pad, input processing method and program |
KR101830965B1 (en) | 2011-08-03 | 2018-02-22 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile Terminal And Method Of Controlling The Same |
US9417754B2 (en) * | 2011-08-05 | 2016-08-16 | P4tents1, LLC | User interface system, method, and computer program product |
BR112014002039B1 (en) | 2011-08-05 | 2022-02-01 | Interdigital Ce Patent Holdings | User interface for a video player, and method for controlling a video player that has a touch-activated screen |
US9317196B2 (en) | 2011-08-10 | 2016-04-19 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Automatic zooming for text selection/cursor placement |
US20130044062A1 (en) | 2011-08-16 | 2013-02-21 | Nokia Corporation | Method and apparatus for translating between force inputs and temporal inputs |
US20130047100A1 (en) | 2011-08-17 | 2013-02-21 | Google Inc. | Link Disambiguation For Touch Screens |
US20130050131A1 (en) | 2011-08-23 | 2013-02-28 | Garmin Switzerland Gmbh | Hover based navigation user interface control |
KR101351162B1 (en) | 2011-08-30 | 2014-01-14 | 주식회사 팬택 | Terminal apparatus and method for supporting list selection using flicking |
US20130050143A1 (en) | 2011-08-31 | 2013-02-28 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method of providing of user interface in portable terminal and apparatus thereof |
WO2013029641A1 (en) | 2011-08-31 | 2013-03-07 | Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab | Method for operating a touch sensitive user interface |
US8743069B2 (en) | 2011-09-01 | 2014-06-03 | Google Inc. | Receiving input at a computing device |
TWI475470B (en) | 2011-09-07 | 2015-03-01 | Acer Inc | Electronic device and operation method of application programs |
US20130067411A1 (en) | 2011-09-08 | 2013-03-14 | Google Inc. | User gestures indicating rates of execution of functions |
JP5576841B2 (en) | 2011-09-09 | 2014-08-20 | Kddi株式会社 | User interface device capable of zooming image by pressing, image zoom method and program |
US8976128B2 (en) * | 2011-09-12 | 2015-03-10 | Google Technology Holdings LLC | Using pressure differences with a touch-sensitive display screen |
US9069460B2 (en) | 2011-09-12 | 2015-06-30 | Google Technology Holdings LLC | Using pressure differences with a touch-sensitive display screen |
US9071854B2 (en) | 2011-09-12 | 2015-06-30 | Disney Enterprises, Inc. | System and method for transmitting a services list to a playback device |
US9612670B2 (en) | 2011-09-12 | 2017-04-04 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Explicit touch selection and cursor placement |
US9501213B2 (en) | 2011-09-16 | 2016-11-22 | Skadool, Inc. | Scheduling events on an electronic calendar utilizing fixed-positioned events and a draggable calendar grid |
US9519350B2 (en) | 2011-09-19 | 2016-12-13 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Interface controlling apparatus and method using force |
US20130074003A1 (en) | 2011-09-21 | 2013-03-21 | Nokia Corporation | Method and apparatus for integrating user interfaces |
US8959430B1 (en) | 2011-09-21 | 2015-02-17 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Facilitating selection of keys related to a selected key |
JP2013070303A (en) | 2011-09-26 | 2013-04-18 | Kddi Corp | Photographing device for enabling photographing by pressing force to screen, photographing method and program |
CN103019427B (en) | 2011-09-28 | 2017-06-27 | 联想(北京)有限公司 | Control method and electronic equipment |
US20130082824A1 (en) | 2011-09-30 | 2013-04-04 | Nokia Corporation | Feedback response |
US20130086056A1 (en) | 2011-09-30 | 2013-04-04 | Matthew G. Dyor | Gesture based context menus |
US9395800B2 (en) | 2011-09-30 | 2016-07-19 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Enabling instant handwritten input on mobile computing devices |
JP2012027940A (en) | 2011-10-05 | 2012-02-09 | Toshiba Corp | Electronic apparatus |
WO2013050077A1 (en) | 2011-10-06 | 2013-04-11 | Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab | Method and electronic device for manipulating a first or a second user interface object |
US10394441B2 (en) | 2011-10-15 | 2019-08-27 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for controlling display of application windows |
US9170607B2 (en) | 2011-10-17 | 2015-10-27 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Method and apparatus for determining the presence of a device for executing operations |
US8634807B2 (en) | 2011-10-17 | 2014-01-21 | Blackberry Limited | System and method for managing electronic groups |
US20130097534A1 (en) | 2011-10-18 | 2013-04-18 | Research In Motion Limited | Method of rendering a user interface |
EP2584462B1 (en) | 2011-10-18 | 2019-03-27 | BlackBerry Limited | Method of rendering a user interface |
EP2584445A1 (en) | 2011-10-18 | 2013-04-24 | Research In Motion Limited | Method of animating a rearrangement of ui elements on a display screen of an eletronic device |
EP2584464B1 (en) | 2011-10-18 | 2020-02-19 | BlackBerry Limited | Method of rendering a user interface |
US8810535B2 (en) | 2011-10-18 | 2014-08-19 | Blackberry Limited | Electronic device and method of controlling same |
EP2584450A3 (en) | 2011-10-18 | 2014-05-21 | BlackBerry Limited | Method of modifying rendered attributes of list elements in a user interface |
US20130111345A1 (en) | 2011-10-31 | 2013-05-02 | Nokia Corporation | Portable electronic device, associated apparatus and methods |
US20130111378A1 (en) | 2011-10-31 | 2013-05-02 | Nokia Corporation | Portable electronic device, associated apparatus and methods |
US20130111415A1 (en) | 2011-10-31 | 2013-05-02 | Nokia Corporation | Portable electronic device, associated apparatus and methods |
US20130111579A1 (en) | 2011-10-31 | 2013-05-02 | Nokia Corporation | Electronic device mode, associated apparatus and methods |
DE102012110278A1 (en) | 2011-11-02 | 2013-05-02 | Beijing Lenovo Software Ltd. | Window display methods and apparatus and method and apparatus for touch operation of applications |
CN103092386A (en) | 2011-11-07 | 2013-05-08 | 联想(北京)有限公司 | Electronic equipment and touch control method thereof |
US9582178B2 (en) | 2011-11-07 | 2017-02-28 | Immersion Corporation | Systems and methods for multi-pressure interaction on touch-sensitive surfaces |
JP2013101465A (en) | 2011-11-08 | 2013-05-23 | Sony Corp | Information processing device, information processing method, and computer program |
US9588680B2 (en) | 2011-11-09 | 2017-03-07 | Blackberry Limited | Touch-sensitive display method and apparatus |
JP5520918B2 (en) | 2011-11-16 | 2014-06-11 | 富士ソフト株式会社 | Touch panel operation method and program |
KR101888457B1 (en) | 2011-11-16 | 2018-08-16 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus having a touch screen processing plurality of apllications and method for controlling thereof |
WO2013075136A1 (en) | 2011-11-18 | 2013-05-23 | Sentons Inc. | Localized haptic feedback |
US10248262B2 (en) | 2011-11-18 | 2019-04-02 | Sentons Inc. | User interface interaction using touch input force |
KR101796481B1 (en) | 2011-11-28 | 2017-12-04 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method of eliminating shutter-lags with low power consumption, camera module, and mobile device having the same |
KR101873744B1 (en) | 2011-11-29 | 2018-07-03 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same |
US9372593B2 (en) | 2011-11-29 | 2016-06-21 | Apple Inc. | Using a three-dimensional model to render a cursor |
KR101824007B1 (en) | 2011-12-05 | 2018-01-31 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile terminal and multitasking method thereof |
US8581870B2 (en) | 2011-12-06 | 2013-11-12 | Apple Inc. | Touch-sensitive button with two levels |
CN102566908A (en) | 2011-12-13 | 2012-07-11 | 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 | Electronic equipment and page zooming method for same |
US8633911B2 (en) | 2011-12-14 | 2014-01-21 | Synaptics Incorporated | Force sensing input device and method for determining force information |
US9195362B2 (en) | 2011-12-16 | 2015-11-24 | Blackberry Limited | Method of rendering a user interface |
US20130154933A1 (en) | 2011-12-20 | 2013-06-20 | Synaptics Incorporated | Force touch mouse |
US20130154959A1 (en) | 2011-12-20 | 2013-06-20 | Research In Motion Limited | System and method for controlling an electronic device |
CN103988159B (en) | 2011-12-22 | 2017-11-24 | 索尼公司 | Display control unit and display control method |
US9257098B2 (en) | 2011-12-23 | 2016-02-09 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Apparatus and methods for displaying second content in response to user inputs |
CN103186329B (en) | 2011-12-27 | 2017-08-18 | 富泰华工业(深圳)有限公司 | Electronic equipment and its touch input control method |
KR102006470B1 (en) | 2011-12-28 | 2019-08-02 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Method and apparatus for multi-tasking in a user device |
US9116611B2 (en) | 2011-12-29 | 2015-08-25 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for providing multitouch inputs and hardware-based features using a single touch input |
US10248278B2 (en) | 2011-12-30 | 2019-04-02 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Method and apparatus for intuitive multitasking |
US8756511B2 (en) | 2012-01-03 | 2014-06-17 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Gesture based unlocking of a mobile terminal |
DE102012207931A1 (en) | 2012-01-07 | 2013-07-11 | Johnson Controls Gmbh | Camera arrangement for distance measurement |
JP2015508357A (en) | 2012-01-09 | 2015-03-19 | エアビクティ インコーポレイテッド | User interface for mobile devices |
KR101710547B1 (en) | 2012-01-10 | 2017-02-27 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile termianl and method for controlling of the same |
US9619038B2 (en) | 2012-01-23 | 2017-04-11 | Blackberry Limited | Electronic device and method of displaying a cover image and an application image from a low power condition |
US9058168B2 (en) | 2012-01-23 | 2015-06-16 | Blackberry Limited | Electronic device and method of controlling a display |
JP5410555B2 (en) | 2012-01-26 | 2014-02-05 | 京セラドキュメントソリューションズ株式会社 | Touch panel device |
JP2013153376A (en) | 2012-01-26 | 2013-08-08 | Sony Corp | Image processing apparatus, image processing method, and recording medium |
KR101973631B1 (en) | 2012-02-01 | 2019-04-29 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Electronic Device And Method Of Controlling The Same |
US20130198690A1 (en) | 2012-02-01 | 2013-08-01 | Microsoft Corporation | Visual indication of graphical user interface relationship |
US9164779B2 (en) | 2012-02-10 | 2015-10-20 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Apparatus and method for providing for remote user interaction |
US9128605B2 (en) | 2012-02-16 | 2015-09-08 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Thumbnail-image selection of applications |
US9146914B1 (en) | 2012-02-17 | 2015-09-29 | Google Inc. | System and method for providing a context sensitive undo function |
TWI519155B (en) | 2012-02-24 | 2016-01-21 | 宏達國際電子股份有限公司 | Burst image capture method and image capture system thereof |
US9778706B2 (en) | 2012-02-24 | 2017-10-03 | Blackberry Limited | Peekable user interface on a portable electronic device |
US20130227413A1 (en) | 2012-02-24 | 2013-08-29 | Simon Martin THORSANDER | Method and Apparatus for Providing a Contextual User Interface on a Device |
KR101356368B1 (en) | 2012-02-24 | 2014-01-29 | 주식회사 팬택 | Application switching apparatus and method |
KR101894567B1 (en) | 2012-02-24 | 2018-09-03 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Operation Method of Lock Screen And Electronic Device supporting the same |
WO2013130026A1 (en) | 2012-02-28 | 2013-09-06 | Google Inc. | Previewing expandable content items |
US9817568B2 (en) | 2012-02-29 | 2017-11-14 | Blackberry Limited | System and method for controlling an electronic device |
KR20130099647A (en) | 2012-02-29 | 2013-09-06 | 한국과학기술원 | Method and apparatus for controlling contents using side interface in user terminal |
US20130232402A1 (en) | 2012-03-01 | 2013-09-05 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Method for Processing Sensor Data and Computing Node |
US9542013B2 (en) | 2012-03-01 | 2017-01-10 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Method and apparatus for determining recipients of a sharing operation based on an indication associated with a tangible object |
US9158383B2 (en) | 2012-03-02 | 2015-10-13 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Force concentrator |
US9131192B2 (en) | 2012-03-06 | 2015-09-08 | Apple Inc. | Unified slider control for modifying multiple image properties |
US20130234929A1 (en) | 2012-03-07 | 2013-09-12 | Evernote Corporation | Adapting mobile user interface to unfavorable usage conditions |
US9378581B2 (en) | 2012-03-13 | 2016-06-28 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Approaches for highlighting active interface elements |
WO2013135270A1 (en) | 2012-03-13 | 2013-09-19 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | An apparatus and method for navigating on a touch sensitive screen thereof |
US8760425B2 (en) | 2012-03-20 | 2014-06-24 | Sony Corporation | Method and apparatus for enabling touchpad gestures |
US10331769B1 (en) | 2012-03-23 | 2019-06-25 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Interaction based prioritized retrieval of embedded resources |
CN102662573B (en) | 2012-03-24 | 2016-04-27 | 上海量明科技发展有限公司 | By pressing the method and terminal that obtain options |
US10673691B2 (en) | 2012-03-24 | 2020-06-02 | Fred Khosropour | User interaction platform |
CN102662571B (en) | 2012-03-26 | 2016-05-25 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and the subscriber equipment of unlock screen protection |
US9063644B2 (en) | 2012-03-26 | 2015-06-23 | The Boeing Company | Adjustment mechanisms for virtual knobs on a touchscreen interface |
US11474645B2 (en) | 2012-03-27 | 2022-10-18 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Method and apparatus for force sensing |
US9116571B2 (en) | 2012-03-27 | 2015-08-25 | Adonit Co., Ltd. | Method and system of data input for an electronic device equipped with a touch screen |
CN102662577B (en) | 2012-03-29 | 2016-08-10 | 华为终端有限公司 | A kind of cursor operating method based on three dimensional display and mobile terminal |
US9146655B2 (en) | 2012-04-06 | 2015-09-29 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and device for executing object on display |
KR101924095B1 (en) | 2012-04-06 | 2018-11-30 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Electronic Device And Method Of Controlling The Same |
US9104260B2 (en) | 2012-04-10 | 2015-08-11 | Typesoft Technologies, Inc. | Systems and methods for detecting a press on a touch-sensitive surface |
WO2013154720A1 (en) | 2012-04-13 | 2013-10-17 | Tk Holdings Inc. | Pressure sensor including a pressure sensitive material for use with control systems and methods of using the same |
US20130271355A1 (en) | 2012-04-13 | 2013-10-17 | Nokia Corporation | Multi-segment wearable accessory |
US20150169059A1 (en) | 2012-04-18 | 2015-06-18 | Nokia Corporation | Display apparatus with haptic feedback |
TWI459287B (en) | 2012-04-20 | 2014-11-01 | Hon Hai Prec Ind Co Ltd | Touch control method and electronic system utilizing the same |
CN103649885B (en) | 2012-04-27 | 2017-03-01 | 松下知识产权经营株式会社 | Tactile cue device, tactile cue method, drive signal generating means and drive signal generation method |
EP3056982B1 (en) | 2012-05-02 | 2020-10-14 | Sony Corporation | Terminal apparatus, display control method and recording medium |
CN108052264B (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2021-04-27 | 苹果公司 | Device, method and graphical user interface for moving and placing user interface objects |
WO2013169849A2 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2013-11-14 | Industries Llc Yknots | Device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying user interface objects corresponding to an application |
WO2013169842A2 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2013-11-14 | Yknots Industries Llc | Device, method, and graphical user interface for selecting object within a group of objects |
WO2013169877A2 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2013-11-14 | Yknots Industries Llc | Device, method, and graphical user interface for selecting user interface objects |
DE112013002409T5 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2015-02-26 | Apple Inc. | Apparatus, method and graphical user interface for displaying additional information in response to a user contact |
US20150234493A1 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2015-08-20 | Nima Parivar | Varying output for a computing device based on tracking windows |
WO2013169843A1 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2013-11-14 | Yknots Industries Llc | Device, method, and graphical user interface for manipulating framed graphical objects |
KR101823288B1 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2018-01-29 | 애플 인크. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for transitioning between display states in response to gesture |
WO2013169875A2 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2013-11-14 | Yknots Industries Llc | Device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying content associated with a corresponding affordance |
WO2013169865A2 (en) * | 2012-05-09 | 2013-11-14 | Yknots Industries Llc | Device, method, and graphical user interface for moving a user interface object based on an intensity of a press input |
WO2013169851A2 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2013-11-14 | Yknots Industries Llc | Device, method, and graphical user interface for facilitating user interaction with controls in a user interface |
EP3185116B1 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2019-09-11 | Apple Inc. | Device, method and graphical user interface for providing tactile feedback for operations performed in a user interface |
WO2013169845A1 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2013-11-14 | Yknots Industries Llc | Device, method, and graphical user interface for scrolling nested regions |
WO2013169854A2 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2013-11-14 | Yknots Industries Llc | Device, method, and graphical user interface for providing feedback for changing activation states of a user interface object |
WO2013169070A1 (en) | 2012-05-11 | 2013-11-14 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Multiple window providing apparatus and method |
US9454303B2 (en) | 2012-05-16 | 2016-09-27 | Google Inc. | Gesture touch inputs for controlling video on a touchscreen |
US20130307790A1 (en) | 2012-05-17 | 2013-11-21 | Nokia Corporation | Methods And Apparatus For Device Control |
CN111178332A (en) | 2012-05-18 | 2020-05-19 | 苹果公司 | Device, method and graphical user interface for manipulating a user interface |
US9360942B2 (en) | 2012-05-21 | 2016-06-07 | Door Number 3 | Cursor driven interface for layer control |
US8816989B2 (en) | 2012-05-22 | 2014-08-26 | Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | User interface navigation utilizing pressure-sensitive touch |
US9251763B2 (en) | 2012-05-25 | 2016-02-02 | Picmonkey, Llc | System and method for image collage editing |
WO2013180454A1 (en) | 2012-05-29 | 2013-12-05 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method for displaying item in terminal and terminal using the same |
JP2013250602A (en) | 2012-05-30 | 2013-12-12 | Seiko Epson Corp | Terminal device, control method of terminal device and program |
US9418672B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2016-08-16 | Apple Inc. | Navigation application with adaptive instruction text |
CN102799347B (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2017-01-04 | 北京小米科技有限责任公司 | User interface interaction method and device applied to touch screen equipment and touch screen equipment |
CN102819401A (en) | 2012-06-08 | 2012-12-12 | 中标软件有限公司 | Android operating system and desktop icon arrangement method thereof |
KR101909030B1 (en) | 2012-06-08 | 2018-10-17 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | A Method of Editing Video and a Digital Device Thereof |
US9063595B2 (en) | 2012-06-08 | 2015-06-23 | Apple Inc. | Devices and methods for reducing power usage of a touch-sensitive display |
JP2013257657A (en) | 2012-06-11 | 2013-12-26 | Fujitsu Ltd | Information terminal equipment and display control method |
US9041667B2 (en) | 2012-06-12 | 2015-05-26 | Blackberry Limited | Electronic device and method of control of displays |
KR20130142301A (en) | 2012-06-19 | 2013-12-30 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Device and method for setting menu environment in terminal |
US20140002374A1 (en) | 2012-06-29 | 2014-01-02 | Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | Text selection utilizing pressure-sensitive touch |
US20140013271A1 (en) | 2012-07-05 | 2014-01-09 | Research In Motion Limited | Prioritization of multitasking applications in a mobile device interface |
US20140026098A1 (en) | 2012-07-19 | 2014-01-23 | M2J Think Box, Inc. | Systems and methods for navigating an interface of an electronic device |
US9298295B2 (en) | 2012-07-25 | 2016-03-29 | Facebook, Inc. | Gestures for auto-correct |
KR102014775B1 (en) | 2012-07-30 | 2019-08-27 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same |
JP2014032506A (en) | 2012-08-02 | 2014-02-20 | Sharp Corp | Information processing device, selection operation detection method, and program |
CN103959802B (en) | 2012-08-10 | 2018-01-26 | 松下电器(美国)知识产权公司 | Image provides method, dispensing device and reception device |
KR101946365B1 (en) | 2012-08-20 | 2019-02-11 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Display device and Method for controlling the same |
US9280206B2 (en) | 2012-08-20 | 2016-03-08 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | System and method for perceiving images with multimodal feedback |
US9720586B2 (en) | 2012-08-21 | 2017-08-01 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Apparatus and method for providing for interaction with content within a digital bezel |
US9250783B2 (en) | 2012-08-21 | 2016-02-02 | Apple Inc. | Toggle gesture during drag gesture |
TWI484405B (en) | 2012-08-23 | 2015-05-11 | Egalax Empia Technology Inc | Method for displaying graphical user interface and electronic device using the same |
KR101946366B1 (en) | 2012-08-23 | 2019-02-11 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Display device and Method for controlling the same |
US9063731B2 (en) | 2012-08-27 | 2015-06-23 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Ultra low power apparatus and method to wake up a main processor |
JP6077794B2 (en) | 2012-08-29 | 2017-02-08 | キヤノン株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, control method therefor, and program |
KR20140029720A (en) | 2012-08-29 | 2014-03-11 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for controlling mobile terminal |
KR101956170B1 (en) | 2012-08-29 | 2019-03-08 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Apparatus and method for storing an image of camera device and terminal equipment having a camera |
US8732613B2 (en) | 2012-09-06 | 2014-05-20 | Google Inc. | Dynamic user interface for navigating among GUI elements |
JP5977627B2 (en) | 2012-09-07 | 2016-08-24 | シャープ株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program |
US9696879B2 (en) | 2012-09-07 | 2017-07-04 | Google Inc. | Tab scrubbing using navigation gestures |
US20140071060A1 (en) | 2012-09-11 | 2014-03-13 | International Business Machines Corporation | Prevention of accidental triggers of button events |
US20140078343A1 (en) | 2012-09-20 | 2014-03-20 | Htc Corporation | Methods for generating video and multiple still images simultaneously and apparatuses using the same |
US9063563B1 (en) | 2012-09-25 | 2015-06-23 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Gesture actions for interface elements |
US9671943B2 (en) | 2012-09-28 | 2017-06-06 | Dassault Systemes Simulia Corp. | Touch-enabled complex data entry |
US9372538B2 (en) | 2012-09-28 | 2016-06-21 | Denso International America, Inc. | Multiple-force, dynamically-adjusted, 3-D touch surface with feedback for human machine interface (HMI) |
US9785217B2 (en) | 2012-09-28 | 2017-10-10 | Synaptics Incorporated | System and method for low power input object detection and interaction |
US9927959B2 (en) | 2012-10-05 | 2018-03-27 | Tactual Labs Co. | Hybrid systems and methods for low-latency user input processing and feedback |
US20140109016A1 (en) | 2012-10-16 | 2014-04-17 | Yu Ouyang | Gesture-based cursor control |
KR102032336B1 (en) | 2012-10-19 | 2019-11-08 | 한국전자통신연구원 | Touch panel providing tactile feedback in response to variable pressure and operation method thereof |
US20140111670A1 (en) | 2012-10-23 | 2014-04-24 | Nvidia Corporation | System and method for enhanced image capture |
US20140118268A1 (en) | 2012-11-01 | 2014-05-01 | Google Inc. | Touch screen operation using additional inputs |
US9448694B2 (en) | 2012-11-09 | 2016-09-20 | Intel Corporation | Graphical user interface for navigating applications |
CN103019586B (en) | 2012-11-16 | 2017-03-15 | 小米科技有限责任公司 | User interface management method and device |
US10185416B2 (en) | 2012-11-20 | 2019-01-22 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | User gesture input to wearable electronic device involving movement of device |
US20140152581A1 (en) | 2012-11-30 | 2014-06-05 | Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | Force as a device action modifier |
JP5786909B2 (en) | 2012-11-30 | 2015-09-30 | キヤノンマーケティングジャパン株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, information processing system, information display method, control method, and program |
KR20140071118A (en) | 2012-12-03 | 2014-06-11 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method for displaying for virtual button an electronic device thereof |
US10282088B2 (en) | 2012-12-06 | 2019-05-07 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Configuration of application execution spaces and sub-spaces for sharing data on a mobile tough screen device |
US9189131B2 (en) | 2012-12-11 | 2015-11-17 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Context menus |
JP5794399B2 (en) | 2012-12-12 | 2015-10-14 | 株式会社村田製作所 | Touch input device |
US20140168093A1 (en) | 2012-12-13 | 2014-06-19 | Nvidia Corporation | Method and system of emulating pressure sensitivity on a surface |
US20140168153A1 (en) | 2012-12-17 | 2014-06-19 | Corning Incorporated | Touch screen systems and methods based on touch location and touch force |
KR20140079110A (en) | 2012-12-18 | 2014-06-26 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile terminal and operation method thereof |
KR101457632B1 (en) | 2012-12-20 | 2014-11-10 | 주식회사 팬택 | Mobile electronic device having program notification function and program notification method thereof |
DE112012006009T5 (en) | 2012-12-20 | 2014-11-27 | Intel Corporation | Touch screen with force sensors |
US9244576B1 (en) | 2012-12-21 | 2016-01-26 | Cypress Semiconductor Corporation | User interface with child-lock feature |
US20150332107A1 (en) | 2012-12-24 | 2015-11-19 | Nokia Technologies Oy | An apparatus and associated methods |
EP2939098B1 (en) | 2012-12-29 | 2018-10-10 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for transitioning between touch input to display output relationships |
WO2014105279A1 (en) | 2012-12-29 | 2014-07-03 | Yknots Industries Llc | Device, method, and graphical user interface for switching between user interfaces |
WO2014105277A2 (en) | 2012-12-29 | 2014-07-03 | Yknots Industries Llc | Device, method, and graphical user interface for moving a cursor according to a change in an appearance of a control icon with simulated three-dimensional characteristics |
EP3467634B1 (en) | 2012-12-29 | 2020-09-23 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for navigating user interface hierarchies |
CN104903835B (en) | 2012-12-29 | 2018-05-04 | 苹果公司 | For abandoning equipment, method and the graphic user interface of generation tactile output for more contact gestures |
KR102001332B1 (en) | 2012-12-29 | 2019-07-17 | 애플 인크. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for determining whether to scroll or select contents |
KR102072582B1 (en) | 2012-12-31 | 2020-02-03 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | a method and an apparatus for dual display |
US9665762B2 (en) | 2013-01-11 | 2017-05-30 | Synaptics Incorporated | Tiered wakeup strategy |
US10082949B2 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2018-09-25 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Apparatus and method for application peel |
JP6075854B2 (en) | 2013-01-21 | 2017-02-08 | キヤノン株式会社 | DISPLAY CONTROL DEVICE, ITS CONTROL METHOD, PROGRAM, IMAGING DEVICE AND STORAGE MEDIUM |
US9141259B2 (en) | 2013-01-21 | 2015-09-22 | International Business Machines Corporation | Pressure navigation on a touch sensitive user interface |
KR20140097902A (en) | 2013-01-30 | 2014-08-07 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Mobile terminal for generating haptic pattern and method therefor |
US20140210798A1 (en) | 2013-01-31 | 2014-07-31 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Digital Drawing Using A Touch-Sensitive Device To Detect A Position And Force For An Input Event |
KR102133410B1 (en) | 2013-01-31 | 2020-07-14 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Operating Method of Multi-Tasking and Electronic Device supporting the same |
US9652136B2 (en) | 2013-02-05 | 2017-05-16 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Method and apparatus for a slider interface element |
EP2767896B1 (en) | 2013-02-14 | 2019-01-16 | LG Electronics Inc. | Mobile terminal and method of controlling the mobile terminal |
US20140237408A1 (en) | 2013-02-15 | 2014-08-21 | Flatfrog Laboratories Ab | Interpretation of pressure based gesture |
KR101761190B1 (en) | 2013-02-22 | 2017-07-25 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Method and apparatus for providing user interface in portable terminal |
CN103186345B (en) | 2013-02-25 | 2016-09-14 | 北京极兴莱博信息科技有限公司 | The section system of selection of a kind of literary composition and device |
JP2014165663A (en) | 2013-02-25 | 2014-09-08 | Kyocera Corp | Mobile terminal device, program, and method of controlling mobile terminal device |
US8769431B1 (en) | 2013-02-28 | 2014-07-01 | Roy Varada Prasad | Method of single-handed software operation of large form factor mobile electronic devices |
CN104020868B (en) | 2013-02-28 | 2017-09-01 | 联想(北京)有限公司 | The method and electronic equipment of a kind of information processing |
US9690476B2 (en) | 2013-03-14 | 2017-06-27 | Blackberry Limited | Electronic device and method of displaying information in response to a gesture |
US10203815B2 (en) | 2013-03-14 | 2019-02-12 | Apple Inc. | Application-based touch sensitivity |
WO2014152601A1 (en) | 2013-03-14 | 2014-09-25 | Nike, Inc. | Athletic attribute determinations from image data |
US9274685B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2016-03-01 | Google Technology Holdings LLC | Systems and methods for predictive text entry for small-screen devices with touch-based two-stage text input |
US9225677B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2015-12-29 | Facebook, Inc. | Systems and methods for displaying a digest of messages or notifications without launching applications associated with the messages or notifications |
US9451230B1 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2016-09-20 | Google Inc. | Playback adjustments for digital media items |
CN105051652B (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2019-04-05 | Tk控股公司 | Adaptive man-machine interface for the pressure-sensitive control in the operating environment of dispersion attention and the method using similar product |
US10055418B2 (en) | 2014-03-14 | 2018-08-21 | Highspot, Inc. | Narrowing information search results for presentation to a user |
CN110837329B (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2023-10-24 | 苹果公司 | Method and electronic device for managing user interface |
US9305374B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2016-04-05 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for adjusting the appearance of a control |
CN104077014B (en) | 2013-03-28 | 2018-04-10 | 阿里巴巴集团控股有限公司 | A kind of method and apparatus of information processing |
US9507495B2 (en) | 2013-04-03 | 2016-11-29 | Blackberry Limited | Electronic device and method of displaying information in response to a gesture |
US20140304646A1 (en) | 2013-04-04 | 2014-10-09 | Klip, Inc. | Sliding side menu gui with menu items displaying indicia of updated content |
US9389718B1 (en) | 2013-04-04 | 2016-07-12 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Thumb touch interface |
KR20140122000A (en) | 2013-04-09 | 2014-10-17 | 옥윤선 | Method for tranmitting information using drag input based on mobile messenger, and mobile terminal for tranmitting information using drag input based on mobile messenger |
KR102091235B1 (en) | 2013-04-10 | 2020-03-18 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus and method for editing a message in a portable terminal |
US9146672B2 (en) | 2013-04-10 | 2015-09-29 | Barnes & Noble College Booksellers, Llc | Multidirectional swipe key for virtual keyboard |
US20140306897A1 (en) | 2013-04-10 | 2014-10-16 | Barnesandnoble.Com Llc | Virtual keyboard swipe gestures for cursor movement |
CN103279295A (en) | 2013-05-03 | 2013-09-04 | 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 | Method and device for terminal desktop icon switching |
WO2014179940A1 (en) | 2013-05-08 | 2014-11-13 | Nokia Corporation | An apparatus and associated methods |
KR20140132632A (en) | 2013-05-08 | 2014-11-18 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Portable apparatus and method for displaying a object |
CN104142798A (en) | 2013-05-10 | 2014-11-12 | 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 | Application start method and intelligent terminal equipment provided with touch screen |
US20140344765A1 (en) | 2013-05-17 | 2014-11-20 | Barnesandnoble.Com Llc | Touch Sensitive UI Pinch and Flick Techniques for Managing Active Applications |
KR20140137509A (en) | 2013-05-22 | 2014-12-03 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Operating Method of Notification Screen And Electronic Device supporting the same |
US9307112B2 (en) | 2013-05-31 | 2016-04-05 | Apple Inc. | Identifying dominant and non-dominant images in a burst mode capture |
US9319589B2 (en) | 2013-05-31 | 2016-04-19 | Sony Corporation | Device and method for capturing images and selecting a desired image by tilting the device |
US10282067B2 (en) | 2013-06-04 | 2019-05-07 | Sony Corporation | Method and apparatus of controlling an interface based on touch operations |
US9477393B2 (en) | 2013-06-09 | 2016-10-25 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying application status information |
US9733716B2 (en) | 2013-06-09 | 2017-08-15 | Apple Inc. | Proxy gesture recognizer |
US9626087B2 (en) | 2013-06-09 | 2017-04-18 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for navigating between user interfaces |
US10481769B2 (en) | 2013-06-09 | 2019-11-19 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for providing navigation and search functionalities |
KR102113674B1 (en) | 2013-06-10 | 2020-05-21 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus, method and computer readable recording medium for selecting objects displayed on an electronic device using a multi touch |
US9400601B2 (en) | 2013-06-21 | 2016-07-26 | Nook Digital, Llc | Techniques for paging through digital content on touch screen devices |
CN103309618A (en) | 2013-07-02 | 2013-09-18 | 姜洪明 | Mobile operating system |
US20150012861A1 (en) | 2013-07-02 | 2015-01-08 | Dropbox, Inc. | Syncing content clipboard |
KR102080746B1 (en) | 2013-07-12 | 2020-02-24 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile terminal and control method thereof |
ES2707967T3 (en) | 2013-07-16 | 2019-04-08 | Pinterest Inc | Contextual menu controls based on objects |
US9342228B2 (en) | 2013-07-17 | 2016-05-17 | Blackberry Limited | Device and method for filtering messages using sliding touch input |
KR102187505B1 (en) | 2013-07-22 | 2020-12-08 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Method and apparatus for contriolling display of electronic device |
KR20150013991A (en) | 2013-07-25 | 2015-02-06 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for executing application in electronic device |
US9335897B2 (en) | 2013-08-08 | 2016-05-10 | Palantir Technologies Inc. | Long click display of a context menu |
KR20150019165A (en) | 2013-08-12 | 2015-02-25 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same |
CN104375770B (en) * | 2013-08-14 | 2018-12-14 | 联想(北京)有限公司 | A kind of display methods and electronic equipment |
KR102101741B1 (en) | 2013-08-16 | 2020-05-29 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same |
US9547525B1 (en) | 2013-08-21 | 2017-01-17 | Google Inc. | Drag toolbar to enter tab switching interface |
US9740712B2 (en) | 2013-08-26 | 2017-08-22 | Ab Minenda Oy | System for processing image data, storing image data and accessing image data |
CN104423740B (en) | 2013-08-30 | 2018-07-13 | 唐山东唐电气股份有限公司 | Method for sensing based on capacitive touch device |
KR102332675B1 (en) | 2013-09-02 | 2021-11-30 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Method and apparatus to sharing contents of electronic device |
KR20150026649A (en) | 2013-09-03 | 2015-03-11 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus and method for setting a gesture in an eletronic device |
US20150071547A1 (en) | 2013-09-09 | 2015-03-12 | Apple Inc. | Automated Selection Of Keeper Images From A Burst Photo Captured Set |
JP6138641B2 (en) | 2013-09-13 | 2017-05-31 | 株式会社Nttドコモ | MAP INFORMATION DISPLAY DEVICE, MAP INFORMATION DISPLAY METHOD, AND MAP INFORMATION DISPLAY PROGRAM |
US9407964B2 (en) | 2013-10-25 | 2016-08-02 | Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. | Method and system for navigating video to an instant time |
KR20150049700A (en) | 2013-10-30 | 2015-05-08 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparautus for controlling input in portable device |
US10067651B2 (en) | 2013-11-15 | 2018-09-04 | Thomson Reuters Global Resources Unlimited Company | Navigable layering of viewable areas for hierarchical content |
CN103677632A (en) | 2013-11-19 | 2014-03-26 | 三星电子(中国)研发中心 | Virtual keyboard adjustment method and mobile terminal |
JP6177669B2 (en) | 2013-11-20 | 2017-08-09 | 株式会社Nttドコモ | Image display apparatus and program |
US9111076B2 (en) | 2013-11-20 | 2015-08-18 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Mobile terminal and control method thereof |
US20150153897A1 (en) | 2013-12-03 | 2015-06-04 | Microsoft Corporation | User interface adaptation from an input source identifier change |
CN114237485A (en) | 2013-12-11 | 2022-03-25 | 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 | Touch operation method and device |
JP2015114836A (en) | 2013-12-11 | 2015-06-22 | キヤノン株式会社 | Image processing device, tactile control method, and program |
CN103699295A (en) | 2013-12-12 | 2014-04-02 | 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 | Terminal and icon display method |
US9483118B2 (en) | 2013-12-27 | 2016-11-01 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Methods and systems for selecting media guidance functions based on tactile attributes of a user input |
US9753527B2 (en) | 2013-12-29 | 2017-09-05 | Google Technology Holdings LLC | Apparatus and method for managing graphics buffers for a processor in sleep mode |
US9804665B2 (en) | 2013-12-29 | 2017-10-31 | Google Inc. | Apparatus and method for passing event handling control from a primary processor to a secondary processor during sleep mode |
CN103793134A (en) | 2013-12-30 | 2014-05-14 | 深圳天珑无线科技有限公司 | Touch screen terminal and multi-interface switching method thereof |
KR20150081125A (en) | 2014-01-03 | 2015-07-13 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Particle Effect displayed on Screen of Device |
CN103777850A (en) | 2014-01-17 | 2014-05-07 | 广州华多网络科技有限公司 | Menu display method, device and terminal |
CN104834456A (en) | 2014-02-12 | 2015-08-12 | 深圳富泰宏精密工业有限公司 | Multi-task switching method and system of touch interface and electronic device |
EP3108345B1 (en) | 2014-02-18 | 2019-12-25 | Cambridge Touch Technologies Limited | Dynamic switching of power modes for touch screens using force touch |
CN103838465B (en) | 2014-03-08 | 2018-03-02 | 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 | The desktop icons display methods and device of a kind of vivid and interesting |
US9436348B2 (en) | 2014-03-18 | 2016-09-06 | Blackberry Limited | Method and system for controlling movement of cursor in an electronic device |
JP6247651B2 (en) | 2014-03-24 | 2017-12-13 | 株式会社 ハイディープHiDeep Inc. | Menu operation method and menu operation device including touch input device for performing the same |
US9829979B2 (en) | 2014-04-28 | 2017-11-28 | Ford Global Technologies, Llc | Automotive touchscreen controls with simulated texture for haptic feedback |
KR102129798B1 (en) | 2014-05-08 | 2020-07-03 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Vehicle and method for controlling the same |
CN104020955B (en) | 2014-05-30 | 2016-05-11 | 深圳市爱培科技术股份有限公司 | Based on touch equipment desktop customizing method and the system of WinCE system |
US9032321B1 (en) | 2014-06-16 | 2015-05-12 | Google Inc. | Context-based presentation of a user interface |
CN104021021A (en) | 2014-06-19 | 2014-09-03 | 深圳市中兴移动通信有限公司 | Mobile terminal and method and device for quickly starting mobile terminal through pressure detection |
CN104090719B (en) * | 2014-06-24 | 2017-12-12 | Tcl通讯(宁波)有限公司 | Mobile terminal is according to the method and system of acceleration knots modification translating displayed content |
US9477653B2 (en) | 2014-06-26 | 2016-10-25 | Blackberry Limited | Character entry for an electronic device using a position sensing keyboard |
US9294719B2 (en) | 2014-06-30 | 2016-03-22 | Salesforce.Com, Inc. | Systems, methods, and apparatuses for implementing in-app live support functionality |
US20160004393A1 (en) | 2014-07-01 | 2016-01-07 | Google Inc. | Wearable device user interface control |
TW201602893A (en) | 2014-07-07 | 2016-01-16 | 欣興電子股份有限公司 | Method for providing auxiliary information and touch control display apparatus using the same |
US20160019718A1 (en) | 2014-07-16 | 2016-01-21 | Wipro Limited | Method and system for providing visual feedback in a virtual reality environment |
US9363644B2 (en) | 2014-07-16 | 2016-06-07 | Yahoo! Inc. | System and method for detection of indoor tracking units |
US9600114B2 (en) | 2014-07-31 | 2017-03-21 | International Business Machines Corporation | Variable pressure touch system |
KR20160021524A (en) | 2014-08-18 | 2016-02-26 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same |
US10203858B2 (en) | 2014-08-28 | 2019-02-12 | Blackberry Limited | Portable electronic device and method of controlling the display of information |
KR102497720B1 (en) | 2014-09-02 | 2023-02-10 | 애플 인크. | Semantic framework for variable haptic output |
US20160132139A1 (en) | 2014-11-11 | 2016-05-12 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and Methods for Controlling a Cursor Based on Finger Pressure and Direction |
CN104331239A (en) | 2014-11-26 | 2015-02-04 | 上海斐讯数据通信技术有限公司 | Method and system for operating handheld equipment through one hand |
KR20150021977A (en) | 2015-01-19 | 2015-03-03 | 인포뱅크 주식회사 | Method for Configuring UI in Portable Terminal |
US20160224220A1 (en) | 2015-02-04 | 2016-08-04 | Wipro Limited | System and method for navigating between user interface screens |
US9990107B2 (en) | 2015-03-08 | 2018-06-05 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for displaying and using menus |
US9632664B2 (en) | 2015-03-08 | 2017-04-25 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for manipulating user interface objects with visual and/or haptic feedback |
US10095396B2 (en) | 2015-03-08 | 2018-10-09 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for interacting with a control object while dragging another object |
US10048757B2 (en) | 2015-03-08 | 2018-08-14 | Apple Inc. | Devices and methods for controlling media presentation |
US9645732B2 (en) | 2015-03-08 | 2017-05-09 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for displaying and using menus |
US9639184B2 (en) | 2015-03-19 | 2017-05-02 | Apple Inc. | Touch input cursor manipulation |
US9785305B2 (en) | 2015-03-19 | 2017-10-10 | Apple Inc. | Touch input cursor manipulation |
US20170045981A1 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2017-02-16 | Apple Inc. | Devices and Methods for Processing Touch Inputs Based on Their Intensities |
US10346030B2 (en) | 2015-06-07 | 2019-07-09 | Apple Inc. | Devices and methods for navigating between user interfaces |
US9891811B2 (en) | 2015-06-07 | 2018-02-13 | Apple Inc. | Devices and methods for navigating between user interfaces |
US9860451B2 (en) | 2015-06-07 | 2018-01-02 | Apple Inc. | Devices and methods for capturing and interacting with enhanced digital images |
US9830048B2 (en) | 2015-06-07 | 2017-11-28 | Apple Inc. | Devices and methods for processing touch inputs with instructions in a web page |
DK179328B1 (en) | 2015-06-07 | 2018-05-07 | Apple Inc | DEVICES, METHODS AND GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACES FOR PROVIDING AND INTERACTING WITH NOTIFICATIONS |
US10200598B2 (en) | 2015-06-07 | 2019-02-05 | Apple Inc. | Devices and methods for capturing and interacting with enhanced digital images |
US10319177B2 (en) | 2015-07-31 | 2019-06-11 | Novomatic Ag | User interface with slider and popup window feature |
US20170046058A1 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2017-02-16 | Apple Inc. | Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for Adjusting User Interface Objects |
US10235035B2 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2019-03-19 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for content navigation and manipulation |
US10248308B2 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2019-04-02 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for manipulating user interfaces with physical gestures |
US9880735B2 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2018-01-30 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for manipulating user interface objects with visual and/or haptic feedback |
US10416800B2 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2019-09-17 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for adjusting user interface objects |
US10346510B2 (en) | 2015-09-29 | 2019-07-09 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for providing handwriting support in document editing |
US11182068B2 (en) | 2015-10-27 | 2021-11-23 | Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. | Method and system for interacting with a touch screen |
US10506165B2 (en) | 2015-10-29 | 2019-12-10 | Welch Allyn, Inc. | Concussion screening system |
JP6685695B2 (en) | 2015-10-30 | 2020-04-22 | キヤノン株式会社 | Terminal and imaging device |
KR101749933B1 (en) * | 2015-11-12 | 2017-06-22 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same |
KR20170085419A (en) | 2016-01-14 | 2017-07-24 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method for operating based on touch input and electronic device thereof |
CN107329602A (en) | 2016-04-28 | 2017-11-07 | 珠海金山办公软件有限公司 | A kind of touch-screen track recognizing method and device |
US10402042B2 (en) | 2016-06-13 | 2019-09-03 | Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | Force vector cursor control |
US10152173B2 (en) | 2016-08-25 | 2018-12-11 | Parade Technologies, Ltd. | Using 3D touch for signal conditioning and noise reduction on a touch surface |
DK201670720A1 (en) | 2016-09-06 | 2018-03-26 | Apple Inc | Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for Generating Tactile Outputs |
DK201670728A1 (en) | 2016-09-06 | 2018-03-19 | Apple Inc | Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for Providing Feedback During Interaction with an Intensity-Sensitive Button |
US10445935B2 (en) | 2017-05-26 | 2019-10-15 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Using tracking to simulate direct tablet interaction in mixed reality |
US20180364898A1 (en) | 2017-06-14 | 2018-12-20 | Zihan Chen | Systems, Devices, and/or Methods for Managing Text Rendering |
US10908783B2 (en) | 2018-11-06 | 2021-02-02 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for interacting with user interface objects and providing feedback |
-
2016
- 2016-01-28 US US15/009,688 patent/US10235035B2/en active Active
- 2016-08-10 EP EP16753796.8A patent/EP3335100B1/en active Active
- 2016-08-10 CN CN201680047164.7A patent/CN107924249B/en active Active
- 2016-08-10 WO PCT/US2016/046407 patent/WO2017027625A2/en active Application Filing
-
2019
- 2019-03-14 US US16/354,035 patent/US10884608B2/en active Active
-
2020
- 2020-12-30 US US17/138,676 patent/US20210117054A1/en not_active Abandoned
Cited By (14)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US11354033B2 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2022-06-07 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for managing icons in a user interface region |
US11947724B2 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2024-04-02 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for providing tactile feedback for operations performed in a user interface |
US11221675B2 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2022-01-11 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for providing tactile feedback for operations performed in a user interface |
US11314407B2 (en) | 2012-05-09 | 2022-04-26 | Apple Inc. | Device, method, and graphical user interface for providing feedback for changing activation states of a user interface object |
US11921975B2 (en) | 2015-03-08 | 2024-03-05 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for manipulating user interface objects with visual and/or haptic feedback |
US11112957B2 (en) | 2015-03-08 | 2021-09-07 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for interacting with a control object while dragging another object |
US11550471B2 (en) | 2015-03-19 | 2023-01-10 | Apple Inc. | Touch input cursor manipulation |
US11681429B2 (en) | 2015-06-07 | 2023-06-20 | Apple Inc. | Devices and methods for capturing and interacting with enhanced digital images |
US11240424B2 (en) | 2015-06-07 | 2022-02-01 | Apple Inc. | Devices and methods for capturing and interacting with enhanced digital images |
US11835985B2 (en) | 2015-06-07 | 2023-12-05 | Apple Inc. | Devices and methods for capturing and interacting with enhanced digital images |
US11231831B2 (en) | 2015-06-07 | 2022-01-25 | Apple Inc. | Devices and methods for content preview based on touch input intensity |
US11327648B2 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2022-05-10 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for manipulating user interface objects with visual and/or haptic feedback |
US11740785B2 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2023-08-29 | Apple Inc. | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for manipulating user interface objects with visual and/or haptic feedback |
US11182017B2 (en) | 2015-08-10 | 2021-11-23 | Apple Inc. | Devices and methods for processing touch inputs based on their intensities |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CN107924249B (en) | 2020-11-10 |
US20190212896A1 (en) | 2019-07-11 |
US20170046039A1 (en) | 2017-02-16 |
US10884608B2 (en) | 2021-01-05 |
EP3335100B1 (en) | 2020-10-21 |
WO2017027625A2 (en) | 2017-02-16 |
EP3335100A2 (en) | 2018-06-20 |
CN107924249A (en) | 2018-04-17 |
US10235035B2 (en) | 2019-03-19 |
WO2017027625A3 (en) | 2017-03-23 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US10884608B2 (en) | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for content navigation and manipulation | |
US11921978B2 (en) | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for navigating, displaying, and editing media items with multiple display modes | |
US11550471B2 (en) | Touch input cursor manipulation | |
AU2022224714B2 (en) | Devices and methods for interacting with an application switching user interface | |
US10635299B2 (en) | Device, method, and graphical user interface for manipulating windows in split screen mode | |
EP3335103B1 (en) | Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for manipulating user interfaces with physical gestures | |
US20200081614A1 (en) | Device and Method for Facilitating Setting Autofocus Reference Point in Camera Application User Interface | |
US20190018562A1 (en) | Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Scrolling Nested Regions | |
US20220222093A1 (en) | User interface for a touch screen device in communication with a physical keyboard | |
EP2939097B1 (en) | Device, method, and graphical user interface for navigating user interface hierarchies | |
US10691330B2 (en) | Device, method, and graphical user interface for force-sensitive gestures on the back of a device | |
US20180088750A1 (en) | Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for Creating and Displaying Application Windows | |
WO2016164181A1 (en) | Gesture controlled display of content items | |
US20240069716A1 (en) | Devices and Methods for Interacting with an Application Switching User Interface | |
US11966578B2 (en) | Devices and methods for integrating video with user interface navigation | |
US20190369862A1 (en) | Devices and Methods for Integrating Video with User Interface Navigation |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: APPLICATION DISPATCHED FROM PREEXAM, NOT YET DOCKETED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |